Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
Title
1.1
Scope of Section
1.1.1
Description
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1 .4
Ref.
Trtle
1-1
1.8
Control of Site
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-8.1
1.6.2
1.6.2.1
1.6.2.2
1.6.3
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
1.7.6
1.7.6
1.8
Control ofWoHcs
1-7
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
17
1-7
Page No.
1.1.5
Standards
1-2
1.2
Project Works
1 ~2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
TheWorb
Silence of Specifications
1.3
Project Site
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.4
Intent of Contract
The Site
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.5
Engineer's Facilities
1.!i.1
1.5.2
1.6.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
1.5.6
1.5.7
1.6.8
1.6.9
1.5.10
1.5.11
1.6.12
General
12
12
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
13
13
13
1-3
1-3
1-3
13
1*3
1.9
1-6
1-6
15
1-6
1-6
1-5
1.9.1
1.911 .1
1.9. 1.2
HI
1-6
1-6
Site Cleaning During Progress of Works 1-6
Site Cleenlng
16
16
1...S
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
1 7
1-7
1.8.3.1
1.8.3.2
1.8.3.3
1.8.4
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
l?age No.
17
1-7
1 7
1-8
1-8
1-8
HI
1.8.2
Use of Exploaives
1:9.2.1
Control Measures
1.9.2.2
Blasting Procedures
1.9.2.3
lixplosi ves inventorv
1.8.3
Flra Precaution
Measurement and Baals of Payment
1.9.4
19
1-9
1 9
1-9
19
t-4il
1 9
Ref.
Title
1.10
Management Procedures
1.10,1
1.10.2
1-10
1-11
1.10..3
1.10.4
Project Admlnllltratlon
Progress Photogn~pha/ Vldeoe
1-11
1.10.6
MN~Urement and
1.10.6
Buts of Payment
Items In the Bill of Quantities
1.11
Subm ittals
PagaNo.
1-10
1 11
1-12
112
h12
1.11.1
1.11.2
Genen~l
1-12
Action SubrnltQIIs
111..3
Informational Submittals
1.11.4
1,11.6
1-13
114
1-14
1.11.6
Engineer Action
Record (As-Built) Drewing
1.11.7
1,11.8
1 14
115
1-15
116
1.12
1.12.1
Storage of Materials
1.12.2
1.12.3
Hendling Materials
Meterfale Supplied bv Employ
Locel Material Sourcea
1.12.4
1.12.5
1.12.8
1-15
1-15
1 16
1-16
1.12.7
Samplfng and Testing Proctduru
1.12.-'7.1
SamPIng
1-16
MB
1,12.7.2
Source Tests
1 16
1-16
1.12:7.3
1.12.7.4
1.12.7,5
1-16
Cantroi Tests
Check TI!Sts
1-16
1-16
1. 12.7.8
1.12.8
1.12.9
1.13
Contractor's Plant
and Equipment
1.13.1
General
1 17
1-17
1-17
1-17
1 17
Ref;
Title
1. 13.2
1;13.3
Page No.
1. 13.4
1.14
1.14.1
H 7.
M7
1 17
1-17
Temporary Facilities
1-17
1.14.1.1
Genll'ally
1.14:1.2
Temp0n1ry Site Facilities
1. 14.2
Scaffolding and FeiN Work
1.14.3
Water Supply
1.14.4
Electrldty Supply
1,14.6
Dlllllllfonal and Warning Signa
1 17
1-18
1-18
118
1-18
1.14.6
1-18
1-18
1. 14.7
1. 14.8
1 19
1.16
1-19
1.16.1
1 18
Commemorative Plaque
Opening ceremony
1-19
119
1.15.4
1.16
1-19
1.16.2
1.15.3
119
119
1.18.1
t.19
1.18.2
Scope of Peyment
1-19
J
1.1
1.1.1
Scope of Section
Description
1
This Section describes the general requirements
that apply to all sections of the Specification where
relevant. All sections of the Specification are to be read
In conjunction with this Section.
1.1.2
1.1.3
as
asse
BST
BSEN
CB
CBR
cone
CIE
CISPR 15
DBSC
DIN
EN
Equiv
FSS
GGBFS
hwy
ht
H:V
IEC
lEE
ISO
LEED
LL
LS.
max
MCCB
min
MUTCD
MV
N.C.
NEC
NEMA
N.O
OS
pav't
P.C.
PCC
PE
PFA
P.l.
P.L
PLMCS
PTFE
PVC
qty
RC
RCP
rdwy
ROW
SBSC
SCM
S.G.
51
Sta
SWG
TBSC
uPVC
VOE
wgt
1.1.4
highway
height
horizontal:verticel
International Electrical Commission
Institution of Electrical Engineers (UKI
International Organization for
Standardization
Leadership in Energy and Environmental
Design
liquid limit
lump sum
maximum
molded case circuit breaker
minimum (or minute)
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices
Medium Voltage
Normally Closed (electrical contact)
National Electrical Code (UKI
National Electrical Manufacturers'
Association (USA I
Normally Open (electrical contact)
Oman! Standards
pavement
prime cost
Portland cement concrete
polyethylene
Pulverized fly ash
plasticity index
plastic limit
Public Lighting Management and Control
System
Polytetranuoroethylene
polyvinyl chloride
quantity
reinforced concrete
reinforced concrete pipe
roadway
right-of-way
single bituminous seal coat
Supplementary cementing material/s
specific gravity
Systeme International D'Unites
Station (location along a survey line)
standard wire gauge (UK)
triple bituminous seal coat
unplasticized polyvinyl chloride
Verband Deutscher Electrotechnlker
weight
Units of Measurement
11
~
~
~~<G~n~ral
sq.mm
sq.cm
sq.m
ha
cu.m
gm
kg
t
ml
ltr
Pa
Mpa
N
kN
MN
A
rnA
w
kW
kj
c
Hz
rpm
kmlh
sec
min
h
mS
dB
dBA
ppm
in.
ft
sq.in
sq.ft
cu.ft
lb.
psi
gal
gal(lmp)
mph
HP
USG
1.1.5
.
~
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
~
square millimeter/s
square centimeter/s
square meterfs
hectare/s
cubic meter/s
gramfs
kl logram/s
metric ton (1,000 kg)
milliliterIs
liter/s
Pascalls
Mega Pascal/s = Nfsq.mm
Newton/s
kilo Newtons
mega Newtons
amperes
milli amperes
volt/s
Wan
kilowatt
kilojoule/s
Celsius {Centigrade)
Hertz {Frequency)
revolutions per minute
kilometers per hour
seconds
minute/s (or minimum)
houris
milli Siemens
decibel!s
decibels absolute
parts per million
inch/inches (1 in . .., 25.4 mm)
foot/feet (1ft .. 0.3048 m)
square i nch/inches
square foot/feet
cubic foot/feet
poundls (weight)
pounds per square inch
gallon/s (U.S.)
gallon/s (Imperial)
miles per hour
horsepower
American gage
Standards
1.2
Project Works
1.2.1
The Works
1.2.2
Intent of Contract
1.2.3
Silence of Specifications
1.3
Project Site
1.3.1
The Site
1.3.2
l-2
Sultnn.,te of Omot
General)
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.4
1.4.1
{LS.)
1.4.2
1.4.3
i.
ii.
1.5
Engineer's Facilities
1.5.1
General
1.5.2
~~
MinhJtrv
or
T..-anaport &
~~<G~~eral
Communle~tlone
OGRlT
1.5.3
1.6.4
Water supply.
Potable water supply.
Drainage system.
Fire fighting appliances.
Cleaning f ecit ities and services and general
attendance.
Telephone.
Computers
Camera
Thermometers
Colored Photocopiers.
Fax machines.
4
The Contractor shall provide new furniture and
equipment suitable far the i ntended user.
5
All office accommodation and facilities, services
and equipment shall be continuously available to the
Engineer in full working order within four weeks of t he
start of the mobilization period unless otherwise stated
in the Special Specifications, and before any permanent
construction operations are commenced. However, the
Engineer may permit work to commence before the full
facilities are available if adequate facilities are provided
by the Contract or. If the Contractor fails to provide the
required facilities he shall bear the cost of alternative
arrangements made by t he Engineer.
6
Maintenance of the offices shell include supplies of
pencils, pens, drawing paper, other st ationery, survey
pegs, brushes, paint and similar consumable materials,
as required by the Engl neer.
7
The Contractor shall submit fully detailed proposals
for all facilities to the Engi neer and obtain approval prior
to hl re or purchase and delivery to the Site.
8
The Contractor shall service and maintain and clean
t he Engineer's offices on a daily basis; provide all
consumables and supplies as and when requested,
including drinking wat er, gas and stocks for making tea
and coffee beverages.
1..
1.5.5
1.5.6
1.5.7
Thermometers
1.5.8
Test Equipment
1.5.9
Inspection Facilities
1.5.10
1.5.11
Laboratory
2
The Contractor shall provide skilled technicians and
unskilled laborers of the types end numbers stated in the
Special Specifications. Personnel once assigned to the
laboratory shall not be removed except at the direction,
or with the approval, ofthe Engineer.
3
4
The Contractor shall provide and maintain the
laboratory equipment, apparatus and consumable
supplies, including stationery and test forms, needed for
execution of all standard tests required by the ContracL
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his
approval within 15 days of the start of mobilization a
complete listing of the equipment, apparatus and
supplies. The list shall include names of the
manufactures, and descriptive literature shell be
attach ad as necessary or appropriate.
1.5.12
3
No payment for maintenance of the Engineer's
office and accommodation will be made for any period
of delay beyond the Time for Completion or extended
Time for Completion if relevant.
4
Maintenance of the site laboratory and mobile site
laboratory shall be measured and paid for monthly end
shall Include for chemicals end other consumables. No
payment will be made for any period of delay beyond
the end of the Time for Completion or extended Time for
Completion if relevant.
5
If the Specification does not call for provision of a
site laboratory, no separate payment will be made for
samples and tests on materials, the cost of which will be
deemed to be included in the rates for the relevant items
in the Bill of Quantities.
7
No separate measurement or payment will be
made, for any other items in this Sub-section, including
computers, telephones, digital camera, thermometers,
test equipment, fax machine and colored photocopier,
inspection facilities and car port, all of which costs are
deemed to be included in the rates for other items stated
in the Bill of Quantities.
1.5.13
ii
iii
iv
vi
vii
Provision of laboratory
(type)
(nr of months)
(nr of months)
'V
~
./"--~<General
viii
Maintenance of laboratory
(type)
(nr of months)
1.6
Control of Site
1.6.1
1.6.2
Site Cleaning
1.6.2.1
1.6.2.2
1.6.3
1.7
1.7.1
Hi
1.7.2
1.7.3
Temporary Structures
1.7.4
General)
3
If and where it is necessary for Contractor's plant or
vehicles to cross public highways and where required by
the Engineer, all such crossings shall be equipped with
manually controlled traffic lights.
During extended
periods when the Contractor's plant is not using the
crossing, the traffic signals shall be switched off and the
advance warning signs obscured.
1.7.6
2
Where diversions are required by the Engineer (or
by the Royal Oman Police through the Engineer) to be
surfaced with bituminous materials, the bituminous
surfacing, the sub-base shall be paid per cubic meters
(cu.m), and the prime coat will be paid by square meter
applied (sq.m).
4
Setting out utility works shall be as shown on the
Drawings or as instructed on Site. Stake-out shall be
revised if, in the opinion of the Engineer, modifications
of I ine or grade are required.
5
7
All dimensions and levels on the Drawings and the
Site, shall be checked particularly the correlation
between components and the work in place. Materials
and components shall not be ordered, or work carried
out, until discrepancies have been resolved with the
Engineer.
1.8.2
1.7.6
i.
ii.
m.
iv.
1.8
Control of Works
1.8.1
(months)
(cu.m).
(cu.m).
(sq.m)
1.8.3
1.8.3.1
1.8.3.2
Categories of Obstructions
1-7
~
~
OG~~T
./"'..
~<:General
1.8.3.3
Existing Utilities
2
The costs of all work concerning verification and
identification of existing utilities. Including excavating
any trial pits, detection means, mapp-ng detailing of
drawings and co-ordination with respective authorities
shall be fully borne by the Contractor
1.8.4
1.9
1.9.1
i.
ii.
iiL
iv.
v.
5
The Contractor shall take into account, in his
Program of Work, the time effort involved in the
18 .
1.9.1.1
ii.
ia.
iv.
v.
vl.
vii.
viii.
Contingency Arrangements.
ix.
)(_
Accident Procedures,
xi.
xiL
xHI.
Monthly Report_
xiv.
2
The Contractor shall take into account that the
works under this Contract may be undertaken
simultaneously with other contracts. The Contractor is to
coordinate safety procedures with the Engineer and
Safety Representatives from other contractors to
implement and maintain a common safety strategy.
If in the opinion of the Engineer there is an
3
infringement or breach in the approved Health and
Safety Plan, the Engineer reserves the right to instruct
the Contractor to undertake immediate corrective action
without any liability for any additional costs or time
implication incurred by the Contractor in undertaking the
corrective action.
Upon the Engineer's approval of the Safety
4
Program the Contractor shall, for the full term of the
Contract, operate the Safety Program, maintain accurate
records of safety act;vities and accident, and submit
safety and accident reports to the Engineer on the
approved forms.
1.9.1.2
1.9.2
Use of Explosives
1.9.2.1
Control Measures
Blasting Procedures
1.9.2.3
Explosives Inventory
1.9.3
Fire Precautions
1.9.4
be
regularly
tested and
19
~
/'-...../
DGRLT
/"..~<:General
1.10
Management Procedures
xi.
1.10.1
xii.
xiii.
xiv.
)(V_
xvi.
2
Co-ordination: The Contractor shall co-ordinate the
construction activities to assure efficient and orderly
installation of each part of the Works. The Contractor
shall co-ordinate construction operations included under
differing sections of the Specifications that are
dependent upon each other for proper execution.
i.
ii.
ili.
3
Program: Unless stated In the Special Specification
that the Contractor may submit a program In bar chart
form only, the Contractor shalt provide for the Engineer's
review in accordance with Conditions of Contract, a
computer-based program !n critical path network (CPN)
form, showing at least the following information:
i.
li.
ii~
6
Computer Software: Project management software
shall be of tha professional high.end type (i.e.
"Primavera" project management software latest version
or of similar capabiliti es).
7
Resource Schedules: The computer program used
for preparing the program shall also be used for
preparation of resource schedules to be submitted to the
Engineer with the program. The resource schedules
shall show at least the following information;
i.
ii.
l.
iii,
ii.
iv,
iii.
v.
iv.
v.
vi.
vli,
viii.
ix.
x.
1-10
for
8
Cash Flow Estimate: The computer program used
for preparing the program shall also be used to prepare
t he cash flow estimate to be submitted by the Contractor.
9
Monitoring: The Contractor shaN monitor progress
of the Works and the supply of resources and cash flow
compared with the program. schedules and estimate,
update the program with actual progress data monthly
Sult~:~nato
af Omat
1.10.2
ii.
Humidity
iii.
1.1 0.3
Project Administration
Engineer's
Site
Meetings:
The
Engineer's
Representative will hold site meetings once a month or
more frequently if he deems necessary for the efficient
management of the Works and he will distribute minutes.
The Contractor shall attend all such meetings and secure
the attendance of Subcontractors and others if requested
by the Engineer's Representative.
2 Contractor's Site Meetings: The Contractor shall hold
such meetings as are necessary for co-ordination of
work and Subcontractors and review of progress.
3
Co-ordination of Trades and Subcontractors: The
Contractor shall co-ordinate the work of all trades and
Subcontractors so as to avoid delay and disruption or
abortive work. The Contractor shall provide all drawings.
dimensions and other information required for the
proper execution of subcontract works and of associated
builder's work and accept responsibility for the accuracy
and fitness of subcontract works.
4
Quality Control: The Contractor shall prepare and
submit for approval by the Engineer a proposal for the
quality control management of the project. This proposal
shall incorporate the requirements set out in B.S.5750 or
its equivalent and shall be incorporated into the
Procedures Manual and will form an integral part of the
Contractor's management procedures for the project.
This proposal shall include, but not be restricted to:
i.
ii.
iii.
Provision
of
equipment,
iv.
v.
Maintenance
quality
of
documentation in accordance
various procedures identified
documents.
inspection
and
testing
control
with the
in these
1.10.4
Name of Project
ii.
Name of Employer.
iii.
Name of Engineer.
iv.
Name of Contractor.
v.
vi.
1 11
~~
~~<:General
elevation or
applicable.
area
of
construction,
as
ii.
Concurrent Revlew:
Where concurrent
review of submittals by sub-consultants. the
Employer, or other parties is required, allow a
maximvm of thirty five (351 days for initial
review of each submittal of cross sections or
as-built drawings, end fourteen (141 days for
all other submissions Including shop
drawings or working drawings.
IIi.
lv.
4
Digital Images:
Submit a complete set of
corresponding digital image electronic files with each
submittal of prints. Identify electronic media with date
photographs were taken.
Digital image files shall be for the Engineer's and
Employer s free and unrestricted use.
5
The Contractor shall, if requested by the Engineer.
submit progress videos as required.
1.10.5
3
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block
on each submittal for identification.
i.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared
each submittal on label or title block.
ii.
iii.
a.
Contract name.
b.
c.
Date.
(monthl
d.
ii.
e.
f.
g.
1.1 0.6
1.11
1.11.1
Submittals
General
1-12
h.
i.
j.
k.
I.
of
revision
appropriate
4
Deviations:
Highlight, encircle, or otherwise
indicate and identify on submittals, deviations from the
Contract Documents.
5
Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are
required for final submittal, and unless the Engineer
observes non-compliance with provisions of the Contract
Documents, i nitial submittal may serve as final submittal
i.
6
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually
and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit
each submittal using a tra"smittal form attached to a
cover letter. The Engineer will discard, without review,
s ubmitt11ls received from sources other than the
Contractor.
Sultllnoto gf Oman
I.
Cover Letter:
On attached, numbered,
separate
sheeUsf,
prepared
on
the
Contractor's letterhead, record relevant
information, requests for data, rev1s1ons
other than those requested by the Engineer
on previous submittals, and deviations from
requirements of the Contract Documents,
Including minor variations and limitations.
Include the same label Information as the
related submittal.
a.
ii.
..,.,...........,. .,..
,~.""'~""'
b.
i.
Contract name.
b.
c.
Date.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Remarks.
k.
Signature of transmitter.
I.
Preparation:
Include
information, as applicable:
the
following
a.
b.
c.
Schedules.
d.
e.
f.
iii.
Action Submittals
ii.
7
Use for Construction: Permit only final submrttals
with appropriate approved stamp, or other mark
indicating action taken by the Engineer, to be used in
connection with construction.
1.11.2
General>/".__. ;. .; ;.;
2
Shop and Work Drawings: Produce newly prepared,
contract-specific, information, drawn accurately to scale.
Shop drawings should not be based on reproductions of
the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
a.
Initial Submittal:
Submit one ( 11
correctable, translucent, reproducible
print end one (1) blue- or black-line
print. The Engineer will return the
reproducible print.
b.
3
Subcontract list:
Prepare and submit a list
identifying subcontractor individuals or firms proposed
for principal portions of the Works, including those who
are to fabricate products or equipment to a special
design. Include the following Information in tabular
form:
i.
ii.
113
""'-..J/'.../
~
~<General
Mi.
1.11.3
Informational Submittals
General:
Prepare and submit informational
submittals required by other Specification Sections.
i.
ii.
2
Qualification Data : Prepare written information that
demonstrates capabilities and experience o f firm or
person. Include fists of completed projects with project
names and addresses. names and addresses of
engi neers and employers, and other Information
specified.
3
Materiel Certificates: Prepare written statements
on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material
complies with requirements.
4
Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a
qualified testing agency, on testing egency's standard
form, indicating and interpreting test results of material
for compliance with requirements.
Prepare reports
5
Preconstruction Test Reports:
written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency' s
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests
performed before installation of product, for comprl8nce
with performance requirements.
6
Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written
by a qualified testing agency. on testing agency's
standard form, Indicating and interpreting results of
compatibility tests performed before Installation of
product. Include written recommendations for primers
and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
1.11.4
1.1 1.5
1 1
Engineer's Action
l i.
Final-but-Restricted Release:
Where the
submittal is marked APPROVED AS NOTED",
the work covered by the submittal may
proceed provided it complies with both the
Engineer's notations and corrections on the
submittal and the Conttact Documents. Final
acceptance of the work wiH depend on that
compliance.
Iii.
7
Field Test Reports: Prepare reportS written by a
qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard
form, Indicating and Interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after
product is Installed in its final location, for compliance
with requirements.
8
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports
Indicating current product produced by manufacturer
complies w ith requirements. Base reports on evaluation
of tests performed by manufacturer and w itnessed by a
qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests
performed by a qualified testing agency.
iv.
1.11.6
2
Record Drawings:
drawings as fo~ lows:
ii.
4
Record Specifications: Submit two [2) copies of
record specifications, including addenda and contract
modifications.
5
Miscellaneous Records: Submit two [2) sets of
original miscellaneous records.
1.11.7
i.
[Lump Sum)
1.12
1.12.1
Storage of Materials
i.
1.11.8
1.12.2
Handling Materials
1.12.3
1.12.4
2
The AsBu'lt Drawings shall be measured and paid
as Lump Sum [LS.) in the Bill of Quantities.
l -1ti
~~
DGRLT
~~<General
1.12.5
1.12.6
1.12.7
1.12.7. 1
Sampling
1
Samples of all materials shall be submined to the
Engineer for inspection, testing and acceptance before
incorporati on in the Works. All m aterials being used will
be subject to l nspection, testing, or rejection at any time
prior to such incorporation.
2
Where untested and unaccepted materials have
been used without approval of the Engineer, such use
shall be at the Contractor's risk and the work may be
rej ected by the Engineer.
1.12.7.2
Source Tests
1-115
engaged by the
2
After approval of any source of materials, the
Contractor shall produce from such source only to the
extent that materials produced are of substantially the
same quality as the approved samples.
3
The El'lgineer w ill period'cally oreler retesting of
previously approved sources to verify that they continue
to conform to the Specifications and may order retesting
at the same or at a different laboratory from the one
If
performing the original source approval tests.
retesting Indicates that a previously approved source no
l onger conforms with the Specifications. the Contractor
shall forthwith cease production from such source.
1.12.7.3
1.12.7.4
Control Tests
1.12.7.6
Check Tests
Sultarulto of Omen
B d2aCOI'Olru
General)/~------.
1.12.7.6
1.12.8
Unacceptable Materials
1.12.9
1.13
1.13.1
1.13.2
1.13.3
1.13.4
1.14
1.14.1
Temporary Facilities
1.14.1.1
General
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
mess rooms,
viii.
Smalltools.
ix.
x.
Temporary drainage.
2
Locations: The Engineer's approval shall be
obtained for the intended locations of all spoil heaps,
Temporary Works and services.
1-17
Ret.
Title
~geNo.
2.6.3.5
Drainage Blanket
2.6.3.6
~-14
2.6.3 :7
o~DuneSand
Method of MHSUrement
215
2-15
Bnlt of P-vment
Itema In the Bill of Quantftl
2115
216
2.6.4
2.8.5
2.6.6
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.2.1
2.7.2.2
2.7.2.3
2.7.2.4-
Elccevlltlon
Genetal
2~14
2-15
2-115
2-15
215
2-16
216
2.7.3
2.7.3.1
2.7.3.2
BackfiUlng
Genetal
2-17
2 17
2.7.4
Method of MHSUr.ment
2.7.6
2.7.8
Ba1T1 of Payment
Items in the Bill of Ouantitl
2.8
219
2-19
2-19
2-19
2.8.1
DeiGription
2-19
2.8.2
2!8.2.1
Materials
2.8.3
2.8.3. 1
2.8.3.2
2.8.3.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
2.8.8
eon.trudlon
220
22o
2-20
2-20
Beckfill Material
Excavation for Pipe Trenches
Backfilling
2-21
Restoration of Surfaces
221
ethod of MNSUrernent
Basis of P.-,ment
lterna In tfie Bill of Quantftf
2-~1
2-21
2-22
e. Bold;o Con:tAAtiot
Eanhworks)
2.1
2.1.3
2.1.1
Description
2.1.2
Construction Requirements
Method of Measurement
2
Trees with a trunk diameter 300mm or more when
measured 750mm above existing ground level are
measured by the number removed and delivered to the
Employer or disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
2.1.4
Basis of Payment
2.1.5
i.
ii.
2.2
2.2.1
Description
2.2.2
Construction Requirements
2.2.2.1
General
2-1
~~
~~<::earthworks
1
Bridges. culverts and other drainage structures in
locations traversed by traffic shall not be removed until
arrangements. detours and traff<e management plans have
been made by the Contractor and approved by ROP to
maintain the flow of traffte.
2
Substructures in watercourses shall be removed
down to the level of the nature! stream bed. Those parts
outside the stream shall be removed to 300 mm below
natu ral ground surface. Where such portions of existing
structures lie wholly or in part within the limits for a new
structure, they shall be removed to the extent necessary to
accommodate construction of the proposed structure.
3
Steel bridges and timber bridges, designated to be
salvaged shall be dismantled without causing unnecessary
damage. Steel members shall be match marked, unless
this requirement is w aived by the Engineer. All salvaged
material shall be stored as p reviously specified for reuse
or possession of others.
Blasting or other operations necessary for removal of
4
existing structures or other obstructions, and which may
damage new construction in the vicinity. shall be
completed prior to commencing the new construction.
Explosives shall be used only as permitted by the
appropriate security authorit ies and shall be approved by
the Engineer.
The Contractor shall observe the
requirements of Section 1, Sub-section 1.9, Clause 1.9.2
for all b' asting operations
5
The Contractor sha" carry out a structural survey of
all the existing buildings and structures located within the
blasting influence distance. The survey shall include
detailed photographic records for the adjacent buildings
and structures before and after blasting, in order to avoid
latet claims by public.
2.2.2.3
Removal of Pipes
1
All p ipes unless otherwise directed shall be removed
and precautions taken to avoid breaking or damaging the
pipes. The Contractor shall exercise utmost care during
the remove! of pipes so as to avoid unnecessary damage.
22
2.2.2.4
1
When fences and gates enclosing pasture land or
farm land are to be removed, the Contractor shall notify
the Engineer sufficiently in advance to permit the property
owner reasonable time to construct alternative fencing or
make other suitable arrangements.
2.2.2.6
1
Existing wells and shafts. abandoned or active, which
lie within the limits of the Works, shall be dismantled,
backfilled. end completed. A ll salvaQeable materials shall
be removed and stored It approved locations on S~e . All
sa'vageable material shall become the property of the
Wells shaD be filled to the level of the
Employer.
surrounding ground and, if within the prism ol
construction, shall be compacted after obtaining the
Engineer's permission to the type of compaction within
the range designated.
2.2.2.7
Removal of Utilities
1
The Contractor shall liaise with the Engineer and
shall notify all Utility Authorities and co-operate and
coordinate w ith them in respect of removals and
relocations.
2
Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings,
realignment or relocation of active utilities will be to the
approval of the respective authorities and such work shall
be coordinated by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
perform the necessary coordination with the relevant
utility authorities ahead of time in order to avoid
unnecessary delay to the Works.
3
The removal of all disconnected or abandoned
utilities w ithin the ROW shall be performed by the
Contractor as directed by the Engineer, unless the utility
authorities indicate their intention to carry out such
removal and salvaging of materials, fittings, parts, etc.
4
The Contractor shall liaise with the Engineer and
shall advise each affected utility authority in writing of his
proposed construction schedule and shall arrange for
inspection, disconnection or interruption of services by the
utility authorities as appropriate.
5
The Contractor shall be responsible for supporting
and protecting realigned utilities and existing utilities that
are to remain in place, for the duration of the Contract and
shall provide all necessary Temporary Works in this
respect, all in compliance with Section 1, Sub-section 1.8,
Clause 1.8.3 ... ~and the requirements of the relevant utility
owner. Any damage caused to utilities and attributable to
the Contractor shall be repaired at his expense.
6
All excavation and backfill shall conform to the
requirements of Subsections 2.3 -'Road Excavation'. 2.5'Embankments' and Subsection 2.7 - 'Excavation and
Backfilling for Structures', as appropriate.
2.2.2.8
2.2.4
Basis of Payment
2.2.5
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
lli.
xii.
xiii.
7
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall
ensure that pavement removal operations are completed
without applying extreme vibration and heavy loading that
might damage the existing underground utilities.
xiv.
xv.
2.2.2.9
xvii.
2.2.3
llviii.
Method of Measurement
xvi.
xix.
xx.
xxi.
xxii.
2-3
~~
~~<:earthworks
xxiii.
xxiv.
xxv.
xxvi.
2.3
Roadway Excavation
2.3.1
Description
il.
iii.
4
If the Contractor chooses to excavate suitable
material to waste or put it to other uses, and replace it by
borrow excavation for emblnkment areas, this shall be
undertaken at no extra cost to the Employer.
5
2.3.2
2.3.3
Construction Requirements
2.3.3.1
2...
2.3.3.2
4
Whenever groundwater is encountered which may
adversely affect construction, the Contractor shall advise
the Engineer who will evaluate the situation and order
necessary remedia l measures.
2.3.3.3
Sultanata af Omnn.
Stn~rd Spe<lflcotion
Earthworks)
2.3.3.4
Rock Blasting
2.3.3.5
Rock blasting explosives may comprise a diversity of
systems. including dynamite explosives. watergels. slurry
explosives and slurry blasting agents, pumpable blasting
agents, emulsion explosives and aluminized explosives.
Whenever Instructed by the Engineer, blasting shall be
carried out alter pre-splitting the rock mass by using small
localized charges in pre-drilled holes.
2
When blasting of rock slopes is carried out, a
reasonably uniform face shall be left, regardless of
whether or not the excavation is carried beyond the
specified side slopes as shown on the Drawings. All
breakage and slides shall be removed and disposed of as
directed. A dust control system shall be designated by the
Contractor and shall be implemented during rock blasting
after obtaining the Engineer's approval.
3
All drilling and blasting shall be done in such a
manner as will most nearly complete the excavation to the
required grade lines, and produce the least possible
disturbance of the material to be left in place. Blasting by
means of drill holes. tunnels, or any other methods shall
be entirely at the Contractor's risk. Explosive materials
shall be stored and kept under the constant survei lienee of
the Royal Oman Police.
4
Where necessary or directed, the Contractor shall
provide heavy mesh blasting mats or controlled blasting
for protection of persons, properties, and the Works. If, In
the opinion of the authorities and the Engineer, blasting
would be dangerous to persons or adjacent structures, or
is being carried out in an unsafe or unacceptable manner,
the Engineer may prohibit blasting and order the rock to
be excavated by other means.
5
During explosion works, traffic shall be suspended
from the routes linking to the Site and all diversions and
other arrangements shall be carried out in full
coordination with the Royal Oman Police. The Contractor
sha II secure approval of his schedule for such
interruptions and his proposed methods for safeguardng
the public and property.
6
Excessive blasting will
not
be
permitted.
Overbreakage and the backfi IIi ng thereof shall be at the
Contractor's expense. Any material outside the approved
cross section limits which may be shattered or loosened
because of blasting shall be removed by the Contractor at
his own expense. All rock slopes with loose material shall
be scaled by w orkmen and all loose material removed at
the Contractor's expense.
7
Backfilling of overbreakage shall be carried out as
directed, using approved soil or crushed materials or other
special aggregate or cyclopean concrete, as shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Undrained
pockets shall not be left in the surface of the rock.
8
Followi ng blasting, cleaning and scaling rock slopes,
the face, benches and back of the slope shall be inspected
2.3.3.6
~~
~~<Earthworks
8
In cases where rock or soil excavations reveal that
the adopted cut s!opes are not suitable and If failures
occur during or after comp"etion of the excavation works
and while the Contractor is still on Site, the Engineer may
request the Contractor to re-excavate according to the
newly established cut s'opes, the extra work w ill be
measured and valued as Unclassified Excevatlon at the
same rate given in the Contract. However, in such case,
the Contractor may submit a proposal for any other
alternative solution for the stability of the cut slopes, for
the Engineer's apprafsal and final decision.
2.3.3.7
2.3.3.8
2.3.4
Method of Measurement
2-6 .
2
Unclassified Excavation shall be measured by cu m.
of material excavated, hauled away and either wasted,
stockpiled. or deposited on or in vicinity of roadw ay
embankments and dykes. Measurements sheU be of
volumes computed from the cross sect ions shown on the
Drawings and the original ground elevations taken jointly
by the Engineer and the Contractor after clearing and
grubbing operltions. Rates shall include fur costs of
supponing sides of elCcavatlon where necessary, keeping
elCcavations free from water, proper formation of
embankments, trimming of slopes, preparation and
completion of the roadway, sub.grade, dykes and
shoulders and scarifying for suitable sub-grade material.
3
Excavation of un stable material lfrom areas outside
the ROW) shall be measured by cu.m. of material
excavated, hauled away and disposed of as ditected,
completed and accepted Measurements ShiiU be of
volumes computed from surveyed cross sections of
original and final ground elevations.
When cross
sectioning is impractical in the oplnion of the Engineer,
approval may be given to measure volumes in the
vehicles removing such excavated material.
4
Ditch excavation and excavation of unstable material
are considered pen of the unclassified excavation.
5
Roct blasting, backfilling of overbreakage, trimming
and grading of cut slopes, ditches and of other belowsubgrade surfaces, drainage of excavation areas, obl iteration
of disused roadways, end other ancillary excavation
Works shall not be measured for direct payment, but shall
be considered as subsidiary work the costs of which wiil
be deemed to be Included in the rates for Unclassified
EJ(cavation
6
Excavation under water shaD be measured by cu.m.
of material excavated, hauled away and disposed of as
directed, completed and accepted (including any side
support or other enabling works). Measurements shall be
of volumes computed from surveyed cross sections of
original and final ground elevttions.
When cross
sectioning is impractical in the opinion of the Engi neer,
approval may be given to measure volumes i n the
vehicles removing such excavated material.
7
Hauling of excavated materials shall not be
measured for direct payment, but shall be cons'dered as
subsidiary work the cost of which will be deemed to be
included in the rates for Unclassified Excavation,
regardless of the distance required for hauling the
materials to an approved dumping area.
E;ccavation, Stockpiling and recompaction o f suitable
8
topsoil material shall be measured by cubic meter, laid,
completed and eccepted as directed by t he Engineer.
2.3.5
Basis of Payment
~od
Earthworks)
2.3.6
i.
r.
iii.
lv.
Unclassified Excavation
Excavation of unstable material
outside RightofWay
Unclassified Excavation under water
Excavate and Stockpile Suitable topsoil and
recompact as directed
2.4
Borrow Materials
2.4.1
Description
2.4.2
2.4.3
Borrow Material
2.4.4
Method of Measurement
2.4.6
Basis of Payment
2.4.6
2.5
Embankments
2.5.1
Description
27
~~
OGRLT
~~<Earthworks
2.5.2
Materials
Requl111menb
1
2
3
4
s
6
6
Where embankments are to be constructed using
material classified as A3 {AASHTO M 1451 or other
material subject to side slope erosion or requiring
confinement for stabilization purposes, the embankment
plating or confining layer shall be constructed using
AASHTO M 145 Class A-1-a, A-1-b, or A-2-4 materials or as
otherwise approved.
7
The material used in rockfill embankments shall
consist predominantly of rock fragments of such size that
the material can be placed in layers of the thickness
prescribed conforming to the requirements stated in Table
2.5.2.2. The size distribution of rockfill shall be determined
according to CIRIA Special Publication 83: Manuat on the
use of Rock in Coastal and Shoreline Engineering Appendix 2.
Requl~
'
2
The 200 mm depth of embankment sub-grade layer
immediately below the bottom of sub base shall consist of
selected sub-grade materiel having a 4-day soaked C.B.R.
of at least 25% when tested in accordance with AASHTO
T193 and when compacted at 100% Modified Proctor
Density in accordance with AASHTO T-1800, with a
gradation and P.l. as specified under Sub-section 2.6 'Sub-grade Construction'.
3
The 600 mm depth of embankment immediately
below the sub-grade layer shall consist of suitable
material having a 4-day soaked C.B.R of at least 15% when
compacted to 95% maximum dry density in accordance
with AASHTO T-1800 and tested in accordance with
AASHTO T193 with a P. l. not more than 15%. If rockfill is
used for the bottom 400 mm depth then these
requirements shall apply to the top 200 mm depth below
the sub-grade layer.
particle
loose ll1yer
Maximum
thickneSs
8
Rockfill material shall be obtained from quarries and
shan be sound, dense, hard and durab!e rock capable of
being spread and compacted as specified. lndividuaol
pieces ere to be clean and angular. It shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to excavate material from rock
cuts, whether by blasting or other means, so that aU
excavated materials are of suitable size.
4
Rockfill shall not be used in the top 200 mm of the
embankment below the sub-grade. If found necessary and
if approved by the Engineer, weter may be added es
required to achieve maximum compaction.
2.5.3
Construction Requirements
2.5.3.1
General
2-8
Sultllt>bt" of Omnn. Stond.rd S~llcotiont for Road & Btidi!O CotJMruCiion 2010
Earthworks)
2
Equipment used for foundation preparation and for
placing, spreading and compacting embankment materials
shall be of approved types and furnished in sufficient
numbers for the purposes intended. Provision and use of
such equipment shall conform with Section 19 'Plant and
Equipment'
3
Draglines shall not be used to construct embankment
unless approval Is given and only when special
procedures are adopted to keep the layers uniform and the
embankment properly graded and welldrained at all times.
4
Surfaces of embankment layers shall be kept
properly shaped and drained at all times. The Contractor
shall utilize a sufficient number of motor graders or
tractors to level and maintain the surface of each layer of
embankment during all placing and compacting
operations.
5
Whenever feasible, trucks, scrapers, tractors, loaders
and other heavy hauling equipment shall be routed over
the embankment in such a manner as will contribute
effectively to compaction of the fill material.
6
Where an embankment is to be constructed over an
area previously occupied by a building basement, cellar,
irrigation canal, well, any previous excavation, or adjacent
to structures, and where the proper use of normal
is
not
practicable,
the
compaction
equipment
embankment shall be constructed and compacted in
accordance with the backfilling requirements of Sub
section 2.7 - 'Excavation and Backfilling for Structures'
until the use of normal compaction equipment is
practicable. Layers shall not exceed 200 mm thickness
(before compaction) and shall be compacted to the degree
of compaction specified for the embankment. The
embankment construction under this item shall be
measured and paid under the requirements of Clause
2. 7 .4.8:' Unclassified Structural Excavation'
7
Each embankment layer shall be tested and approved
prior to placing the following layer in accordance with
Clause 2.5.4 'Testing'.
8
The Engineer may at any time order suspension of
delivery of materials to the embankment sites until
previously delivered materials have been properly placed
and preceding layers are leveled and uniformly compacted
to the specified density.
9
Unacceptable material placed in any embankment
shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor at his
own expense, immediately after receiving the Engineer's
instructions in this regard. Any expected delay with the
removal of such material shall be coordinated and agreed
with the Engineer.
10 The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability
of all embankments and shall replace all embankment
sections which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have been
damaged or displaced due to carelessness or neglect on
the part of the Contractor, or due to normally occurring
natural causes, such as storms, and not attributable to the
unavoidable movement of the natural ground upon which
the embankment is constructed.
14
~~
OGRI..T
_/'"'....~<:Earthworks
Maximum
of
bver
Minimum~ Mea*
n.- Thlclcneul
IIC;hn Wldthl
~mm
2300-2900
500mm
2900-3600
600mm
700mm
800mm
3600 - 4300
4300-5000
,. 6000
I
I
Foundation Preparation
210
6
Rockfill shall not be placed on any slopes steeper
than 1:1. All slopes steeper than 1:1 shall therefore be re
graded to a slope of 1:1 or milder and all vertical faces end
overhangs removed.
2.5.3.4
Embankment Construction
1
Roadway embankment consisting of soil or granular
materiel shell be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding
200 mm compacted thickness, compacted as specified and
approved prior to placing the next layer. The thickness of
the first laver over areas of Class A3 dune sand may
exceed 250 mm in order to bridge these areas.
Approximately uniform thickness of each layer shall be
achieved prior to compaction. As the compaction of each
layer progresses, continuous leveling and working of the
material shall be carried out to ensure uniform density.
The correct moisture content shall be maintained at all
t imes.
2
Where embankments are to be constructed to a
height in excess of 1.5 m above top of original ground
level, the Engineer may approve layers up to 250 mm
compacted thickness if these layers are located at depths
greater than 1.5m from the final elevation of embankment
and if the Contractor's equipment and the nature of the
material result in the required density throughout the layer
thickness.
3
When the moisture content of the embankment
material does not fall w ithin the required moisture range,
(optimum moisture :1: 2%1 water shall be added and
thoroughly mixed into the soil by approved methods or
the material shall be aerated, whichever is necessary to
adjust the material to the required moisture content.
4
When water is added to embankment material, the
amount added shall be suffteient to provide a moisture
content within the required range plus a reasonable
additional amount to compensate for evaporation and
other unavoidable losses. Water added in excess of th is
amount shall be removed by aeration or other approved
means at the Contractor's expense. Satisfactory methods
and suffiCient equipment shall be used for the furnishing
end hand ing of the water in a manner that w iN minimize
loss due to evaporation or waste.
5
Embankments that consist of rock-soil materiel w ith
sufficient soil to make rolling feasi ble shall be placed and
compacted in an approved manner end to the required
degree of compaction. Water shall be added as end when
dltected to assist in the compaction of such materials.
6
In the case of embankments which are to be formed
of approved rocksoil material containing an appreciable
quantity of rock fragments (normally not exceeding 30%
greater than 80mm) and which cannot be placed in layers
of the thickness prescribed without crushing, pulverizing,
or otherwise breaking down the fragments, the
embankment may be constructed in layers not exceeding
in thickness twice the average size of the largest rock
fregments and in any case not exceeding 600 mm lbefore
compaction).
Sultanbto of Orr>rtn, Stn~>rd Spedfi~Uonf for A~d & Brkl~ Con;~ ruction 2il D
Earthworks)
7
Rockfill materials shall be placed in such a manner
that the larger rocks are well distributed and the voids are
filled to the maximum practical extent by smaller particles
of rocks, gravel or approved granular materials. Each I ayer
shall be bladed into a neat and homogeneous mass pr' or
to compaction. Any rocks found protruding from the
leveled surface shall be removed end replaced by smaller
particles.
Initial breakdown compaction shall be
performed with heavy bulldozers. The top level of each
layer must be surveyed before and after compaction and
approved by the Engineer before the nelCI layer is placed.
Oversize rock pieces {i e. exceeding the maximum particle
size defined in Table 2.5.2.2 by not more than 10%) may
be used in high rockfill embankments to a level 3 meters
below sub.grade.
2.5.4
Testing
2.5.4.1
General
2.5.4.2
2
Soil type materials shall be compacted to at least
90% modified maximum density for the full depth of
embankment; except for the 600 mm of embankment
material immediately below the subgrade layer that shall
be compacted to at least 95% modified maximum density.
Moisture content shall be within plus or minus 2% of
optimum at the time of compaction.
3
Cohesionless, free draining granular materials (of 75
mm maxi mum size, with not more than 15% passing 0.075
mm (No. 200) sieve and a plasticity index (PI) not
exceeding 20%1 shall be compacted to at least 70% of
relative density for the full depth of embankment. The 600
mm depth of such material immediately below the sub
grade layer shall be compacted to at least 75% of relative
density.
4
Minimum soil tests required during the construction
of sub-grade andfor embankment ere:
One sample for CBR, classification (AASHTO
M145), and laboratory (Moisture density) or
relative density compaction from each source
prior t o use. Each sample shall represent not
more than 5,000 cubic meters.
One sample for classification representing not
more than 3,000 cubic meters of the material in
use.
For every completed layer, one fie' d density
shall be determined for each 1500 square
meters or 100 linear meters, whichever is less
Testing shall be in accordance with ASTM D
1556 or ASTM 0 2167 orBS 1377 Part 9.
2.5.4.3
To
ensure
proper compaction
of rockfill
embankments, the Contractor shall conduct compaction
tests such as the plate load bearing test or other approved
equivalent tests using equipment and materials available
in order to determine the best compact' on control criteria.
2
A rockfill test section shall be placed on a firm
surface approved by the Engineer, end the material and
1ayer thickness shall conform to the requirements of these
specifications.
3
The test section shall be of sufficient dimensions to
permit the establishment of at least twenty leveling points
on a 5 meter {5m) square grid, and no fewer than 3 points
on any one line and no point less than three meters from
the edge of the layer. The arrangement of the leveling
points shall be approved by the Engineer.
2 11
"V~
_./"'-..~<:earthworks
4
Compaction shall then commence with a m inimum
of three passes of a v ibratory roller, as shown In Table
2.5.3.1. Leveling points shall then established, short
lengths of pa'nted steel bars hammered flush with the
surface of the rockfill are suitable for this purpose. A level
reading shall be taken at each leveling point on top of a
moveable 300 mm square flat steel plate with a hole
drilled in the center of the plata to enable a visual check to
be made that the plate is located centrally over the bar.
5
Further readings shall be taken at the leveling points
after two additional passes with the roller. If the average
settlement is less than half of one per cent (0.5%) of the
average compacted layer thickness, or as determined by
t he Engineer, the rockfill compaction test is deemed
comp'lete.
6
If the average settlement is more than half of one
percent (0.5%). two additional passes of the roller are
required and the leveling procedure shall be repeated. If
the average settlement is then less than half of one
percent (0.5%1. of the average compacted layer thickness
the test is deemed complete. If not, this step shall be
repeated.
7
The total number of passes of the rolling equipment
necessary to obtain the required result will establish the
minimum number of passes to be used on the rock
embankments. However, in no case shall the number of
passes be less than five (5).
This verification Pf'Ocedure shaDI be conducted for
8
each change of material and at least once each week
during the initial stages of construction until a reliable
rolling pattern is established. The frequency vermcation
procedure can than be reduced as approved by the
Engineer.
9
Documentation of the rockfill compaction tests shall
be maintained by the Contractor in the project records and
shall be copied to the Engineer.
2.5.4.4
Method of Measurement
212
3
Surplus materials utilized at the Contractor's option
within the ROW but, beyond the cross sections shown on
the Drewings. are not measured as part of the
embenkment.
4
Benching described under Item 4 of Paragraph 2.5.3.3
is meesured as Unclassified Excavetion, under Clause
2.3.4.
5
No adjustments or allowances are made in respect of
expansion or shrinkage of earthwork volumes which may
occur during excavation and compaction.
6
Embankment foundation treatment such as stripping,
scarifying and re-compaction of topsoil containing
unsuitable organic material, as detailed in Item 3 of
Paragraph 2.5.3 3 is not measured but shall be considered
as subsidiary work the costs of which are deemed to be
included in the rates for excavation and borrow elC cavation
in Sub-sections 2.3 and 2.4
7
Scarifying old pavement beds. construction of the
trial embankment section if it is outside the pavement,
foundation, preparation. testing, including furnishing and
using an approved type electronic compaction meter and
grid pattern consolidation surveys, 1nd all other ancillery
embankment work are not measured, but shall be
considered as subsidiary work the costs of which are
deemed t o be included in the rates for excavation and
borrow excavetion in Sub-sections 2.3 and 2.4
2.5.6
Basis of Payment
2.5.5
2
The volume of embankment displaced by pipe
culverts, box culverts and associated end walls shell be
deducted from the measured volume of embankment. No
deduction shall be made for pipes less than 500 mm in
diameter and associated end walls.
2.5.7
2.6
Sub-grade Construction
2.6.1
Description
Earthworks)
2.6.2
i.
Materials
Range
300. 1500
0.25
Min. 75%
>3.5
<40
>30%
ParoentPa~
(mm)
I"'
100
70-100
55-100
. 40-BO
- - 4175 (No._4)
5
The layer directly underneath the drainage blanket
and the one directly above it shall satisfy the following
filter criteria:
30-65
10-50
2.4(No. 81
0-25
0-5
ii.
iii.
iv.
2.6.3
Construction Requirements
2.6.3.1
Sub-grade in Cut
2-13
~~
/"'--..~<:Earthworks
4
The underlying natural material shall be scarified,
leveled and rolled. The surface of the natural soil shall be
a pproved by the Engineer before placement of suitable
material.
ii.
2.6.3.6
2.6.3.2
Sub-grade in Embankment
Surface Tolerances
Tolerances
+10 or-30 mm
+50 or -50 mm
To p of Embankment or Sub
excavated Surf!!~ _oil_ __
+10 or-30mm
Drainage Blanket
214
US at.nd..-cl
Sieve Size
2.6.3.3
:
[
-'-
&Inch
5inch
4inch
21nch
11/Zlnch
314 inch
112 inch
318 inch
No.4
No,S
No. 16
No. 200
_]p1
100
85 100
75 - 90
45 - 65
35 - 55
20 35
10 2i
5 - 20
JYp,_2
100
95 100
70 100
0. 55
0 10
.
.
-
.
.
.
.
0 3
Table 2.6.3.2: Definition ofType 1 and Type 2 Rockfill
Materials for Sabkha Treatment
Cot\$lJUCioat
Earthworks)
6
A layer of 200mm thick capillary break rock fi II type 1
shall be laid over type 2 pervious backfill to receive the
required road layers after the above operation.
2.6.3.7
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.6.6
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
2.7
2.7.1
Description
Method of Measurement
Basis of Payment
3
The Contractor will be deemed to have satisfied
himself, at the time of tendering, as to the type and nature
of soils and rock that will be encountered in structural
excavations.
2.7.2
Excavation
2.7.2.1
General
21!5
~~
DGRLT
~~<::Earthworks
2
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of
all foundation and trench excavations whether supported
or not. Approval of the Contractor's support system or
omission of a support system for any excavations will not
absolve the Contractor from his sole responsibility in this
regard.
3
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions,
including shoring or other means, to protect employees
and others in the excavation and on the ground above.
4
The sjdes of all foundation pits and trenches
shallower than 1.5m shall be vertical and adequately
supported unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Sides
more than 1.5 m in depth shall be sloped at a stable slope
or supported in an approved manner unless the material
through which the p"t or trench is cut is deemed to be
sufficiently self-supporting and not requlrlng support.
5
Pits and trenches shall be kept free from water until
footing concrete has been placed or pipes have been
The Contractor shall minimize, as far as
installed.
practicable, the length of t ime excavated areas are open.
The Contractor shall be responsible for repair of damage
due to weather, equipment, and other causes during
periods when the excavations are left open.
6
The Contractor shall plan the Works so that no
excavation is left in an exposed condition for a period
greater than 30 days unless otherwise approved.
7
Where excavation is adjacent to public highways and
walkways, warning lights, barriers and barricades shall be
provided to t he Engineer's satisfaction. No excavation
shall be left in an exposed condition for more than 7 days
unless otherwise approvecl
8
For excavation in material sensitive to moisture {stiff
clays, marls, etc.) the excavation shall be cleaned end a
concrete blinding layer cast immediatelY on completion of
the excavation.
9
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any sign
of failure or cracks within or around the excavation
i mmediately when such signs are noticed.
2.7.2.2
216
2.7.2.3
Earthworks)
2.7.3
Backfilling
2.7.3.1
General
1
The Contractor sha II obtain approve I for his proposed
meth ad and rate of pi acing of backfill before work
commences.
2
Backfill materials shall be uniformly graded granular
material, capable of being compacted to required
compaction, and having adequate permeability to permit
free drainage through it. Backfill material shall also
conform to the requirements listed in Table 2.7.3.1 below:
SurfKe
R.qu_lrement.
--
1 mm
10 pt~r cent
as
~~
../"'--.~<:Earthworks
ASTMSJeve
..
318"
No.4.
No. 30
No. 200
.,
-
.
100
---
<85
<45
<5
2.7.3.2
5
Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, when
special permeable backfill (sheathing) is to be placed
against the back faces of retaining walls or wing walls, it
shall consist of a continuous covering of approved type
proprietary filter cloth protected by a continuous wall of
200mm minimum thickness precast, porous (no-fines)
concrete blocks laid with dry joints. Prior to construction
of the block wan, ensure that aUunderdrains or perforated
pipes are laid along the base of the wall under the
sheathing, as shown on the Drawings.
Backfill material for culverts, pipe culverts and
6
miscellaneous structures within 300 mm of any part of the
structure shall be Class A-1-a. A-1-b or A-2-4, The 200 mm
mlnlmum thickness of sub-grade layer shall consist of
approved sub-grade material placed and compacted to
100% maximum density as specified under Sub-section
2.6 - 'Sub-grade Construction'. The backfill shall be
completed to the level of the original ground or to the top
elevation of any adjacent embankment.
7
Backf~ling around and over pipe culverts shall not
commence until headwalls and wingwalls have been
constructed and attained the specified 28-day strength.
B
Water used for compaction of backfill around metal
pipes and rei nforced concrete structures shall be from an
approved source and shall not contain more than 0.5%
combined chlorides and sulphates nor contai n other
potentially harmful mi nerals.
9
When pipes or other structut es temporari'ly extend
above the grade of the part ia~ ly constructed embankment,
the Contractor sha ll construct the fill over the structure of
sufficient depth to protect the structure from any damage
resulting from construction or other traffic.
10 The Contractor shall complete the backfill around box
cu'verts t o the level of the original ground line and to the
full width of excavation area. If the top of culvert extends
11bove the orignal ground line the Contractor shall
continue the backfill to the top of culvert and for a w idth of
3 m on each side of the culvert f or the full width of
roadway embankment. If the embankment is in place at
the time of backfilling, the Contractor shall backfill atound
the culvert to the top of embankment
3
An backfill intended to support false work loads,
I ncluding temporary fills shall be selected to support the
required load. As a minimum, such material shall be
AASHTO M 145, Class A-1-a, A-1-b or A-2-4, compacted to
90% of the maximum density as determined by AASHTO T
180 (Method 0).
4
Backfill around bridge and building foundations,
abutment walls and retai ning walls shall be completed to
the level of the original ground Iine and to such heights
above original ground line or to the levels as shown on
the Drawings. Care shall be exercised to prevent forward
movement of the wall.
218
Earthworks)
relevant requirements
specification.
Sections
and
of
this
2.7.4
Method of Measurement
7
Unless spec'fied
otherwise in
the special
specifications, temporary cofferdams, tern po ra ry support
system, bailing, dra' nage, dewatering, pumping, sheeting,
concrete blind'ng layers and all other Temporary Works
shall not be measured for direct payment, but shall be
considered as subs' diary work the costs of which will be
deemed to be included in the rates tor structural
excavation.
8
Backfilling to structural excavation shall not be
measured separately but is considered as subsidiary work
the cost of which are deemed to be included in the rates
for structural excavation
9
Any blinding concrete used at the bottom of
excavations, as shown on the Drawings or as instructed by
the Engineer shall be measured and paid for in accordance
with the relevant method of measurement under Clause
5. 1.5 of Section 5 'Concrete and Concrete Structures'.
2.7.5
Basis of Payment
2.7.6
l
lcu.m.l
(cu.m.)
(cu.m.J
(cum.)
2.8
2.8.1
Description
2-19 '
~
~
/"-.~<:earthworks
2.8.2
Materials
2.8.2.1
Backfill Material
C:ommun~cnUon&
OGRLT
I.
Standln:l
19
Percent by Weight
P-.fng for Plpee
other th.n uJ"IC
'
100
4.76
25- 100
100
1.19
10 - 75
25- 75
0.354
5 - 30
10- 30
0.177
3-10
3 - 10
0.074
0-5
0 -5
Sieve Size
_jmml
Pen:.nt lr(
foruPVCP,J~
3
The remainder of the trench shal l be backfilled with
suitable material either from material removed in the
course of excavating the trench, or impor1ed from
approved borrow pit. In either case the backfill materiel
shall be nonplastic. The percentage by weight passing a
No. 200 (0.075 mml sieve shell not exceed 15%. The
percentage passing a 63 mm sieve shall be 100.
2.8.3
Construction
2.8.3.1
220
9
When the pipes are to be laid in embankments or
other fill areas, the embankment or fill area shall first bo
fllled and compacted as specified to the proposed finished
grade or to a height of at least 300 mm above the top of
pipe whichever is lower. The trench shall then bo
excavated as in undisturbed material.
10 When pipes are to be laid under existing pavements.
trenches shall be excavated carefully and to m inimum
widths. Methods that w WI give straight and ver1ical face
shall be used. The pavement sha:l be kept at its origina l
level and cond;Uon.
1l In combined trenches where one pipe is at a lower
level than an adjacent pipe the following shall be applied:
I.
The whole trench shall have a depth related to
the lower pipe and the thickness ofthe bedding
shall be increased to the upper pipe as
necessary.
li.
The lower pipe shall be backfilled with
thoroughly compacted granular material up to
a level of 0.30 meters above the higher pipe.
12 Final excavation to the correct grade level for trench
beds shall be carried out immediately before laying beds
or pipes. Unstable material, rock projections, boulders and
hard spots shall be removed and replaced with approved
f~ ling material, that will be compacted as instructed. Local
soft spots shall be compacted by tamping In bedding
material.
13 The bonoms of trenches shall be accurately graded
to provide uniform bearing and support for the bottom
qua~ant of each section ol the pipe. BeU holes shall be
excavated to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to
eliminate point bearing. Any material that may cause point
bearing shall be removed.
14 The Contractor shall report to the Engineer any
unsuitable or weak ground material that may be found
below the indicated excavation levels before executing
any trimming of the excavation, pipe laying. concreting, or
other work. Where, in the judgment of the Engineer the
bottom of the trench is unsuitable. such material shall be
removed to the width and depth ordered by the Engineer.
The trench shall then be made up by backfilling with
approved material.
t 5 Where rock is encountet ed, the t rench shall be
elCcavated to 150 mm be!ow bed level and replaced with
granular materill, concrete, or blinding grade as directed.
x=
Earthworks)
2.8.3.2
Backfilling
2.8.3.3
Restoration of Surfaces
2.8.4
Method of Measurement
2.8.5
Basis of Payment
221
~~
OG~LT
~~<:Earthworks
2.8.6
i.
1i
~~
lv
2-2.2
backfilling (Depth up to 2m I
backfilling (Depth> 2m< 3m)
backfilling (Depth >3m < 4ml
backfilling (Depth> 4m)
Ref.
11tle
3.1
Page No.
3.3.3.8
3-1
3.1 .1
Description
3-1
3.1.2
Mattrillls
3.1.3
3.13.1
Genen~l
3-1
3-1
31.3.2
3.1.3.3
3.2
3.2.1
Description
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.3.1
Materials
CoMtNc:tlon Requlrementa
Subgrade Surface Preperetion
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
3.2.3.2
Equipment
3-2
3-2
3-3
3.2.3.3
3.2.3.4
3.2.3.5
3-3
3-3
3.2.3.6
Compaction
3.2.3.7
3.2.3.8
Tolerances
Maintenance of Completed Sub-base
Testing
3.2.3.9
32.4
Method of Measurement
3"3
3-3
3-4
3-4
S-4
3.2.5
3.2.6
Bal1 of Payment
3-4
3--4
3-4
3.3
3-5
3.3.1
o..cripllon
3-6
3.3.2
3.3.21
Meterillb
3.3.3
Conmuc:tion Requirementa
3-6
3-5
H
3.3.3.1
Suriece Preparation
3-6
3.3.3.2
3.3.3.3
Equipment
Construction of Trial Sections
3-6
3-6
Jl.6
3.3.3.4
3.3.3.5
3.3.3.6
3.3.3.7
Tolerances
Ref.
3-8
3-8
3-7
3.3.3.9
3.3.4
Toitle
Page No.
3i7
3-7
Method of Menurement
Balls of Payment
3-8
3-8
318
3.4
3-8
3.4.1
Description
3.4.2
3.4.21
Material
Soli for Cement Stabilisation
3-8
3-8
3.4.2.2
3.4.2.3
3.4.2.4
3.4.2.5
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.4.2.6
3.A.3
3 4 3.1
3.4.3.2
Mix Design
Conatruellon Requlrementa
Surfaee Preparation
Construction of Trial Seetlon
3l8
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-9
3"9
3-t
3-9
3-9
3.4.3.3
3.4.3.4
Plant Mixing
Cement Stabi isetion Procedures
Batch MiiCing
3-10
3.4.3.5
3-10
3.4.3.6
3-10
3i11
3.4.3.7
3-10
34 3.8
3.4.3.9
3.4 3.10
3.4.3.11
3-12
3.4.3.12
:J.12
3-12
3.4.3.13
3-11
3-12
Ref.
3.4.3.14
3.4.3.15
3.4.3,16
3.4.3,17
3.4.3.18
3.4.3.19
3.4.3.20
3.4.3.21
3.4.3.22
3.4.3.23
3.4.3.24
3.4.3.25
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
Title,
Page No.
3-12
3-12
3-12
3-13
Sultanate or Omn. St1'1d1rd Specific~!ont for F!Md I< Brldg. Co11<u uc:tion 2fl10
Gr anular Sub-Base. Aggregate Base Course and Stabi lized Base Courses
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
Materials
3.1.3
3.1.3.1
3.1.3.2
Stockpiling
3.1.3.3
3-1
~~
3.2
3.2.1
Description
6
The granular material shall have a 4-day soaked CBR
of not less than 60% when compacted at 100% of modified
proctor AASHTO IT 180-DI and tested In accordance with
AASHTO T 193.
3.2.2
Materials
Sleve ~n
(aquare opening~)
50mm
90- 100
37.:5mm
25'm m
19mm
~-
4>
9.5mm
I~
4.76mm
2.00 mm
0.425mm
o.o75mm
~ -
55
- 85
...__..._
~-~~
- ~1
,___
50.85
- - . 40 - 70
-35-70
35-65
30 60
1 -
20 - 50
25-50
L__:_
10 - 30
15-30
5 15
5-15
r- -
100
__..
0-10
3-2 .
t
r.L
_..._ ,
;---
100
o... c
63mm
9
If additional fine material Is required to correct the
gradation of the granular material, or for adjusting the LL
or P.l. of the fraction passing 0.425 mm (No 401 sieve. It
shall be uniformly blended and mixed with the granular
material. Additional fine material for these purposes shall
be obtained from the crushing of stone, gravel. or slag.
ClaB
8
The portion of granular material, including any
blended material, passing the 0.425 mm (No. 401 mesh
sieve shall have a liquid limit ILL.) of not more than 25
and a plasticity Index (P.I.) not greater than 6 when tested
iruccordance with AASHTO T 89 and T 90.
CI... A
3.2.3
Construction Requirements
3.2.3.1
Sultanate ol Oman, St<oodrd Speofications far R4od & Bndge Ccnttr~on 21)1 0
Granular
Sub~Base.
3.2.3.2
Equipment
1
Equipment used to handle. place, spread, water,
compact and finish sub-base shall conform with the
requirements of Section 19 of these Specifications and
with the Contractor's approved equipment list.
3.2.3.3
1
If directed by the Engineer, before commencement of
subbase construction, the Contractor shall lay and
compact trial sections of varying thickness of sub-base.
Each trial section shall be 2 lanes wide by 50 m long, at
approved locations on or close to the Site. Each trial
section shall be laid using the same materials. mix
proportions,
m1x1ng, spreading
and
compaction
equipment, and construction procedures. proposed for
use in the work.
2
The objectives of these trials shall be to determine
the adequacy of the Contractor's equipment and the loose
depth measurements that witt result in the specified
compacted layer depths, to verify the field moisture
content, end to identify the relationship between the
number of compaction passes and the resulting density of
the su b-bese material.
3.2.3.4
conform
to
the
2
Methods used for stockpiling granular material and
removing it from stockpiles shall not result in significant
degradation or segregation or the introduction of
sig nificent amounts of foreign materials or extraneous
maner.
3
Granular material adversely effected, in the opinion
of the Engineer, by stockpiling or handling procedures,
shall not be incorporated in the work regardless of
previous approval of such material, until the deficiencies
have been rectified in an acceptable manner.
3.2.3.5
3.2.3.6
Compaction
3-3
~
~
OGRLT
../"".
~<:Granular and Stabilised Subbase. Basecourse and Stabilised Subgrade
3.2.3.7
Tolerances
3-4
3.2.3.8
Following completion and acceptance of tne subbase course, it snail be maintained in good condition prior
to laying the base course .. The subbase shall be bladed.
broomed end otherwise maintained, keeping it free from
raveling and other defects until such time as the base
course is placed. Water shall be app!ied at sucn times and
in such quantities as directed by the Engineer.
3.2.3.9
Testing
3.2.4
Method of Measurement
3.2.5
Basis of Payment
3.2.6
i.
cu.m
ii.
cu.m
iii.
cu.m
3.3
3.3.1
Description
3.3.2
Materials
3.3.2.1
9
The crushed aggregate base course material shall
have a 4-day soaked CBR of not less than 80% when
compacted at 100% of modified proctor AASHTO (T180 Dl
and tested in accordance with AASHTO T 193.
Per cent bv -loht paulng
Sieve Duignlltlon t-(.qure openfnga)
Class A
ClnsB
ClassC
.
-
63mm
100
50mm
90-100
37.5mm
60-90
100
2Smm
42-77
60-100
100
19mm
35-70
55-85
B0-100
12.5 mm
25-60
4.75mm
15-40
2.00mm
10-25
0.425mm
5-15
o.o75mm
2-9
--
- - 20-45
25 50
15 30
35-60
30-60
8 15
3-10
315
~~
DGRLT
3.3.3
Construction Requirements
3.3.3.1
Surface Preparation
3.3.3.2
Equipment
3.3.3.3
3.3.3.4
J.6
3.3.3.5
3.3.3.6
Compaction
6
Prior to placing a following layer, the surface shall be
made sufficiently moist as directed, to ensure proper bond
between t he lavers.
8
Material which has dried out prior to final
compaction, or which has dried and de-compacted
subsequent to final compaction, shall be watered and recompacted using approved equipment and procedures. If
the Contractor is unable to return the material to its
original or specified condition with respect to compaction,
thickness and surface tolerances, for the final layer only
the Contractor shall scarify the material and reconstruct
the base course on a re-approved sub-base surface or to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.3.3.7
Tolerances
5
The tolerances on layer thickness, after being
compacted and finished, shall not exceed +10mm and
5mm.
6
The thickness of the finished base course shall be
checked at 20m intervals along the road by taking levels
on the centerline and both shoulders.
7
All areas which exceed the specified tolerances shall
be corrected by removing the defective sections of base
course and reconstructing them or if approved, by
scarifying and adding new material, or removing extra
material, and re~ompacting and finishing to the specified
standard.
3.3.3.8
Testing
Source of M.t.-fe..
Re!*ldon
Required
Required
RequJr.cl
T..te
foreH
T..teln
1'nta
IAI
2
The elevations of the finished base course shall be
checked by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer
at intervals of 20m on straight lines and of 10 m on curves,
and at intermediate points as directed.
3
The tolerances (for final layer only) on elevations of
finished surface shall not exceed +5mm or -10mm.
4
When the finished surface is tested with a 4 m long
straightedge, placed parallel to, or at right angles to the
centerline, the maKimum deviation of the surface from the
testing edge between any 2 contact points shall not
eKceed tOmm.
~n
Required for
eJITest.ln
IBI
IBI
IAI
1.Gradation
of Materials
AASHTO
T27
2.Piasticity
Index
AASHTO
The fully compacted and completed base course
shall conform to the lines, grades and cross sections as
shown on the Drawings.
Minimum
one test
for each
source
1. Proctor
AASHTO
T1SO.D
T89&T90
3.Abrasion
AASHTO
T96
Mliiimum
one test for
every1000
cu.m. of
every layer,
or
whenever
Materials
changed,
whichever is
less
2.
Gredatlon
of Materials
AASHTO
T27
4. C.B.R.
AASHTO
T193
3. Plasticity
Index
AASHTO
5.Sand
equivalent
ASTM
T89&T90
II
3-7
~
_/'.,../
Mlolalry of
Tronapo~ &
Cornmunlc,tlon OGRLT
Source of Materl1lt
RepMJclon
Required
T..U
(A)
Requll'ld
for IN
Required
Tutl
T..Uin
(B)
Repedtfon
R.qulntd for
Ill Tall In
CB)
IAI
0 2419
4. C.B.R.
AASHTO
T193
6.Percent1g
e of
fractured
Grain
5. Abr8110n
AASHTO
T96
'
7.Thin and
elongated
pieces
ASTM
04791
'
;
i'
)
7. Ciay
lumps&
friable
particles
ASTMC235
andC123
8. Field
Density
cu.m
ii.
cu.m
iii.
cu.m
3.4
3.4.1
Description
3.4.2
Materials
3.4.2.1
Soil for
AASHTO Sieve
to
the
3.3.4
Method of Measurement
3-8
"'~llinG ~ m...l
50 mm
100
4.75 mm
50 100
1.80mm
37 - 80
..
15.- 50
4251Jm
75 11m
020
0-3
211m
Table 3.4.2.1; Soil for Stabilization
Stab~ization
I.
9.
Thickness
Basis of Payment
3.3.6
6. Sand
equivalent
ASTM
D2419
3.3.5
2
The mlxinplace method of construction shall be
used only on sites with naturally occurrlog sand and
gravel mixture. For the central plant method of
construction, the materials shall be selected by t he
Contractor from other sources complying with the
requirements of this Clause and shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
3.4.2.2
2
At least two silos shall be used for cement storage.
Before recharging a silo it shall be emptied completely
and cleaned out. Duri ng the time of charging a sil o shall
not be used for batching.
3
The stored cement shall be free-flowing and free of
lumps. Cement shall not be stored for longer than 4
months. Cement that has remained in store for a period
greater than 4 months, or of which there is doubt as to
quality shall be re-tested by standard mortar tests to
determine whether it still meets the requirements of the
standards.
ii.
4
Curing seal shall consist of approved proprietary
curing compound, or MC-70 cutback bitumen to prime
coat standard as specified in Section 4.
3.4.2.3
iii.
iv.
2
The selection of suitable bitumen will depend on the
properties of the material to be stabilized and shall be
subject to laboratory and field trials by the Contractor,
under the supervision of the Engineer.
3
When the material moisture content is high, the
material must be dried before the use of penetration grade
bitumen or viscous cutback bitumen and plant mixing of
materials as appropriate.
4
When the natural moisture content of the material is
low, use cutback bitumens or emulsified bitumens as
appropriate.
3.4.2.4
3.4.2.5
Water
3.4.2.6
3.4.3
Construction Requirements
3.4.3.1
Surface Preparation
3.4.3.2
~~
3.4.3.3
automati~ally
3
The feeder for the granular material shall be
mechanically or eleetrlcal1y driven. Mechanically driven
feeders shall be direetly connected with the drive on the
cement feeder. The drive shaft on the feeder shall be
equipped with a revolution counter reading to 0.1 of a
revolution. Electrically driven feeders shall be actuated
from the same circuit that services the motor driving the
cement feeder.
4
The cement feeder and the granular material feeders
shall be equipped with devices by which the rate of feed
can be determined while the plant Is In full operation.
3.4.3.6
3.4.3.4
2
The mixer platform shall be of ample size to provide
safe and convenient access to the mixer and other
equipment.
3
The mixer shall be equipped with a timing device
which will indicate by a definite audible or visual signal
the expiration of the mixing period. The device shall be
accurate to within 2 seconds.
2
Plant and equipment for pulverizing (if required) and
for mixing all materials will be approved on the basis of
preliminary trials to establish that such plant and
equipment are capable of producing the spe~ified degree
of mixing and uniformity of stabilized material for the full
thickness of each layer.
Single pass or multi-pass
equipment may be used.
4
The time of mixing a batch shall begin after all
ingredients are in the mixer and shall end when the mixer
is half emptied.
Mixing shall continue until a
homogeneous mixture of uniformly distributed and
properly coated materials of uniform appearance is
produced. The time of mixing shall not be less than 30
seeonds. When blending of different sizes is required, the
materials shall be blended as they enter the mixer.
3
The mixing equipment shall be equipped with a
device for controlling the depth of processing and the
mixing blades shall be maintained or reset periodically so
that the correct depth of mixing is obtained at all times.
Cement shall be spread ahead of the mixer by means of a
cement spreader, fitted with a device to ensure a uniform
and controllable rate ofspread of cement transversely and
longitudinally.
5
Cement for each batch shall be weighed on scales
separate from the aggregate belching scales.
Each
cement scale graduation shall be approximately 0.001
times the total capacity of the scales. The total capacity
shall not be greater than twice the amount of cement
required when the plant is operated at full capacity. No
scale shall be used with a capacity less than 500 kg.
4
If multi-pass equipment Is utilized, the fine cohesive
fraction (if any) of the material shall first be pulverized to
the required depth with successive passes and the
moisture content adjusted if it is more than 3% below the
value required for compaction. Cement shall then be
spread and mixing continued with successive passes unti l
the required depth and uniformity have been achieved.
3.4.3.5
1
Continuous mixing plants shall be designed such that
granular materia:ls are drawn from the storage facility by
3-10 .
5
If it is necessary to adjust the moisture content of the
material to the optimum for completion, water shall be
added during the m ixing operation using a water sprayer
of such design that the water Is added in a uniform and
controllable manner both transversely and longitudinally.
6
Te mrxmg equipment shall be set so that it cuts
slightly into the edge of any adjoining completed lane so
as to ensure that ail material forming the layer has been
properly processed. The Engineer may approve the use of
scarifiers or preperizers ahead of the mixing equipment.
The output of the mixing equipment shall be such that a
minimum rate of 20 lin.m.lh measured longitudinally of
completed stabilized layer can be maintained in order to
permit satisfactory compaction of the mix.
3.4.3.7
3.4.3.8
Cement Stabilization Procedures Placing of
Stationery Plant Mixes
3-11
~~
3-12
3.4.3.12
Approved type multi-pass or approved type purpo$ebuilt, single-pass equipment shaH be utilized for on Site
mixing and placing. Operators shall be trained and fully
experienced in the operation of such equipment.
2
Multi-pass equipment may consist of suitable
bitumen distributor and motor graders or as otherwise
approved.
The process of pulverizing the fine grained cohesive
3
fraction (if any I of the granular material shall be as
specified for cement stabilized courses. Bitumen, of the
type and grade selected by the Engineer, shall then be
applied to the surface using approved type heating and
pressura distribution equipment. Emulsified bitumen shall
not normally require heating.
4
Spreading and mixing of the bitumen and granular or
other material shalt be carried out as specified for cement
stabilized courses.
3.4.3.14
Granular
3.4.3.17
Sub~Base,
ill.
iv.
3.4.3.18
Mixing
When approva I is given to utiliza stationary pia nt for
mixing, whether batch mixing plant or continuous type
mixing plant, the plant and equipment and handling and
mixing procedures shall be as specified for cement
stabilization and as specified herein for plant mixing of
lime stabilized materials.
3.4.3.21
2
Suitable methods for handling quicklime shall be
adopted, including fully mechanized or bottom dump
handling equipment and protective clothing worn by the
ii.
3.4.3.24
3-13 .
~
~
3.4.3.25
3.4.4
Method of Measurement
3.4.5
Basis of Payment
3.4.6
i.
cu.m
IJ.
ou.m
iii.
cu.m
Curing Seal
sq.m
iv.
3-14
Ref.
Title
4.1
4.1 .1
4.1.2
4.1 .2. 1
4.1..~2
4.1.2 3
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.5.1
Page No.
Description
Aggregate Matarfala Gene111lly
Sources. and Production
Stockpiling
Sampling and Testing
4-1
...,
Ref.
TltJe
4.2.5.2
4.2.5.3
4.2.5.4
Page No.
4-11
4-12
4-12
4-12
...,
4.2.6
4.2.7
Method of Maaaurement
Baala of Paymem
4.2.8
4-12
4-12
...1
4.3
Bituminous Courses
4--12
-4.3.1
4.3.2
Deac:rlptlon
4-12
Materials
4-13
4.3.3
4.3.4
4-13
4-14
4-1
... 1
4-1
4-3
Bitumen Generally
4-3
4-3
4.2
4--10
43.13
4.21
4.2.2
4.2.21
Descrlpclon
4-10
4.4
4-21
Mllterfala
Medium Cunng Cutback B.tumen
4-10
4-10
4-10
4.4.1
4.4.2
Delctfpdon
4-21
4.4.3
Meterfals
Job Mix 1nd Project Mbc
Equipmem
4-21
4-21
4-21
4.4.6
4-21
4.4.5
4.4.7
Mixing Procedures
Surt.ce Preparation
4-21
...22
4.1 52
4153
4.1.5.4
4.1.5.5
4.1.8
4.1.6;1
Heating of Bitumen
Bitumen Produc:ta
Penetration Graded Bitumen
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-4
41.6.2
4.1.6.3
4.1.6.4
c.s
Bitum1nous Material
Rapid'Curing IFIC) Cutback S.tumen
4-7
MediumCuring [MCJ Cutback Bitumen 4l7
Slow-Curing ISC!Cutback B:tumen
4-7
4.1.6.5
4.1.6.6
Emulsified-Bitumens Gene111lly
4.1.6. 7
Anionic EmulsfiedBitumen
4.1 .6.8
Cationic Emul!lified Bitumen
4.1 .7
Method of Meesurernem and Baala
of Payment
4.2.22
4 .2.2 3
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
Application Procedures
4 2.5.1
41-7
4-8
C.10
4-10
4-1 0
4-11
4-11
...,,
4-11
4.3.4.1
4.3.4.2
4.3.43
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.8.1
4.3.8.2
4.3.8.3
4.3.8.4
4.3.8.
43.11
-4.3.10
4.3.11
-4.3.12
.....
4-14
4-14
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-16
4-18
4-16
4-16
4-16
4-17
4-17
4-18
4-20
4-20
4-20
4-21
Ref.
Title
Page No.
4.4.8
Delivei'V. Spreading and Ffnllhlng
Genl!flll
4.4.8.1
4.4.~.2
4.4.8.3
4.4.8
4.4.10
4.4.11
4.4.12
4,4.13
4.4.14
4.6
4.5.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
4.6.5
4.6.6
4.6.7
4.6.8
4.5.8.1
4.5.8.2
4.5.8.3
4,5,8.4
4.5.9
4.6.10
4.5.11
4.5.12
4.5.13
4.5.14
Rollers
Sandard of Compaction
Sampling and Testing
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-22
Surface Tolerances
4-~
Determination ofThlcknea
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-23
Method of Meaaurement
Baals of Payment
Items In the Bill of Quantities
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-23
Jt-23
4-24
4-24
4-24
4-24
4-24
4-24
4-24
4-24
4.6
4.6.1
4.11.2
4.11.2.1
4,6.2.2
4.8.3
4.8.4
4.6.6
4.8.8
4.11.6.1
4.6.6.2
Description
Material
Bitumen
Aggregates
Equipment
4!25
4-25
4125
4-25
4-25
4-25
4-25
4-25
41-25
4126
Ref.
4.6,6.3
4.6,11.4
4.6.6.5
4.6.6.6
4,6.11.7
4.6.6.8
Title
P.~ge No.
Heating of Bitumen
Spreading Slurry Seal
Spraying of Bitumen
Application of Aggregate
Rolling and Brooming
"""26
4>27
4.6.7
4.8.8
4.6.9
4.8.10
4-2!5
4'26
4'26
4-27
4-27
4-28
4-28
4-28
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
4 .7.3
4.7.4
4.7.5
4.7.6
4.7.7
4.7.8
4 .7.9
4 .7.10
4.7.11
4 .7.12
4 .713
4.7.14
Description
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-29
4-29
4-28
4-29
4-29
4-29
4-29
4.8
4-29
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.3
4.8A
4 .8.6
4.8.6
4.8.7
4.8.8
4.8.9
4.8.10
4.8.11
4.8.12
4.8,13
4.8.14
Description
Materials
Job Mix and ProJect Mix
Equipment
Construction of Trial Sections
Mixing Proolduntl
Surface Preparation
Delivery, Spreading and Finishing
Sampling and Teatlng
Surface T olerences
Determination of ThldcniiU
Method of Meaurement
Baals of Pavment
4-29
4-29
4-29
4-29
4-29
4-30
4-30
4-30
4--30
Surface Tollll'lnces
Detennlnatlon of Th~
4-30
4-30
M.thod of MeRUrement
4--30
Baals of Payment
4-30
4-30
Materfell
Job Mix and ~ Mix
Equipment
Conecruc:tfon of Trial Section
Mixing Procedures
Surface Preparation
Ref.
Title
4.9
4.9.1
4.9.2
4.9.3
4.9.4
4.9.6
4.9.8
4.9.7
4.9JI
4.9.9
4.9.10
Page No.
Oeacription
Metariak
Equipment
Prepanrtlon of Pevament
Placing and Anllhlng Repair Materiels
Sampling and Testing
Surface Tolerances
Method of Measurement
Beale of Payment
hems In the Bill of Quantltiu
4-30
4-30
4-30
4-30
4-31
4-31
4-31
4-31
4-31
4-32
4.10.1
4.10.2
4.10.3
4 10.3.1
4.10.3.2
410.4
410.6
410.8
Oeecrlption
Method of Measuremer.t
Buia of Payment
4-32
4-32
4.11
4-32
4.11.1
Description
Materials
4-32
4-33
4-33
4-33
4.11.2
4.11.3
4.11.4
4.11.6
4.11.8
4.11.7
4.11JI
4.11.9
4.11.10
4.11 .11
4.11 .12
4.11.13
4.11.14
4.12
4.12.1
Conetruction Requirementa
Co,_.ruction
Traffic: Control
4-32
4-32
4-32
4-32
4-32
4-32
4-33
Surface Tolerances
4-33
4-33
4-33
4-33
4-33
Detennlnltlon ofThldcnae
Method of MUIUrement
Basra of P.-,ment
4-34
4-34
4-34
Surface Preparetion
Delivery, Spreading and Finishing
Sampling and Testing
Title
4.12.2
4.12.3
4.12A
4.12.6
4.12.8
4.12.7
4.12.8
4.12.9
4.12.10
Tenninology
4-30
4.10
Materials
Ref.
4-33
Surface Rtdeabllfty
Measurement
4-34
DMCription
4-34
Testing Equipment
Testing Procedure
Submittals
Required Rldeability
Method of Measurement
Basis of Payment
Items In the Bill of Quantities
Page No.
4-34
4-34
4-34
4-34
4-35
4-35
4-35
4-35
4-35
S~ltanntu
Bituminous Pavement)
4.1
4.1.1
Description
4.1.2
4.1.2.1
4.1.2.2
4.1.2.3
Stockpiling
4.1.3
~~
~~<:Bituminous Pavement
Percent.pallina
Sleve
Size
~ ~ co_UTH~
ClA
ClB
25
100
100
19
60-90
:0
4
Aggregates shall be free of gypsum and the coarse
fraction of the aggregate shall not contain more than 5%
chert when tested in accordance with AASHTO T113.
12.5
9.5
4267
5
Aggregates shall be of uniform quality, free from
decomposed stone, organic matter and shale.
4.75
25-50
2.36
3
The material from hot bins passing the number 40
sieve (0.425mml when tested in accordance with AASHTO
T 90 shall be non plastic. In addition the material from cold
bins should not have PI greater than 4.
6
The percentage by weight of friable particles, c!ay
tumps, and other deleterious matter shah not exceed 1%
as determined by AASHTO T 112.
7
Aggregate particles shall be clean, hard, durable and
sound. Crushing shall result in a product such that, for
particles retained on 4.75 mm (No. 41 sieve. at least 90%
by weight shall have 2 or more fractured faces, when
tested in accordance with ASTM 05821 .
8
The flakiness index and the elongat ion index test
shall be conducted in tJCcordance w ith BS 812, the
following are maximum limits;
Bitum(noua
Index
Bitumlnou
Blnder&BIIH
Wearing
eou....
25
~~5
..
30
30
SlenSize
'
PBI'CIIftt Paalng bv M -
.100
95 100
.
_ _7_0 - 100 -~-Tabla 4.1.3.2: Gradation of Mineral Filler for Bituminous
Mi)(es
<1-2 .
(mm)
Bfndllf'
cOil,..
Y!!n~ co~~~
a..
A
Cia.
B
100
65-100
100
100
60-80
4772
56-80
40-60
3(}.56
3556
51 71
2~
34-54
2.00
15-31
19-36
22-36
--
90. 100
7393
1.18
2036
22-38
0.600
14-26
18-30
0.425
820
a-20
8-20
0.300
820
1022
0.150
7-15
917
0.075
215
28
2-8
28
2-8
Coursn
Bituminous Pavement)
4.1.4
3
Aggregate particles shall be clean, hard, durable and
sound. For particles retained on 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve, at
least 90% by weight shall have 2 or more fractured faces
and 100% by weight shall have one or more fractured
faces, when tested in accordance with ASTM 05821 .
4
Flakiness index and elongation index tested in
accordance with BS 812 shall not exceed 25% for each of
flakiness and elongation index. The percentage by weight
of clay Iumps and friable particles as determined by
AASHTO T 112 shall not exceed 3%. Light wei ght
aggregate of specific gravity of 2 or less shall not exceed
3% as determ'ned by AASHTO T 113.
If necessary aggregates shall be washed, or
5
processed by an approved alternative method, to remove
any clay lumps, organic matter, adherent dust or clay films
or other eX1raneous or deleterious matter that may
prevent or detract from proper adhesion of bitumen to the
aggregate particles.
6
Cover aggregates and aggregate for slurry seals,
when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 27 and T 11,
shall conform to the gradations given in Table 4.1 .4.1.
Double Bituminous Surface
Treatment Aggregate
1.
rt
Application
Application
(Gtedlna Bl
IG111dlng Cl
Sieve
Oealgnatlon
(Square
openingI
25mm
100
19mm
90 100
2().55
100
12.5mm
9.5mm
Sluny
Aggregllt
e
_l
D-o15
58100
100
4.75mm
()..5
10.30
91)..100
2.36mm
0 10
65'90
0-5
45-70
1.1_!! m!f!
0.60mm
0.30mm
0.15 mm
0.075mm
o-o.5
Cl-0.5
30-50
18-30
1()..20
5-15
Specfflc.tloo
Standerd Test
MethDCI
Requirementa
AASHTOT96
Max. 35%
Soundness in
Sodium Sulphate
AASHTOT104
Max.10%
Soundness In
Magnesium
Sulphate
AASHTOT104
Max.12%
Resistance to
stripping
AASHTOT 182
Min. 95%
BS 812
Min. SO%
Aggragete P.roperty
Loss In we1ght of
aggregate after 600
revolutions
(Los Angeles
Abrasion)
- --
AASHTOT175
Min. 75
4.1.5
Bitumen Generally
4.1.5.1
~
~
/"-..
~<\Bituminous Pavement
4.1.5.2
Transporting Bitumen
4.1.5.3
Storage of Bitumen
4.1.5.4
3
Thermometers of approved type and adequate range
{calibrated in 2 degrees C increments) for accurately
measuring the temperature of the bitumen while heating,
shall be located so as t o be readily visible and shall be
kept clean and in proper working order at all times.
4
Where storage tanks are required, their capacity shall
be sufficient for at least one day's production.
5
Bitumen materials, wasted through careless handling
or rendered unsuitable for usa by overheating shall not be
used in the work.
4.1.5.5
2
Tanks for heating and storage of bitumen shall be
capable of heating the material, under effective and
positive control at a!l times. to the specified temperature.
The system shall provide uniform healing for the entire
contents of the tank. The circulation system shall be of
adequate size to ensure proper and continuous circulation
of the bitumen during the entire operating period.
Suitable means shall be provided, either by steam or oil
jacketing, or other insulation, fot maintaining the required
1
Procedures for sampling of bituminous materials
shall conform to AASHTO T 40.
2
General requirements and procedures for sampling
and testing of the various types of bitumen shall conform
to the requirements of the relevant sections of these
specifications.
3
Testing for conformity of bitumen products shall be
carried out to AASHTO Standard Methods listed in
AASHTO M 20 and other specified standards.
4.1 .6
Bitumen Products
4.1.6.1
._,_,_
-~
PIINIIIItrlltfCJ!I G~
40-50
Requirement
Ductility at 25'C
Heating of Bitumen
-4....
(em)
Kinematic Viscosity
at 135'C (eStI
Penetration at 25c
(0.1mm)
Softening Point {C)
Specific Gravity at
25c
Loss on heating to
163"C (% W1)
Penetration of
residue% of
original
Solubility In
Trichloroethylene
(%W1)
Ash content {% W1)
Flashpoint
(Cleveland Open
Cup) 1c)
60- 70 .,
80 - 11!!1
..._,
100
280
240
40
50
60
50
58
200... - I
'' ----,.
70
85
100
- --.......48: -
-. ---- .
.
r
56
r-'
99
54
50
_.., .....--.,
r-'1
99
99
1.()
1.0
250
250
1.0
58
48
48
... , ._
0.8
,._,
0..8
1.0
I
.
~I
' t.O
i
225
Bituminous Pavement)
2
Sampling and testing shall be in accordance with the
AASHTO standard method listed in AASHTO M 20
3
Penetration bitumen application temperature range
shall be as given in table 4.1.6.2. Actual Mixing and
Compacting Temperature of Asphalt Concrete shall be
determined from Kinematic Viscosity of Bitumen as shown
lnMS-2.
f'eft
4o.1iO
80170
801100
Application
Temperature rCJ
150170
145-165
140160
i.
ii.
iii
4.1.6.2
5
Unless specified otherwise under this Specification,
mixing and preparation of modified bitumen shall be
carried out in accordance with the modifier manufacturer's
lnstructio ns, and to the approval of the Engineer.
6
The Contractor shall subm't a method statement for
the preparation of polymer modified bitumen (PMB)
blending, including the type of polymer intended for use,
for the Engineer's approval. The Contractor shall propose
the type of polymer he intends to use and shall
demonstrate through testing that the modified asphalt
meets all the specification requirements. Blending of the
asphalt cement and the modifier shall be done by the
supplier of the modifier in a mobile mixing p'ant adjacent
to the Contractor's aspholt plant on Site. The Contractor
shall submit for the Engineer's approval a comprehensive
OA/QC program to ensure that the pre-blended polymer
modified asphalt is delivered, stored in suitable cond't'ons,
incorporated in the bitumen mix and laid in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's instruct'ons. The
minimum requirements for this program shall include but
shall not be limited to the following :
7
The minimum requirements and tests to be
performed on the modified bitumen shall be liS follows:
i.
ii.
Test Property
Specification
Density
0.910 min
ASTM D792
0.940 max
Melt Index
Melting Point
iii.
1.0-15.0
ASTM D 1238
110"-135" c
4-5
~~
~~<:Bituminous Pavement
v.
Frequency of
'T..cfng
at each batch
Property
Tut Stlndard
1.
ASTMD5
2.
Softening Point, c
ASTMD36,
AASHTOT53
Mil\. 65
3.
ASTMD4402
3000 CP
4.
AASHTOT48
230
every 500t
AASHTOTP5
76 "C
every 500t
1%
at each batch
AASHTOT301
75
at each batch
WY500t
Requfrementl
Raf
5.
6.
Loss,
maJC, %
--
AASHTOT240
-- -ASTM 08084,
to be
--
7.
8.
AASHTOTP5
76 "C
Compatibility Test
ASTMD5892
See requirements
under Item 6 of
Paragraph 4.1.6.2
9.
Continue d on page 4 7
....,
at each batch
at each batch
every 500 t
8
The elastic recovery specified under Item 7 of Table
4 1.6.3 above corresponds to modified bitumen with either
an elastomer or a blend of elastomer and plastomer
polymers. Should the Contractor opt to use plastomer
type polymer only, for the asphalt modification, then the
elastic recovery requirement can be replaced by a set of
tests that shall be carried out at the start of the project,
with each set containing three samples, and the resu ts
shall conform to the following Table 4.1.6.4:
Property
Teltsc.ndenl
Requlrementa
Pressure Aging
Vessel (PAV)
Aging
Temperature, c.
()ynlimlc Sheer,
AASHTOR28
110
oc
RCCutback
Grade
RC -
AASHTOT315
90- 115
105- 135
37"C
Report
AASHTOT313
oc
4.1.6.5
Spraying
Tempc
MC
30
21-63
MC
70
45 - 80
MC
250
70- 110
MC -
BOO
95. 125
MC - 3000
110-145
oc
oc.
2
Samp1ing and testing shall be in accordance with the
appropriate ASTM standard methods.
3
SC cutback bitumen spraying temperature ranges
shall be as follows:
SC Cutback
Grade
Type Polymer
9
The percentage of the polymer to be mixed with the
conventional bitumen to modify the latter shall be based
on tests to satisfy the job miK formula.
10 The modifier shall be pre-blended into the
conventional bitumen before mixing with the aggregate in
the hot mix plant.
11 Blending Equipment: The production of the modified
bitumen shall require a specialized high shear blending
machinery to ensure complete and controlled dispersion
and chemical reaction of the modifiers with the
conventional bitumen.
4.1.6.3
800
RC 3000
MCCutback
Grade
e 60s, "C.
Direct tension.
Failure scrain,
minimum 1.0%
Test temperature
0 1.0 mmlmin,
40-75
65 - 105
1
MC cutback shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 82, which covers Grades MC-30, MC-70, MC250, MC-800 and MC-3000 and are listed In Table 4.1.6 6.
GsinO,
MaKimum 5000
kPa,
Test temperature
0 10 redls. OC.
Physical
Hardenino
Creep Stiffness,
S, Mulmum 300
MPa m-value,
minimum 0.300
Test temperaCure
70
RC - 250
RC 4.1.6.4
Spraying
Temp"C
4.1.6.6
Spraying
Temp"C
SC 70
45.80
sc - 250
70 110
SC - BOO
95 - 125
sc - Jooo
110-145
Slow-Setting
(55
and
CSS)
Emulsified
a tumens Generally
Selection and use of emulsified bitumens shall
generally be in accordance with the recommendations in
AASHTO R 5, subject to the following requirements.
2
The manufacturer shell furnish samples of the base
bitumen used in the emulsion.
3
When samples of undiluted emulsion are not readily
avail able for test purposes, tests may be made on the
diluted emulsion and the respective specifications
modified to reflect the changes in properties resulting
from d'lution of the b' tumen.
4-7
~~
OGRLT
../"'..~<Bitumlnous Pavement
4
AU emulsified bitumens shall adhere firmly to the
surface of the mineral aggregate or the highway surface
as appropriate. Failure of the emulsified b' tumen to
perform satisfactorily on the job shall be deemed cause
for its rejection regardless of satisfactory laboratory test
results.
4.1 .6.7
Par-m~llt'lrest
t<ineffiatic Viseaslty at 60 oc
centistokes
FINh Point (Tag, open-cupl
Water percent
Distillation Test:
Distillate percentage by volume of total
distillate to 360 oc
- To 190
To 2250C
. . ..
To 2600C
To 3150C
Residue from distillation to 360 oc volume
w rcentage of s11mDie by difference
Tests on residue from d istillation:
Absolute viscosity at
60 oc poises
Ductility, 5 em/min.
at 2.5 OC
Solubility in Trichloroethylene,
oercent
- Spot test with: . - St11ndard Naphta
Naphtha-xylene solvent.
oercent )!Yiene
- Heptanexylene solvent.
percent xYlene
oc-
--
em
Min
70
140
0.2
Min
Max
Min
250
500
BOO
1600
3000
27
27
27
,-----,
0.2
.- - 35- .
55
65
600
2400
600
l . -._.
-
60
801::"
2400
-....._j
100
99
RC-30
- RC-800
MIX
10
50
70
85
..a
RG-250
'
Max
.
.
"
Min
oc
100
0.2
- - - ..,_,-16
.
46
75
75
600
2400
.-
0.2
'
- .- .
2.5
70
80
600
2400
r-:----'
100
6000
__j
~
--,
99
Max
,---,
99
100
99
- -
Sultftnnto of Omon
S~'ld.ord
Bituminous Pavement)
MC.70
MC-30
Parameter/Tnt
Kinematic Viscosity at 60 c
centistokes
Flash Point (Tag, apen cup ] ~
Water percent
Distillation Test:
Distillate percentage by
volume of total distillate to
360"C
To 225"C
To260"C
To3150C
_
Residue from distillation to
360 OC volume percentage of
saiTJ)Ie ~ difference
Tests on residue from
dlsti nation:
Absolute viscosity et 60 c
poises
Ductility, 5 em/min. 111 25 c
em
Solubility In Trichloroethylene,
percent
Spot test with:
MC-3000
MC800
MC-250
Min
Mu
Mfn
Max
Min
! Mu
Min
Mu
Min
MIX
30
60
70
140
250
500
BOO
1600
3000
6000
38
66
66
66
38
0.2
0.2
0.2
25
70
93
0
20
65
20
60
90
15
60
10
55
87
40
75
0
45
35
80
0
15
15
75
50
55
ff1
75
80
300
1200
300
1200
300
1200
300
1200
300
100
100
99
99
100
100
99
99
- Standard Naphtha
100
99
0.2
0.2
1200
I
-.-.......
-
Naphtha-xylene solvant,
percent xylene
- Haptene-xylene solvent,
percent xylene
SC-70
PariHM!efiTea
Klnemetlc Viscosity et 60
1-~St
Flesh Point (Cleveland open
cup) cieQrees c
Distillation Test
total d istillate to 360 c
Volume ~ Solubility in
trichloroethylene ~
Kinematic viscosity on
distillation residue at 6QC,St
Asphalt residue:
ResidUe of 100 p enetration, '16
Ductility of 100 pene~tion
residue et 25-t, em Water,%
SC-3000
SC-800
SC-250
Min
Mu
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
70
140
250
500
BOO
1600
3000
6000
66
79
107
10
30
20
99
99
70
50
60
100
100
0.5
0.5
100
93
--2
12
99
99
20
160
40
350
70
80
100
100
"
-=-
0.5
0.5
~
~
../"'.~<Bituminous Pavement
S.htsfng
.-
Viscosity, Saybolt
1
, Furol at 25
St(lj"age stability
tesl, 24h %
Cement mixing test,
!
:c.
Min
MIX
20
100
j
i
Sl-1h
Min
MIX
S$-1
20
100
"
Sieve test. %
Residue by
distillation %
TastS on residue
from distillation
test: Penetration, 25
100 a. 5 s
Ductility. 25c, 5
cmlmin,cm
0.1
0.1
57
57
_J
200
40
90
100
40
40
97.5
117.5
(CSSI
Emulsified
Bitumen
Cationic emulsified bitumens shall, prior to dilution,
conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 208, for Types
CSS4 and as ~sled in Table 4.1.6.9.
SloWs.ilifto --- -
= Min
Tests on emulsions:
Viscosity, Saybolt Furol at
25-"C s
Storage sta~...,.,.. 24-h,
- .% ...
20
~-
-~ MIX
4.2. 1
Descri ption
_,
..
.. 1-
57
100
100
4.2.2
Materials
4.2.2.1
0.10
2.0
-'
-250
4.2.2.3
Positive
4.2.2.2
~
4.2.2.4
40
97.5
-410
4.2
- - CS$-1
1
No separate measurement and no items are i ncluded
I n the Bill of Quantities for the materials described in this
Sub-section. Measurement and payment provisions are
I ncluded in the appropriate Sub-sections of this Section 4.
'
Solubility in
trlchforoethylene %
Cationic
'
4.1.6.8
4.1.7
-~
Bituminous Pavement)
4.2.3
Equipment
4.2.4
2
Each trial section shall be constructed using the same
materials, m1x1ng and spraying equipment, and
construction procedures, proposed for use in the Works.
3
The objectives of these trials shall be to determine
the adequacy of the Contractor's equipment and the most
suitable application rates for cutback bitumen prime and
tack coats, or emulsifi ad bitumen tack coats.
4
The Contractor shall not proceed with any on-site
coat applications until the methods and procedures
established in the trials have been approved.
4.2.6
Application Procedures
4.2.5.1
5
Traffic shall not be permitted on surfaces after they
have been cleaned end prepared for prime or tack coat
application.
6
If there are undue delays in scheduling priming or
subsequent paving after priming, the surface tolerances
and compaction of the granular course shall be reverified
and deficient areas corrected or replaced in an approved
manner at the Contractor's expense.
7
The Contractor shall maintain prime coats and tack
coats intact until they are covered by the subsequent
pavement course. Any area where the coats have been
damaged shall be cleaned of all loose material, any
surface defects repaired and the coat re-applied at the
Contractor's expense.
Traffic control measures shall
conform to the requirements of the relevant Sections of
this Specification.
4.2.5.2
3
Areas to be primed shall be as shown on the
Drawings and including 200 mm widths outside the edges
of the pavement line; top of embankment slopes to
pavement lines; and between curbs or gutter edges for
bridge checks.
4
Application rates for prime coat will be determined
by the Engineer from the trial sections, and shall be
generally within the following ranges:
Range of AppiM=.tfan
Type of Surface
Untreated subgrade surfaces,
should!!rs subbase and base courses
'
Bridge weariilg surfaces, asphalt
overlay on existing concrete
gavements
Other surfaces
kg.lsq.m.
0.81 .75
0.1-0.4
as determined
from field tests
or trials
~~
OGRLT
/'-~<:Bituminous Pavement
7
Hand spraying will be approved only for priming
small patches or inaccessible areas that cannot be primed
by normal operation of the pressure distributor.
2
The polymer modified tack coat shell be applied at a
temperature ranging from 1ao C to 190 C.
B
Application of prime at the junction of spreads shall
not ba excessive. Any excess shall be removed from the
surface and any skipped areas or recognized deficiencies
shall be corrected by use of hand sprays.
9
When required by the Engineer, a light covering of
blotting material shall be applied to the prime coat 48
hours after spraying and when it has not dried sufficiently
to withstand damage by traffic. The blotting material shall
be smooth fine sand, or other approved material.
10 Prime coats shall be cured for 3 days before
construction traffic is allowed on it or before the
succeedlng pavement layer is placed, or as directed by the
Engineer, depending on weather conditions.
4.2.6.3
c.
3
The rate of application shall be approved by the
Engineer and after trial tests are carried out it shall be
between 0,1 and 0.5 kg.lsq.m, depending on whether RC
cutback or emulsified bitumen is used and on the surface
condition of the bituminous course on which the tack coat
is to be sprayed, The resulting bitumen residue shall be at
least 0.35 lcg.fsq.m. The Engineer may alter the previously
established rates of application during progress of the
work, if he deems it necessary.
4
The tack coat shall be allowed to dry only until it is in
a suitable tacky condition to receive the superimposed
bituminous course.
Tack coat application shall not
proceed so far in advance of the following course that it
dries out completely.
Spraying procedures shall be as specified for prime
5
coat application.
6
4.2.5.4
4-12
4.2.6
Method of Measurement
4.2.7
Basis of Payment
4.2.8
;,
i i.
iii.
4.3
Bituminous Courses
4.3.1
Description
2
Requirements with
particular application to
bituminous base course, binder and wearing courses,
leveling course, cold mix courses or recycled bituminous
courses are specified in the respective Sub-secti ons
relating to such courses.
Bituminous Pavement)
4.3.2
Materials
4.3.3
to
the
relevant
7
In order to meet the requirements, an approved
additive such as Portland cement, hydrated lime or liquid
anti-strip agent, may be required in the job mix. Portia nd
cement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 85.
Hydrated lime shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 207,
Type N. Cement or hydrated time will normally be
required in the approximate range of 23% by weight of
the aggregates and shall be added at the cold feed in dry
or slurry form as directed. liquid anti-striping agent, if
needed, will normally be required In the approximate
range of 0.6-1.0% by weight of the bitumen, or according
to the manufacturer's specifications.
8
Upon receipt of approval of the job mix formula, the
Contractor shall adjust his mixing plant to proportion the
individual aggregates, mineral filler and bitumen to
produce a final mix within the tolerances given in Table
4.3.3.1. The approved final mix that shall be used in the
daily production is called the 'project mix'.
Speelffed Tolerencn
Slwe Dwfgnetlon
l.quare opening&)
2
The job mix formula shall stipulate a single
combined grading of all aggregate and filler materials
showing the specific percentage by weight passing each
sieve size and the specific percentage by weight of each
material to be used in the total mix.
3
The job mix formula shall be established by the
Contractor, under the supervision of the Engineer, in the
field laboratory. Mix design procedures shall conform to
the Marshall method of mix design and relevant
procedures contained in Asphalt Institute Manual MS2.
All trial mixes shall be prepared and tested by the
Contractor in the presence of the Engneer.
4
The job mix formula shall specify a combnation of
mineral aggregates, including filler and bitumen {plus
bitumen modifier if any) in such proportions as to produca
a job mix which is within the limits of the specified
gradation and bitumen content ranges and which meets
the Marshall Test requirements, as prescribed for each
particular type of b' tumen course. It shall also stipulate the
mixing temperature at discharge from the mixer which,
unless otherwise directed, shall be 170 degrees C (for the
conventional unmodified asphalt).
5
The Marshall Test procedure shall be used to
determine the percentage of bitumen to be incorporated in
the mix. The job mix formula shall take into consideration
the absorption of bitumen into the aggregates. Air voids
shall be calculated in accordance with the procedure given
in the Asphalt Institute Manual. MS-2. The recommended
range of bitumen content is as follows:
r=
.....
I~
Aggregate
CIA
Aggragete
+ or-5.0%
+or-5.0%
4.75 mm
+or-4.0%
2.36 mm
+ or-4.0%
.
2.00 mm
+or-4.0%
+or-3.0%
+or-1.0%
+or - 1.0%
CIUIB
+or-4.0%
Bitumen Content
+or - 0.2%
Temperature of Mix
on dlscharae
+or-5.0%
6
When compacting specimens in accordance w"th the
Marshall Test procedure, the number of blows applied
with the compaction hammer sha1 be 75 on each side,
unless otherwise specified.
ii.
'
~
~
~~<:Bituminous Pavement
4.3.4
Equipment
4.3.4.1
General
OGR~ T
4.3.4.2
Mixing Plant
4-U
4.3.4.3
1
Bituminous courses shall be spread and finished
using approved type, self-contained, power-propelled
pavers of sufficient capacity to be capable of laying up to
80 ton/hr. Pavers shan be provided with electronically
controlled vibratory screed or strike-off assembty with
devices for heating the screed, and shall be capable of
spreading and finishing the various courses of bituminous
plant mix to the proper thickness and in lane and shoulder
widths applicable to the typical cross sections shown on
the Drawings, and in Incremental widths between 2.4 m
and 8 m. If the geometry of the cross section allows, wider
pavers will be required to cover the full width of the
pavemant section in order to avoid longitudinal
construction joints.
2
The pavers shall be equipped with calibrated sansors
to control tha road profile in accordance with the design
shown on the Drawings.
3
The pavers shall employ mechanical devices such as
equalizing runners, straightedge runners, evener arms or
other compensating devices, to maintain trueness of
grade and confine tha edges of the mix to true lines
without the use of stationary side forms. Joint leveling
devices shall be provided for smoothing and adjusting
longitudinal joints between lanes.
4
The paver shall be equipped with a receiving hopper
having sufficient capacity for a uniform spreading
operation.
The hopper shaP be equipped with a
distribution system to placa the mix uniformly in front of
the full length of the screed.
5
The screed or strike,off assambly and e)(tensions
shall effectively produce a finished surface of the required
evenness and texture without tearing, shoving, or gouging
the mix.
6
The paver shall be capable of being operated at
forward speeds consistent with satisfactory laying of the
mix. Speed shall be fully adjustable between 3 m,min and
6 m/min.
7
The automatic controls shall consist of an automatic
linkage arrangement such that, through the process of
automaticaliy adjusting the screed thickness control, tha
mix can be placed and finished to a predetermined grade
and a uniform crown or cross section.
Articulated
averaging beams utilized for grade control shall be at least
9 m in length.
8
If during construction, the spreading and finishing
equipment in operation leaves in the pavement surface
tracks or indented areas or other objections ble
irregularities that are not satisfactorily corrected by
scheduled operations, the use of such equipment shall be
discontinued and other satisfactory spreading and
finishing equipment shall be provided by the Contractor.
Bituminous Pavement)
9
The Contractor shall make available, for reference by
the Engineer, the manufacturer's instruction and operating
manuals for each paver intended for use.
4.3.5
Type and
Gl'llde of
4.3.6
Mixing Procedures
Max.
Tempem ure "C
Alphah
Im mediately aft
diKh ra from
Puamlll
80 - 10Q !!_en.
160
60-70 pen.
165
40-50 pen.
170
4.3.7
Surface Preparation
4-15 .
~
~
DGRl f
~~<:Bituminous Pavement
4.3.8
4.3.8.1
4.3.8.2
4-16
4.3.8.3
4.2.
10 Transverse joints in succeeding layers shall be offset
by at least 2 m. Longitudinal joints shall be offset at least
150mm.
11 Bituminous mix shall be spread in one or more
layers so that, after rolling, the nominal thickness of each
layer of the compacted bituminous material shall be
between 2 and 3 times maximum size of aggregate. This
maximum thickness may be Increased slightly when such
increase is more appropriate to total pavement thickness
and provided the Engineer determines that such increased
thickness will not be detrimental to the quality of the
finished bituminous course, and the Contractor can show
that the required density is attained throughout the layer
thickness.
12 Transitions and structure approaches shall meet the
design criteria for geometries, the surface tolerance
specifications, and shall not be visually discontinuous or
abrupt in appearance.
13 Side roads, entrances and lay-bys shall be paved in
accordance with the details shown on the Drawings.
4.3.8.4
4.3.8.5
Compaction
~
~
_.../"...~<Bituminous Pavement
3
Rollers shall be of self-propelled 2aMie tandem or
three wheel steel-tired, pneumatic-tired and vibratory steel
wheel types, in proper operating condition, capable of
reversing without backlash or tearing of the surface, and
shall be operated at speeds slow enough to avoid
displacement ofthe bitumi nous mi)(.
4
Initial breakdown rolling shall be carried out by use
of 2 dual-drum vibrating steel-wheeled vibratory rollers
each of minimum weight 7,000 kg. and with vibrating
frequency of 2,0003,000 cycles/min. These rollers shall be
purpose made for compaction of hot bituminous courses.
5
Intermediate rolling shall be carried out by use of at
least 2 self-propelled, tandem pneumatic smooth-tired
ro~ers each capable of e)(erting contact pressures of up to
690 KN./sq.m. (100 psi) and ballast adjustable to ensure
uniform wheel loadings.
6
Final rolling shall be carried out by use of two, 2axle
tandem steel-tired static rollers each of minimum weight
10,000 kg. capable of exerting contact ptessures of up to
65 kg /cm1 (350 lb/in.).
7
Prior to use on Site of pneumatic-tired roners, the
Contractor shall furnish, for reference and retention by the
Engineer, manufacturers' charts or tabulations showil'1g
the contact areas and contact pressures for the full range
of t ire inflation pressures and for the full range of tire
loadings for each type and size of compactor t ire to be
used. The Conttactor shall ensure ttlat tire pressures are
maintained at all times in conformity with such charts or
tabulations. The ma)(imum allowable tolerances shall be
plus or minus 35 KN./sq.m. (5 psi).
8
Rollers shall move at a slow but uniform speed,
generally with the drive roll or wheels nearest to the pavar.
Recommended speeds are shown in Table 4.3.8.1 (kmlh. ).
~pnd af R~len
Roll8r1Vpe
Steel Tlted
Statlc Rollers
Pneumatic
Tired Rollers
Vibratory
Rollers
4.3.9
(l(m:.tlr.)
' BI'NkdoWn
lntennecllate
R~llna
R~llna
R~llna
41.5
Flnllh
5
4.5
-
---
418
the
the
2
The Marshall bul.k specific gravity shall be
determined in accordance with AASHTO T 166. The
Marshall sper;imens shaD be prepared from the same
material used in construction. taken from samples of fresh
bituminous mix at the m ixing plant or from trucks
delivering miM to the Site. Oven heating for up to 30
minutes to maintain the heat of the sample is permissible.
3
The bulk specific gravity of the miM as placed and
compacted in situ shall be determined from 100 mm
nominal diameter core samples, or slab samples cut from
each compacted layer on the roael at locations designated
by the Engineer who may require additional tests to
determine limits of areas deficient in density, or for
recheck.
4
Samples
for in-situ
bulk
specific
gravity
determinations shall be taken in sets of 2 from each
pavement location. Minimum frequency of sampling for
each bituminous layer shell be one setllene/500 m, with a
minimum of one set per day of placing bitumi nous layers.
Bituminous Pavement)
!B)
IAI
won:~
4-1
Materi als used in
bituminous mix (at
batchina Dlantl
T~requency
Tab at aouroe of
material
1 Specific gravrty
& water absorption
2. Abrasion Test
3. Chert content
4. Clay lumps &
friable materials
5. Flalcy and elongated
pertieles
6. S~undness
4-2
Materials used in
bituminous mx (from
hotbinsl
-=='
1 Gradation
2. Specific gravrty
and water
absorption
3. PlasticitY index
4. Sand equNalent
5. Stripping with
4-3
Bituminous mix
design for each
course {from hot bins)
asphalt
1. Complete mix
For each project
design in accordance
1 When results are not
with American Asphalt 1 c ons;stent with the mix
Institute (MS2)
clesic:tn results.
2. Loss of stability
-As requested
4-4
Bituminous M x
Marshall stabloty for
each laver
At batchlng plant
1. Stability
2. Flow
3: Extrilction (binder
content & gradation!_
4. Airvolcb
5. Voids'" mineral
ag_g_~tes
6. Daily Marshall
densitY
1. Stability
2. Flow
3. Extraction'(binder
content & gradation)
4. Air voids
5. Voids rn rriiniiral
Test each 3
working days
Test for each
batchlng plant
As requested
~tes
6. Dally Marshall
den~
--
~
/'...,/
~~<:Bituminous Pavement
4.3.10
Surface Tolerances
4.3.11
Determination of Thickness of
Courses
.C-20
5
One core shall be taken from each section by the
Contractor at approved locations and in the presence of
the Engineer. When the measurement of the core from
anv paved section is not deficient by more than 5 mm
from the specified thickness, the core will be deemed to be
of the specified thickness as shown on the Drawings.
6
When the measurement of the core from any paved
section is deficient by more than 5 mm but not more than
20 mm, 2 additional cores spaced at not less than 100m
shall be taken and used together with the first core to
determine the average thickness of such section.
7
When the measurement of the core from anv paved
section is less than the specified thickness by more than
20 mm. the average thickness of such section shall be
determined by taking additional cores at not less than 5 m
intervals parallel to the centerline in each direction from
the affected location until, In each direction, a core is taken
which is not deficient by more than 20 mm. Exploratory
cores for deficient thickness will not be used in average
thickness determinations.
B
Any deficiencies in the tota l thickness of bituminous
courses shall be subject to a proportional reduction in the
volume of final (surface) course measured for payment, or
complete removal and replacement, as shown in Table
4.3.11. 1 below.
Alternatively, the Contractor shall
construct at his own expense, a surface course overlay, if
practicable In the judgment of the Engineer. Any such
overlay shall be a minimum of 40 mm compacted
thickness and to the specified standard of the course It is
overlaying.
9
If the deficiency in total thickness of the asphalt
lavers is from 0 to 3mm, full payment will be made, on
condition that deficiencies are not found In more than 10%
of the total project. Deficiencies between 3mm and 10mm,
80% of the fuP payment for the bitum"nous courses wlll be
made.
~ In
the
Thlc:kn.e of
lndlvldu.l AapMit
byll'l
Th~ofTotal
S5mm
5-20mm
Action
AapMit layll'l
>
S3mm
Full~ment
3 - 10mm
BO%~ment
...
Remove and
replace
4.3.12
Method of Measurement
J
i
Sutt"ru'to of Ornon.
Sta:'\d~srd SpecfJUt~ons
til
Bituminous Pavement)
2
Bituminous prime and tack coats are measured as
prescribed In Sub-section 4.2.
3
Bituminous overlays constructed by order of the
Engineer to correct deficiencies In total thickness of
bituminous courses or to compensate for major
deficiencies in the thickness of any underlying bituminous
course, shall not be measured for direct payment, but
shall be considered as subsidiary work the costs of which
will be deemed to be included In the respective rates for
bituminous courses. stated in the Bill of Quantities.
4
Establishment of the job mix formula, surface
preparation, construction of joints, hand painting of
contact surfaces, remedial treatment of surface
irregularities, cutting of cores and slabs for testing or
measurement purposes, reinstatement of core and slab
areas of pavement, rolled down longitudinal bituminous
edge strips, additional thickness of bituminous course in
excess of the speciii ad thickness, and other ancillary items
shall not be measured for direct payment, but shall be
considered as subsidiary work the costs of which will be
deemed to be included in the respective rates for
bituminous courses stated in the Bill of Quantities.
4.3.13
Para"l.ter
Vlllua
1200
Flow(mms)_
2 3;5
12%
{minimuml
Air voids
4-7%
50to70%
of
Marshall
stability
by
submerging specimens In water at 60oC
for 24 h. compared to stability
maasured after submersion in water at
60"C for 30 minutes
Max_ 25%
Min. 2%
Loss
Basis of Payment
4.4
4.4.1
Description
Materials
to
the
relevant
2
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, bitumen
for base course construction shall be
penetration
greded bitumen.
oono
oono
4.4.2
4.4.3
5
The job mix formula shall be re-established if the
source of aggregate, filler or bitumen changes.
4.4.4
Equipment
4.4.5
4.4.6
Mixing Procedures
~
~
/"-.~<Bituminous Pavement
4.4.7
Surface Preparation
4
The longitudinal regularity of the surfaces of base
course as measured by the rolling straight-edge set at 5
mm shall be such that the number of surface irregulariti es
is within the relevant limits stated in Table 4.4 10-2. No
irregularity exceeding 10 mm shall be permitted.
Length
4.4.8
4.4.8.1
General
Rollers
Standard of Compaction
4.4.9
300m
75m
20
4.4.11
Determination of Thickness
4.4.12
Method of Measurement
2
The tolerances on elevations of finished bituminous
base course surface shall be not greater than + 6 mm.
3
When the finished surface is tested with a 3 m long
straightedge, placed parallel to, or at right angles to the
centerline. the maximum deviation of the surface from the
testing edge between any two contact points shall not
exceed 5 mm (Table 4.4.10.1).
2
Where bituminous base course Is intended to serve
as a wearing course, any deficiencies in thickness shall,
unless an overlay is constructed at the Contractor's
expense, result in a proponion only of the base course
volume being measured for payment. Proponions shall
be determined in accordance with the thickness
deficiencies stated in Sub-section 4.3, Table 4.3.11.1.
4.4.10
Surface Tolerances
tohnnc:.
Action
Surface elevation
Max.
6mm
Surface Irregularity
(3m straight edge)
Max.
5mm
Prqperty
--
422 .
4.4.13
Basis of Payment
Bituminous Pavement)
4.4.14
I.
ii.
4.5
4.5.1
Description
4.5.2
Materials
4
The Job mix formula shall be re-established if the
source of agg regale, filler or bitumen is changed.
5
When tested for resistance to water damage In
accordance with AASHTO T-283 'Resistance of Compacted
Asphalt Mixtures to Moisture-Induced Damage', the
conventional and polymer modified bituminous wearing
course mixtures shall have a retained tensile strength
greater than or at least equal to 80%. In cases where the
anti-stripp'ng agents are not successful In providing the
specified tens"le strength ratio, the Contractor shall
consider alternative means, such as the use of hydrated
lime to achieve this purpose.
4.5.4
to
the
relevant
2
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. bitumen
for binder and wearing courses construction shall be sono
penetration graded bitumen. or any other suitable grade
for the climatic condition of the project.
3
For polymer modified bitumen, unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings, bitumen for binder and wearing
courses construction shall not be lower than sono
penetration graded bitumen modified with one of the
polymers specified in Sub-section 4.1, Paragraph 4.1.6.2..
4.5.3
3
After the job mix formula has been established and
approved, alt subsequent mixes shall conform to it within
the allowable tolerances, as shown in Table 4.5.3.1.
Equipment
4.5.5
4.5.6
Mixing Procedures
4.5.7
Surface preparation
Binder
Coune
Wearing
Coune
1300
1400
Flow(mmsl
2-4.5
2-5
4.5.8
13-14%
1-4--15%
4.5.8.1
General
4-7%
4-7%
50 to
70%
50 to
70%
Max
25%
Max
25%
Pn:~perty
Min 2%
Min 2%
Rollers
~
~
~~<Bituminous Pavement
5
The combination of the permitted tolerances In the
levels of the different pavement layers, excluding
aggregate base and sub-base courses, shall not result in a
reduction of thickness by more than 10 mm from the
specified thickness, as shown on the Drawings, nor a
reduction in the final wearing course thickness by more
than 5 mm from that specified or shown on the Drawings.
4.5.8.4
4.5.11
4.5.8.3
Standard of Compaction
4.5.9
4.5.10
Surface Tolerances
Property
4.5.12
Method of Measurement
AGtlon
Toter.nc:e
Replace {minimum
Surface
Max, 6mm
elevation
15m length ofroad)
Surface
Replace (minimum
I rregularity {3m
Max, 3mm
15m length of road)
straloht.edQI!)_ - - - - Table 4.5.10. 1: Tolerances on bituminous wearing course
surface elevation and straight edge Irregularity
4
The longitudinal regularity of the surfaces of the
finished binder or wearing course as measured by the
rolling straight-edge set at 5 mm shall be such that the
number of surface irregularities is within the relevant
limits stated in Table 4.5. 102. No irregularity exceeding 10
mm shall be permitted.
Length
300m
75m
15
----------------
~4
Determination of Thickness
4.5.13
Basis of Payment
4.5.14
i.
ii.
iii.
iv,
Sultnnnto of Oonon.
St:>el~rd ~r,u~ono
Bituminous Pavement)
4.6
4.6.1
3
Single bituminous surface treatment {SBST) shell
consist of a single application of cutback or straight run
bitumen, and sand aggregate ores specified.
4
Double bituminous surface treatment {DBST) shall
consist of an application of cutback or straight run
bitumen and coarse graded cover aggregate followed not
less than 5 days later by a second application of cutback or
straight run bitumen and medium graded aggregate, or as
specified.
4.6.2
Materials
4.6.2.1
Bitumen
4.8.2.2
Aggregates
4.6.3
4.6.4
3
The objectives of these trials shall be to determine
the adequacy of the Contractor's equipment, the most
suitable application rates for cutback bitumen, emulsified
bitumen and the various gradations of aggregate, and the
most suitable consistency of slurry seal to fill cracks and
leave a residual coating of 3 mm over the entire
bituminous wearing surface.
4
The Contractor shall not proceed with any seal coat
applications until the methods and procedures established
in the trials have been approved.
4.6.5
Rates of Application
Aggreglte
Binder
fkallcr.m.l
lkalsa.~rul
12.5-20.0
1.00:1.80
10.().15.0
0.90-1.80
4.6.6
Construction Requirements
4.6.6.1
General
Equipment
"-...
~
/
~~<Bituminous Pavement
4
The surface to be treated shall be dry or slightly
damp and the moisture content of aggregates at the lime
of application to the coated surface shall not exceed 3% by
weight.
5
Unless otherwise directed, the minimum time
interval between successive seal coats, in DBSD
applications, shall be 5 days.
4.6.6.2
Surface Preparation
4.6.6.3
Heating of Bitumen
4.6.6.4
4-2& .
3
The slurry seal coat shall be uniform end
homogeneous after spreading and shall not show signs of
separation of the emulsion and aggregate after setting.
4.6.6.5
Spraying of Bitumen
4.6.6.6
Application of Aggregate
Bituminous Pavement)
4
Where adjacent spreads are to be made, the first
aggregate spread shall not extend closer than 150 mm to
the edge of bitumen application. The adjacent spread of
bitumen shall overlap this 150 mm and complete
aggregate coverage shall be achieved on the second
spread promptly upon completion of the first spread to
ensure a smooth riding surface.
5
Immediately after aggregate has been spread,
deficient areas shall be covered by additional aggregate.
Humps, ridges or uneven distributions of aggregate shall
be removed and corrected to ensure that there are no
permanent ridges, bumps, or depressions in the
completed surface. Additional aggregate shall be spread
in whatever quantities necessary to prevent pick-up by
rollers or traffic, after which the surface shall be ro lied as
directed.
6
Care shall be taken to prevent aggregate from
entering ditches or Inlets of any type. The Contractor shall
be responsible for removing any such aggregate materials
or other accumulated debris arising out of his operations.
4.6.6.7
dislodged.
This brooming shall result in uniform
distribution of loose screenings over the surface which
shall then be re-rolled using pneumatic-tired rollers unlil'
at least 2 complete coverages have been achieved.
8
Light drag broomi ng and re-rolllng shall be repeated
24 hours after the initial broom ing, if sa directed.
9
Excess screenings shall be salvaged and stockpiled
or disposed of as directed.
4.6.6.8
4.6.7
~
~
/'-..~<:Bituminous Pavement
4.6.8
Method of Measurement
4.6.9
Basis of Payment
4.6.10
I.
li.
ill.
4.7
4.7.1
Description
4.7.2
Materials
4.7.3
428
4.7.4
Equipment
4.7.5
4.7.6
Mixing Procedures
4.7.7
Surface Preparation
4.7.8
4.7.9
4.7.1 0
Surface Tolerances
4.7.11
Determination of Thickness
4.7.12
Method of Measurement
4.7.13
Basis of Payment
4.7.14
i.
it.
4.8
4.8.1
Description
4.8.2
Materials
to
the
relevant
2
The type and grade of bitumen for the paving
mixture shall be as shown on the Drawings or as directed.
The bitumen shall conform to the relevant requirements of
AASHTO M 81,M 82, M 140 or M 208.
4.8.3
4.8.4
Equipment
4.8.5
~
~
DGRLT
./'~<Bituminous Pavement
4.8.6
Mixing Procedures
4.8.12
Method of Measurement
2
Deficiencies in thickness of bituminous cold m ix
wearing course shall, unless an overlay is constructed at
the Contractor's expense, result in a proportion only of the
wearing course volume being measured for payment.
Proportions shall be determined in aceordance with the
thickness deficiencies and volume proportions stated Subsection 4.3, Table 4.3.11.1.
l.
li.
4.8.7
Surface Preparation
4.8.8
4.8.13
Basis of Payment
4.8.14
i.
4.9
4.9.1
Description
4.8.9
4.8.10
Surface Tolerances
l
Surface Tolerances shall conform to the relevant
requirements of Sub-section 4.4.
2
Finished elevations and straight edge tolerances sheD
conform to the relevant requirements of Sub-section 4.4
or Sub-section 4.5, as appropriate.
4.8.11
Determination of Thickness
4.9.2
Materials
4.9.3
Equipment
4.9.4
Preparation of Pavement
430
Bituminous Pavement)
4.9.5
4.9.6
4.9.7
Surface Tolerances
4.9.8
Method of Measurement
4
Prior to rece1vmg bituminous material, the
excavations shall be thoroughly cleaned. Subgrade, subbase or base course material shall be primed with a light
coating of MC cutback bituman and existing bituminous
surfaces shall be lightly painted with emulsified bitumen,
all in accordance with the requirements of Sub-section 4.2
5
The excavation shall be filled with bituminous
pavement materials placed in layers not exceeding 70 mm
and compacted using vibratory compactors.
Unless
ordered to the contrary by the Engineer, the top layer shall
4.9.9
Basis of Payment
""'-........./
/'...,/
Communl~atlono
DGRL T
~~<Bituminous Pavement
4.9.10
L
ii.
iii,
iv.
v.
4.10
4.1 0.1
Description
4.10.2
Materials
4.10.3
Construction Requirements
4.10.3.1
Construction
4
Bituminous material shall be placed in the prepared
excav!lon ln layers not e xce eding 80mm thick. Machine
laying shall be used except for confined are as where the
use of a machine would be impracticable. Completion
shall be by roller as specified in Sub-sections 4 3, 4.4 or
4.5.
4-32
5
Quality control tests fo r density, thickness and mix
properties shall be performed as instructed by the
Engineer.
6
Any work needed to road shoulders. earthworks, side
slopes, road drainage and services shall be carried out as
shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the
relevant clauses of Sections 2, 8 and 18.
4.10.3.2
Traffic Control
4.10.4
Method of Measurement
4.10.5
Basis of Payment
4. 10.6
i.
4.1 1
4.11.1
Description
Bituminous Pavement)
4.11.2
Materials
3
New materials shall conform
requirements of Subsection 4.1.
to
the
relevant
4
Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, bitumen
for recycled bituminous base course shall be graded to
suit the project climatic condition and type of work. If not
specified, or shown on the Drawings, grade 60-70
penetration conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M
20 shall be used.
5
Modifying agent used to soften the old bitumen shall
be used in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions end approved by the Engineer.
6
Existing pavement shall be removed in such a
manner as to prevent unnecessary intermixing with the
underlying base, sub-base or subgrade material.
7
The stockpile height shall not be greater than 3
meters. Construction equipment will not be permitted on
the stockpiles.
4.11.3
5
If both bitumen and modifier are used they shall be
introduced into the mixing area through separate
metering devices.
6
Preheating of the crushed recycled bituminous
material immediately before introduction to the mixer may
be permitted subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Preheating methods shall not result in loss of bitumen
from the recycled material.
4.11.7
Surface Preparation
2
The properties of the new modified mix shall meet all
the requirements of Sub-sections 4.1, 4.3 and 4.4, as
appropriate.
4.11.8
4.11.4
Equipment
4.11.5
4.11.6
Mixing Procedures
4.11.9
4.11.11
Determination of Thickness
~~
OGR~T
.../".~<:Bituminous Pavement
4.12
4.12.1
Description
4.12.2
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
4-34
v.
vi.
4.12.3
Terminology
4.12.4
Testing Equipment
4.12.5
Testing Procedure
Sultonnto of Ornon. Sr.t-ad.ttd Spe.esfa 0111 '01 Ro.1d t.. Bricfgct eon.~ruc:liot
Bituminous Pavement)
4.12.6
Submittals
4.12.9
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
vlil.
ix.
4.12.7
Required Rideability
RniiRough IRt(!Mm)
s 1.2
Price AdJulllment
100%
1.2 - 1.4
98%
1.4 - 1.6
96%
1.6- 1.9
92%
1.9-2.4
85%
4.12.8
Method of Measurement
Basis of Payment
ii.
Ref.
Title
6.1
6-1
6.1.1
Description
Dellnillons
5-1
5-1
5.1.1.1
5.1.1.2
5,1.1 3
5.1 .1.4
5.1..2
5.1.2.1
5.1.2.2
5.1 .2.3
5.1 .2.4
References
Submittals
Quality Assurance
Materials
Portland Cement
Silica Fume
Supplementary Cementing
Material (SCM)
5.12.5
5.1.2.5
5.1 .2.7
Adm.xtures
5.1.2.8
5.1.3
5.1.3.1
5.1.3.2
!?age No.
Fiber Remforcement
Concrete Mixes
Design Mixes
Testing Agency
5.1.3.3
Reports
5.1.3.4
5.1.3.5
Concrete ClassM
Threshold Values for Supplementary
Cementing Materials (SCM )
5.1.3.6
5.1.3.7
5.1.3.8
5.1.3.9
51
52
5-2
5-3
5-3
53
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-5
55
5-5
6-6
56
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-7
6-7
5.1.3.10
5.1.3.1 1
58
Concrete
5-8
5.1 .3i12
5.1.3:13
5.1.3.14
Concrete
Adjustments to Concreta M xes
Absorption Test
5.1 .3.15
5.1.3.16
5.1.3.17
5.1.4
5.1.4.1
Permeability Tests
Synthetic Fiber
Admixtures
Construction Requlrarnents
Concrete Mixing
Ref.
L1.4.2
5)1.4.3
5.1.4.4
5.1.4.5
5.1.4.6
5.1.5
5.1.5.1
5.1.5.2
6.1.6
5-9
5-9
6-9
5-9
6.2
Reinforcing Steel
5.2.1.1
5.2.1.2
5.2.13
5.2. 1.4
6.2.2
5.2.2. 1
5.2.2.'2
5.2.2.3
5.2.3
Description
References
Submittals
Qual.ty Assurance
Delivery, Storage and Handling
Materials
Steel Reinforcement
Reinforcement Accessories
Fabricating .Reinforcement
Construction Requirements
5.2.3.1
5.2.3.2
6.2.3.3
General
Shippng. Storage and Cleaning
Placing
5.2.3.4
Concrete Cover
5.2.4
6.2.6
5.2.6
6.3
5-8
5'8
59
Ready-Mixed Concrete
5-9
Quality Control and Testmg - General 5-10
Quality Control - Testing
on F.resh ConCTete
5 10
6.1.7
5.2.1
6.3.1
5.3.1.1
5.3. 1.2
Method of Meuurement
Basis of Payment
Item. In the 8111 of Quantltlea
Reinforced Concrete
Structures
Deac:riptlon
5.3.1.3
Definitions
References
Submittals
5.3.1.4
Quality Assurance
5.3.2
Page No.
Job-Site Mix ng
58
5-8
Title
Mlltarlels
5 1 1
5-12
5 12
5 12
6-12
5-13
6-13
5-13
513
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-15
515
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-16
5-18
5-16
5-16
5-16
5 17
5-17
Ref.
Title
Page No.
5.3.2.1
fiorm Materiels
6.3.2.2
Wetemops
5.3.2.3
Concrete Curing Covw Sheets
6.3.2.4
Curing Compounds
5.3.2.5
Concrete Accessori
l.3.2.8
Repair Materials
5.3.3
Conatructlon Requlrementa
5.3.3.1
Formwotk
5.3.3.2
Falsework
5.3.3.3
Embedded Items
5.3.3.4
Rem&Wing and Reusing fiorm1
5.3.3.5
Vapor Rmrdefs
5.3.3.8
Construction Joints
5.3.3.7
Contrec:tlon end Elcpenslon JOints
5.3.3.8
Watemops
5.3.3.9
Concrete Placement
5.3.3.10
HotWeather Concreting
5.3.3.11
Finishing Plastic ConcrltUI
5.3.3.12
Curing Concrete
5.3.3.13
Formed Finishes
5.3.3.14
Tolerances
5.3.4
Method of M...urement. Basis
of Pll'fment and Bill of Ouantltlea
6.4
Prestressed Concrete
Structures
5.4.1
5.4.1.1
5.4.1.2
6.4.1.3
5.4.1.4
6.4.2
5.4.2.1
5.4.2.2
Deacripefon
5.4.2.3
5.4.2.4
5.4.2.5
6.4.3
5.4.3.1
5.4.3.2
Scope
Definitions
Referenc:a
Submittals
Material.
Concrete
Reinforcing Steel
Prestressing Steel
Pos...,Tensloning Anchorages
and Couplers
Epoxy-Bonding Agents for Precast
Segmental Construc:tion
Conatructfon Requirements
Placement of Ducts
Placement of Prestressing Steel
Ref.
5-17
5-18
518
519
5-19
519
5-19
5-19
620
5-20
5-20
5-21
5-21
5-21
5-22
5-22
5-24
525
!525
6-26
5-26
6.51
5.5.1 1
6.5.1.2
6.5.2
6.5.3
5.6.3.1
6-27
5.!5.3.2
6-27
6-27
5-27
5-27
5-27
528
6-28
5-28
529
529
5-29
Page No.
5.4.3.3
5.4.3.4
5.4.3.5
5.4.3.15
5.4.3.7
6.4.3.8
PIIICIIment af Anchorages
Identification end Testing
Pratectlort pf Prestressing Steel
Ducts
Grout
Tensioning
Pretension Cormruction
5.~.3-9
5.4.3.10
PostTen1ion Construction
5 4.3.1 1
Grouting
6.4.4
Method o f M...urement
6.4.6
Balls of Payment
5.4.8
lteme ln the Bill of au.ntltles
6.6
5.5.3.3
5.!5.3.4
6.5.4
6.6
Description
Scope
References
Materials
Conltrvc:tlon Requinimenta
Silenced CantileVer Construction
with In-Situ Concrete
Glued Precast Segmental
Constru1on
Precast Beam end slab Construction
lnSitu Construction
Method of Meaurement, Buil af
Payment Mid ltema In the Bills
af Ouantldea
!5.8.3.1
5.11.3.2
6.8.3.3
5.8.3.4
6--40
6-40
5-40
5-40
5-40
6--40
6-41
5-41
5-42
5-43
5-43
5-43
6.8.1
5.8.1.1
6.8.1.2
6.8.2
5-31
5-31
5-32
6-32
6-33
5-34
5-35
6-36
5-37
6-39
Proceaures
6.8.3
6-29
5-29
5-29
530
Title
6-44
Delcriptlon
5-44
5-44
5-44
References
Mlterfala
Construction Requlrementa
lhccavation
Structure! Concrete
Concrete Piles
Waterproofing
5-44
5-44
5-44
5-45
6-45
6-46
Ref.
Title
5.8.3.5
5.8.3.11
5.8.3.7
&.U
&.11.5
&.11.11
5.7
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.7.2.1
5.7.2.2
6.7.2.3
5.7.2.4
5.7.2.5
5.7.2.11
5.7.2.7
5.7.2.1
5.7.2.9
6.7.3
5.7.3.1
5.7.3.2
5.7;3.3
5:7.3.4
5.7.3.5
5.7.3.8
Delcriptlon
Materlela
Forms
Steel Reinfotcernent
Concrete Matariall
AdmiJCtu1'81
Curing Materials
Related Materials
Conc:reMixes
Concrete Mbcinv
Umltations of Mixing:
Conltruc:tlon Requirements
Prepal'don
Edge Forma end Screed Construction
Stall Reinforcement
Placement of ft_einforcement
5.7.3.7
5.7.3.8
5.7.3.1
5.7.3.10
5.7.3.11
5.7.3.12
5.7.3.13
5.7.3.14
5.7.3.15
5.7.3.11
5.7.3.17
6.7.3.11
5.7.3.19
Page No.
Joints
Conditioning of UnderlyingCourse.
Slip-Form Consuuetton
Conditioning of Underlying Courte,
Side-Form Conacruction
Handling. MeaiUrfng. end BitChing
Material
Concrlbl Protection and Curing
Concrete Pl_,..ent
Concrete Finishing
Final Strib-Off, ConaoiKIMion
and Flnlslling
Surt.ce Textunt
Slcid Reli. .nl Surfaces
Surface Tilt
Removing Forms
SealingJoWC.
Opening 10 Traffic
PIVtment Toler1nce
5-45
5-45
5-45
5-45
5-46
6-45
5-45
5-45
5-45
5-411
5-411
5-411
5-47
5-47
5-47
5-47
5-48
5-411
54
5-48
5-48
5-49
5-49
5-411
Raf.
5-52
5-53
5-53
6-56
5-65
5-58
5-51
5-158
5-57
s;s7
6-57
6-67
PlgeNo.
5.7.3.20
Pav.ment Mertcing
5.7.3.21
Field Quality Control
5.7.3.22
R. .i,. lnd Pratecdon
5.7.3.23
Detennirwtion of Co~ Thiclcnaa
&.7.4
Mlllhocl of Meaunlment
Baia of Payment
5.7.5
6.7.11
ltema lrl the Bl l of Quentltfee
6.8
5.8.1
6.1.2
5.8.2.1
15.8.2.2
5.8.2.3
6.8.2.4
s.u
5.8.3.1
5.8.3.2
6.8.3.3
5.8.14
5.8.3.5
5.1.4
5-!7
5-57
5-58
15-59
5-59
5-59
5-59
5-59
Detcrfptlon
Materials
Mahtriala, Genenll
Elastomeric Hot-Poured Joint Sellanta
Joint Sealant Baclcing
MilceiiMWOUs Materiala
Construction Requlrementa
Examination
Preparation
lnabllladon of Joinr Sealert
Cleaning
~n
5-59
5-59
5-69
5-eO
HO
HO
5-eD
s.ao
s.ao
6-80
6-61
6-61
5-81
6.9
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
5.8A
&.8.6
5.U
Deecrfpllon
Maleriala
Conltructlon Requirements
Medlod of M._.ment
5-52
6-52
l'itle
6.10
IHS1
5-81
5-81
laliaofP~
5-82
5-e2
5-62
5.10.1
o.aipllon
Scope
5.10.1.1
5.10.1.2
uu
MaliNIa
5.10.2.1
Asphalt
6.10.2.2
Bitumen
6.10.2.3
Wmerproofing Fabric
...,.,__
5-82
6-12
5-112
6-62
U2
5-82
5-82
6-62
Ref.
5.10.2.4
5.10.2.6
5.10.2.6
5.10.2.7
5.10.2.8
5.10.3
5.10.3. 1
5.10.3 2
5.10.3.3
5.10.3.4
Title
Page No.
5-Q
5-63
6.12.1
DeKrlptlon
6-83
6.12.2
Loed Application
563
5-63
5~
5-64
5-64
5-64
5-64
565
6-eli
5-65
5-65
6.11.1
DHcriptlon
Scope
Submittals
Performance Requirements
Duality Assurance
Testing
5-60
Material
General
P,rfmer
Topcoat
Specifications
Construction Requirement.
General
Inspection of Concrete
Surface Preparation
Approval Prior to Coating Application
Application
S-ee
5.111.3
5. 11.1.4
5.11.1.5
6.11.2
5.11.2.1
5.11.2.2
5.11.2.3
5.11 .2.4
5.11.3
5.11 .3.1
5.11 .3.2
6.11.3.3
5.11.3.4
5.11.3.5
5.12
5.11 .1.2
6.11.4
563
5-63
5.11
5.11.1.1
Title
5-62
5. 10.3.5
Ref.
5-65
5-65
5-65
5-65
5-66
fi.66
5-66
5-66
5-66
1-M
5-66
566
567
6-67
567
6.12.2.1
6.12.2.2
Page No.
6-67
667
6-67
6-67
5-&7
6-68
5-68
6-88
!HIS
6-68
6-88
6-88
Bnd~o Conatruetior
21'11
5.1
ASTM C 114
5.1 .1
Description
ASTM C 117
5.1.1.1
Definitions
ASTM C 127
ASTM C 128
ASTM C 131
ASTM C 142
ASTMC 143
6.1.1.2
References
AASHTO T26
Highways
and
ACI 117
ASTM C 150
ACI301
Standard
Cement
ASTMC 172
ACI304
Guide
for
Measuring,
Mixing,
Transporting, and Placing Concrete
ASTM C 186
Specification
for Portland
ANSI 09001
ASTM C 191
ANSI 09002
ASTM C192/C192M
Standard Practice for Making
and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Laboratory {AASHTO T126)
ASTM C 2l9
Standard Terminology
Hydraulic Cement
ASTMC 227
ASTMC289
ASTM C295
Standard Guide
Examination
of
Concrete
ASTM C 311
ASTM C494
ASTMC 586
ASTM A 820
ASTMC33
ASTM C42
ASTM C B8
ASTM C94
Standard Specifications
Mixed Concrete
for
Ready-
Relating
to
for Petrographic
Aggregates
for
51
~~
Minltrv of
Trnn:~'t ~ Cornmunicatlona
OOR.ll
ASTM C595
ASTMC618
ASTMC989
ASTM C 1064
ASTM C 1077
BSEN 12350
BSEN 12390
BSEN 12620
BS EN 197
Cement SpecificaUon
ASTM C 1105
ASTMC 1116
Standard
Specification for FiberReinforced Concrete and Shotcrete
ASTM C 1202
ASTMD512
2
Design MiKes: For each concrete m ix.
Include
alternative mb( designs when characteristics of materials.
project conditions. w eather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
ASTM D 516
ASTM E329
ASTM E548
British Standards:
BS 812
Testing Aggregates
BS 1881
Submittals
3
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in
Paragraph 5.1.1.4 "Quelity Assurance to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience.
Include lists of
completed projects with project names and addresses.
names and addresses of engineers end owners. and any
other information required by t he Engineer.
4
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing
egency indicating and interpreting test results for
compliance of the foDowing w ith requirements indicated,
based on comprehensive testing of current materials:
5
Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers 1nd
Contractor certifying that each of the following it ems
complies w ith specified requirements:
i.
BS4027
Specification
for
Portland Cement
BS 5328
BS EN 932
Tests of Aggregates
Properties
BS EN 933
BS EN 1097
BS EN 1367
BS EN 1744
Tests of Aggregates
Properties
5-2
5.1 .1.3
for
CE CRD.C119
General
for Chemical
5.1.1 .4
Quality Assurance
Sultanate of Oman,
Sl~tllllld S~clricabom
2
Codes and Standards: Comply with the latest version
of ACI Manual of Concrete Practice Parts 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5, and
CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice" except where more
stringent requirements ere shown or spei:ified.
Concrete Quality Control Engineer: Appoint a fulltime Concrete Quality Control Engineer (CQCEJ to ensure
that concrete is properly produced, placed, cured and
protected. The CQCE shall be equivalent to a Member of
the Institute of Concrete Technology (MICTJ or as
approved by the Engineer end shall be responsible for the
maintenance and submission of all specified rei:ords. The
CQCE shall not report to the site construction
management but to the Contractor's management and to
the Engineer. The CQCE shall set standards of quality and
insist that these standards be followed, prepare a Quality
Control Program for the Inspection and testing of concrete
and the maintenance of all reports end rei:ords to meet the
specified requirements and requirements of the Engineer.
Depending on the quantity of concrete works in specific
project, the Special Specifications may waive this
requirement.
4
The Contractor shall operate a Quality Assurance
System in accordance with ANSI 09002. The Quality
Assurance Manager shall be responsible for the
preparation of a Quality Plan for approval of the
operations specified In this Section. The Quality Plan shall
include, among other things, the list end schedule of the
Quality Control audits that the Quality Assurance Manager
shall make.
5
Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm
experienced In manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products complying with ASTM C 94/C94M requirements
for production facilities and equipment.
6
Engage an independent testing agency acceptable to
the Engineer to perform material evaluation tests and
qualified according to ASTM C 10n and ASTM E 329 to
conduct the testing Indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548 and to design concrete mixes.
i.
7
Materials and installed work may require testing and
retesting at any time during progress of work, if instructed
by the Engineer. Tests, including retesting of rejected
materials for installed work, shall be done at the
Contractor's expense.
B
Sourca Limitations: Obtain each type or class of
cementitious material of the same brand from the same
manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source,
and each admixture from the same manufacturer.
9
Pre-installation Confarence: Conduct conference at
Pro]ei:t site to comply with requirements as follows:
5.1.2
Materials
5.1.2.1
Portland Cement
ii.
iii.
2
Sampling shall be carried out in accordance with BS
EN 196: Part 7.
3
Test cement for fineness by air permeability
apparatus in accordance with ASTM C 204 to meet the
requirements of ASTM C 150.
4
Test cement for soundness. Autoclave expansion in
accordance with ASTM C 151.
5.1.2.2
Silica Fume
~~
MinltrvofTrl>naportllo Communication
OCRLT
2
The approved supplier shall provide documentation
to establish the following:
l.
i i.
lili.
iv.
CaO
Fe203
Al203
Na20
K20
MgO
S03
v. Loss on ignition.
vi. Percentage of particles greater than 44 ~o~m .
vii. Specific surface area and method of test,
together with corresponding particle size.
3
Delivery of silica fume to the concrete batching plant
shall be in dry powder form, with a bulk density between
200 and 650 kg/cu m.
4
Manufacturer's test certification shall be supplied for
each delivery of silica fume and shall confirm that the
silica fume complies with the above requirements and
shall be submined by the Contractor no later than the day
of del Ivery of the silica fume.
5
The Engineer shall have the right to call for tests, the
cost of which are to be borne by the Contractor, on each
delivery of silica fume, if necessary to establish or confirm
that the silica fume meets the above requirements.
6.1.2.3
ii..
5.1.2.4
Aggregates
S-4
r-..
Fr.q, of
Teet DeicriptJon
Standard
Umlt
Initial
Los Angeles
Abrasion Loss
(Grading A or Bl
ASTM
c 131
25%
maximum
Initial
Ratio of Los
Angeles Abrasfon
Loss at 100 &500
Revolutions
(1001500
Revolutions Value)
1 per day
(mini
A~M
0. 25%
c 131
NoteS
maxlmum
ASTM
c 142
1.0%
maximum
1 per dey
ASTM
c 117
1.0%
maximum
1 per7
days
Water Abaorption
ASTM
c 127
2.0%
maximum
1 per3
days
Chlorides as Cl
BS 812
0.03%
max
1 per3
days
Sulfates u SO,
BS 812
1 Pill' 30
days
Magnesium
Sulfate Soundness
Loss (5 cycles)
ASTM
C88
12%
maximum
Flakiness Index
BS 812
25%
maximum
Elongation Index
BS 812
25%
maximum
Reactive Silica
ASTM
c 227
"h
1 per3
days
"
1 per3
days
Each
productio~
sample
0.3%mlllC
Par
Appendix
X1.3.7 of
ASTM C
33
ASTM
1 per7
days
Specific Gravity
1 per2
days
Molstura Content
BSEN
1097-5
Each
production
sample
Shell Content
BS812
C1~
Minimum
2.6
3%
maximum
3
Fine aggregate, shall pass a 5mm sieve and shall
consist of crushed gravel, crushed stone or natura I sand
with rounded or surrounded particles. washed as
necessary, and shall comply with the following:
Tnt Description
Standard
Umlt
ASTM C 142
Ul% maximum
Material Finer
than 75 Microns
ASTM C 117
maximum 3% for
natural sand and 5%
for crushed sand
with n~ plastic fines
Water
Absorption
ASTM C 128
1.0% maximum
Chlorides 11s Cl
BS 812
0.06% maximum
Sulfates as 50s
BS 812
0.30% maximum
Organic
lmJ)urities
ASTM C 40
Ughterthan
Standard
Sand Equivalent
AASHTOT176
75%minimum
BS 812
15% maximum
- Fiv8 Cycles of
Soundness in
Magnesium
Sulfate
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
X.
xi.
xii.
XIII .
xiv.
xv.
5
Quarry location.
Aggregate type.
Petrographic analysis report.
Grading curve.
Shape and surface teX1ure.
Flakiness index.
10 percent fines value.
Impact test.
Shell content.
Chloride and sulfate content.
Relative density.
Water absorption value and moisture content.
Silt, clay, and dust content.
Results of reactive silica tests.
Organic impurities (fine aggregate only).
Testing:
i.
ii.
6
Transportation: During transportation to the Site. all
aggregates shall be protected from wind-borne
contaminants. If these contaminants are present at time
of delivery, the aggregates shall be washed with water
meeting the requirement of Paragraph 5.1.2.6. Transport
vehicles shall be cleaned to remove possible
contamination due to previous use.
7
Storage: Aggregates shall be stored (under shadef on
hard concrete floors or other approved surface having
sufficient slope to ensure adequate drainage of aggregate
before being used for concrete. Each size and type shall be
stored in separate heaps without intermixing. Storage
shall prevent contamination of the aggregates by foreign
material including windblown dust. Fine and coarse
aggregates shall be separated by permanent substantial
partitions. Methods of storing, shading and cooling
aggregates shall be approved by the Engineer.
B
Plums used in cyclopean concrete shall consist of
non-reactive broken stone spells or boulders ranging in
size from 200mm to 300mm. They shall be free from sharp
or angular edges and shell not form more than 30 percent
of the total volume of concrete. They shall be evenly
graded and shall be soaked in water prior to incorporation
in the mix. Plums shall be evenly distributed in the
concrete mix with a minimum cover of 100mm.
5.1.2.6
Water
5.1.2.7
Admixtures
~~
3
The Contractor shall perform a trial batch and casting
to substantiate the manufacturer's claims of workability,
retardation as specified in Clause 5.1 .3 Admixtures shall
comp:y with the following standards: ASTM C494/C494 M,
BS EN 934 and BS EN 480. Also, admixture sh41ll comply
with BS EN 12878 for pigments of cement.
4
Air-Entraining Admixture: No air entraining agent
shall be used.
5.1.3
Concrete Mixes
5.1.3.1
Design Mixes
High-Range
Water-Reducing
ISuperplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type G.
5.1.3.2
Admixture
1.
7
Water-Reducing Admixture (Plasticizer): ASTM C 494,
Type A.
Testing Agency
5.1.3.3
Reports
Concrete Classes
Mlnlinum
Cement
Maximum
com preliM
cont.at
(kQiml)
CementltJoua
Wllhlf'-
days (MP.a)
Mirifmum
M1terfllla
!;YI!_nder I a,!~
/ MIXImum
RMfo
ltrength It 28
o.7_Q
15
15 / 18.5
~_50 !350
25
25 / 31
300/400
30
30/37.5
350/450
9
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C
494, TypeD.
35
35/43.5
425/ 475
40
40/50
425/sOo
10 Corrosion-lnhlbiting
Admixture:
Commercially
formulated, mixed cathodic end anodic Inhibitor based on
amines end a lcohol; capable of forming a protective
barrier and absorbed Ol"' the reinforcement surface of
concrete for protecting steel bars and minimizing chloride
reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.
45
45 / 56
450/500
0.42
50
50 / 62.5
450/500
0.40
60
60/75
450/500
0.38
Fiber Reinforcement
S-6 .
0.52
0.50
0.48
-
0~45
Sultonot" of Oman. Strtld1rd Spotdr..:a~ons lOt R0;1" & Br>Ciae Con.true1ia 2:'
f.
Silica fume
Ground granulated blast furnace slag (GGBFSJ
Pulverized fly ash (PFA]
ii.
iii.
SCM
01
Sijlcafume
02
GGBFS
03
PFA
~on
6.1.3.7
3
The actual amount will depend on the quality of the
supplementary cementing material and mix design
parameters.
Limit Values for Supplementary Cementing
i.
if.
iii.
iv.
Materials (SCM]
The upper limiting addition percentage values for
each supplementary cementing material shall be as Table
5.1.3 3.
Mu:.
SMA
SiliCa
fume ~
01
"
10
02
GGBFS
55
03
PFA
30
04
GGBFS
70
05
PFA
--1--45- -
Applicable condition
For aU exposures
For permanent dry [RH ~ 50%1
or
damp
[RH
:t
85%)
conditions
For
underground
damp
-~sures IRH it 85%]_
For
concrete
buried
in
permanently wBt conditions
;r
;:
-+-+-=1
10 H
aD
5.1.3.8
IEquation 1)
Slump Limits
iii.
2
The water-cementitious materials ratio shall be
continuously checked at the mixer with due allowance
made for water contained in the aggregates. Under no
circumstance shall water be added between the mixer and
the place of concrete placement. The Engineer may
require that the water-cementitious materials ratio be
checked during tests performed on fresh concrete samples
taken at the time of placement as specified in Paragraph
5.1.4.4.
i.
ii.
6.1.3.6
(Equation 2)
iv.
v.
Unreinforced concrete
0.60%
Concrete
made
with
sulfate
resisting
cement
0.15%
Concrete containing embedded metal (reinforced
concrete] made with ordinary Portland
cement
0.30%
Prestressed concrete
0.06%
Heat cured concrete containing embedded metal
{reinforced concrete]
0.10%
2
Sulfates: The total sulfate content of the concrete
from all sources, expressed es S03, when tested in
accordance with BS 1881, shall not exceed the lesser of 0.4
57 .
~~
ii.
5.1.3.12
5.8
Absorption Test
I.
6.1.3.15
Permeability Tests
In-situ construction:
Precast units:
2
Chloride permeability of the concrete shall be
determined using cores taken from the prototype samples,
in accordance with AASHTO T277 'Rapid Determination of
the Chloride Permeability of Concrete'. The following
limits shall not be exceeded:
In-situ construction:
1500 coulombs.
Precast units:
1000 coulombs.
3
The concrete will be deemed to comply with the
permeability requirements of this specification if all test
results comply with the limits indicated in Points 1 and 2.
5
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the concrete that
has failed to meet the permeability requirements of this
Specification is likely to cause durability problems, three
cores shall be cut from the area represented by fa'lad
samples for additional DIN 1048 and rapid chloride
permeability testing. The location of the cores shall be
decided by the Engineer.
6.1.3.16
Synthetic Fiber
Admixtures
5.1.4
Construction Requirements
5.1.4.1
Concrete Mixing
Job-Site Mixing
Ready-Mixed Concrete
~~
~~<::concrete and
ii.
iii.
iv.
1.
2
When air temperature is between 30 deg. C and 32
deg. C, delivery time from the time that water is added to
the mix until it is placed in its final position in the form
shall not exceed 90 minutes, When air temperature is
above 32 deg. C, delivery time shall not exceed 45 minutes.
Further time extension may be given if approved by the
Engineer.
3
Before discharging concrete at the point of delivery,
provide the Engineer w ith a delivery ticket for each batch
of concrete containing the following information as a
minimum:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x,
xlxii.
xlii.
xiv.
xv.
xvi.
5.1.4.4
Testing Laboratory:
i.
ii.
2
Testing Laboratory Qualifications: The testing
laboratory shall be approved by the Engineer and shall
have a Quality System in accordance with ANSI 09001.
5.1.4.5
materials
and
510
content
iv.
v.
4
Cementitious Materiels Content and Water/
Cementitious Materials Ratio: Samples of freshly mixed
concrete shall be chosen by the Engineer at least once per
month from each structural grade and determination
made of cement content end water/cement ratio In
accordance with BS 1881. If the cement content is less
then 90 percent of the requirement in Paragraph 5.1.3.4 or
the water/cement ratio is greater then 110 percent of the
requirement in Paragraphs 5.1.3.4 and 5.1.3.7 the
Contractor and the Engineer shell i nvestigete to establish
the ce use and the Engineer may reject the cast concrete
for the pour from which the samples were taken. The
Engineer may request an analysis or fresh concrete from
any pour. No analysis of freshly mixed concrete Is
required for blind'ng or plain concrete.
Salt Content: The total concentration of sulfates and
5
chlorides in fresh concrete shall be measured at least o nee
a week for all structural grades of concrete. Tests shall be
in accordance with BS 1881. Concentrations of each ion
shall not exceed the limits specified in Paragraph 5.1 .3.9. If
these limits are exceeded, the concrete pour from which
the samples were taken shall be rejected and further tests
performed on the cast concrete in accordance with
paragraph 5.1 .4. 6 to determine the total extent of the
problem.
6
Slump; Slump tests shalt be performed in accordance
with ASTM C 143. A minimum of one test shall be done at
the point of discharge for each dey's pour for each type of
concrete.
Additional tests shell be performed when
concrete consistency appears to have changed.
5.1.4.6
5-11
~
./'../
Minitrv ot
Trt~nAport.,. ~n~unic:atlons
OGRll
5
Concrete of the same class requiring the same
felsework but with a different class of surface finish !Ire
each measured separately.
6
Voids. openings or gaps 0.05 cubic meters or more
shall be deducted from the volume of concrete In which
they occur.
7
All service ducts, irrespective of diameter, shall be
measured and deducted from the volume of concrete in
which they are Jocated.
5.1.5.2
6
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope,
or other nondestructive devlce may be used but shall not
be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection of
c~t concrete.
5.1.6
5.1.5
Method of Measurement
5.1-5-1
Measured Item ~
Basis of Payment
2
Concrete works shall include mass. reinforced and
prestressed concrete of both in-situ and precast
construction of a general nature, but shall not include
specific components of highway structures, such as
concrete pavement, concrete piles, concrete parapets and
safety barriers. precast concrete curbs and tiles etc., which
are sel)arately prescribed for measurement and payment
In other Sections.
4
Concrete formed by different types of form a ndlor
falsework are each measured separately.
512
supporting
and
stabiliZing
Curing of concrete.
Tooling, if requi red, to achieve the specified
surface finish.
,_,_or_Rcwt
__&_ B_rid..;.c_e_Co_nc
_ lr_
uc_llor
_ _-...,
erection
BS4483
of
5.1.7
BS 4449
CRSI
5.2.1.2
2
Welding Certificates: Copies
welding procedures and personnel.
3
Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers and
Contractor certifying that the following items comply with
specified requirements:
5.2
Reinforcing Steel
5.2.1
Description
5.2.1.1
References
cu.m.
i.
of certificates
for
Steel
reinforcement
end
reinforcement
accessories: a copy of the manufacturer's test
certificate for ultimate strength, elongation and
cold bending, together with the chemical
analysis of the steel shall be submitted to the
Engineer for each consignment of reinforcing
steel delivered to the Site.
Practice
for
Detailing
Standard
Reinforced Concrete Structures
Building
Code
Requirements
Reinforced Concrete
for
ASTM A 82
ASTM A 185
ASTMA496
ASTMA497
ASTMA615M
ASTM A 706M
ASTM A 780
5.2.1.3
Quality Assurance
5.2.2
Materials
5.2.2.1
Steel Reinforcement
1
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa)
specified yield strength, or BS 4449 grade 460 Type 2
deformed, uncoated.
One test per 5000 m length
delivered to site.
2
Higher strength reinforcement bars may be used
subject to approval of the Engineer.
3
Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706M,
deformed.
4
6
Deformed Steel Wire: ASTM A 496 and Steel welded
wire reinforcement to ASTM A 497.
!5-13
~~
OGRLT
Galvanized steel
she ~
not be used
ti.
5.2.2.2
I.
ii.
3
Mechanical splices (couplers) of deformed high yield
steel bars are to consist of two seamless steel sleeves and
interconnecting high tensile steel stud w ith plastic
protection caps for threaded section of sleeve and shall
be tested to exceed 135% of the specified yield strength of
grade 60 bar (or higher if higher strength bars are used).
5-14
5.2.2.3
Fabricating Reinforcement
5.2.3
Construction Requirements
5.2.3.1
General
Accurately
position,
support,
and
secure
reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support
reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum
concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
2
Shop- or field-weld reinforcement according to AWS
01 .4, where indicated.
3
Set wl re ties with ends directed into concrete, not
toward exposed concrete surfaces.
4
Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable
lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap
edges end ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh
spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with
wire
5
Avoid cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier
and waterproofing membtanes during reinforcement
placement and concreting operations. Repair damages
before placing concrete.
6.2.3.2
1.
2
Reinforcement shall be stored 1m above ground on
platforms, skids or other approved supports and suitably
spaced. Contact with the soil shall be avoided. Proper
drainage and protection from the elements shall be
provided to minimize corrosion.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale,
3
earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond
with concrete.
SultanAte of Oman, Stondord Spear-om fiX Rood I' Bridg Conotructoon 2010
5.2.3.3
Placing
5.2.3.4
Concrete Cover
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
2
Cover to reinforcement shall be checked before any
concrete is cast. The bending of reinforcement at a cold
joint is not permitted. Concrete cover shall be checked
with a cover meter as soon as formwork is removed.
5.2.4
Method of Measurement
JE
E
i5
5
..
1,
0.154
0.222
6
7
h!
f.~
}j 1~
J
c
18
20
fj
2.000
2:470
38
7. 130
7.990
34
0.302
0.395 .. .
22
2.980
38
8.900
24
3.550
40
9.870
10
0.617
26
4.170
12
14
o:eaa
28
30
4.830
45
50
15.400
16
'i21o
1.580
32
I
I
5.550
'
12.500
--'
6.310
5.2.5
Basis of Payment
5-15 .
~~
5.2.6
t.
l1
t.
i1i
t.
ASTM C 171
Standard Specification
for Sheet
Materials for Curing Concrete lAASHTO
M 1711
ASTM C219
Standard Terminology
Hydraulic Cement
ASTM C309
Relating
to
5.3
ASTM C881
5.3.1
Description
ASTM C920
5.3.1.1
Definitions
ASTM C 1315
ASTM C 10S9
ASTM 0448
ASTM 0 1751
ASTM 01752
ASTM 0994
ASTM 04397
ASTM E 154
ASTM E 1745
5.3.1.2
References
Highway
and
ACI11 7
ACI 304
Guide
for
Measuring,
Mixing,
Transporting. and Placing Concrete
ACI305
ACI309
ACI347
ACI504R
ASTM C 33
ASTM C 109/C109M
Test Method for Compressive
Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
(Using 2-ln. or 50 mm Cube Specimens
ASTMC 150
$16
Standard Specification
Cement
for
Portland
CE CRDC300
Curing Compound
CE CRD-C513
Rubber Waterstops
CE CAD-C572
PVC Waterstops
6.3.1.3
Submittals
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
Waterstops.
Curing materials.
Bonding agents.
Adhesives.
Vapor retarders.
Epoxy joint filler.
Joint-filler strips.
Repair materials.
Color finishes.
Reglets.
Waterstops, reinjectable hosing, water swelling
gaskets.
iv. Vapor retarder/barrier.
v. Form liners.
vi. Joint fillers.
vii. Sealants.
5.3.1.4
Quality Assurance
AASHTO
LRFD
Bridge
Construction
Specifications.
ACI Manual of Concrete Practice Parts 1, 2, 3, 4 &
5.
Iii.
2
Concrete Quality Control Engineer: Appoint a full
time Concrete Quality Control Engineer (CQCEI as
specified In Paragraph 5.1. 1.4
i.
3
Implement a Quality Assurance System as specified
in Paragraph 5.1.1.4.
4
Mockups: Before casting concrete that Is exposed to
view in the completed structure, cast a mockup for each
exposed element to demonstrate typical joints, surface
finish, texture, color, tolerances, quality of materials and
standard of workmanship in the completed work. Where
specified or directed by the Engineer, the mock up shall be
a trial construction representative of the actual structure
(pier, cross-head. part of deck) in dimensions and all
details including reinforcement, using the Contractor's
proposed construction technique, concrete mix, formwork,
cutting and placing of reinforcement, etc.
i.
5.3.2
Materials
5.3.2.1
Form Materials
5-17
~
/",./
ii.
5.3.2.2
2
Forms for U11exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood,
lumber, metal, or another acceptable material. Provide
lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for
t<ght fit.
3
forms for Textured Finish Concrete: Units of face
design, size, arrangement, and configuration to match the
Engineer's control sample. Provide solid backing and
form supports to ensure stability of textured form liners.
4
Forms for Cylindrical Columns and Supports: Metal,
glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, or paper or fiber tubes that
will produce smooth surfaces without joint lndicetlons.
Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist wet
concrete loads without deformation.
ii.
6
Carton Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated
for moisture-resistance, structurally sufficient to support
weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loeds.
i.
8
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length,
removable or snapoff metal form t ies designed to prevent
form deflection and to prevent spelling of concrete upon
removal. Provide units that leave no embedded metal
closer than 38 mm to the surface of the exposed concrete.
No permanent metallic part shall have less concrete cover
than the reinforcement. Provide lies that, when removed,
will not leave holes larger than 25 mm In diameter in the
concrete surface. Provlde ties with integral water-barrier
plates for walls indicated to receive damp-proofing or
waterproofing.
9
Void Forms : Biodegradable paper surface, treated for
moisture resistance structural sufficient to support weight
of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
10 Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips of
the size indicated on the Drawings.
5-18
2
Self-Expanding
Strip Waterstops:
Proprietary
rectangular or trapezoidal strip, sodium bentonite or other
hydrophylic material for adhesive bonding to concrete.
5
Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plestic or
formed steel, stiffened to support weight of placed
concrete without deformation.
7
Form Release Agent: Proprietary form release agent
with a maximum of 350 gJI. volatile organic compounds
(VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect
concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
Waterstops
5.3.2.3
3
Vapor retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class B, five-pry,
nylon
or
polyester-cord-reinforced,
high-density
polyethylene sheet; 0.25 mm thick.
4
Vapor retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, three-ply,
nylon
or
polyester-cord-reinforced,
high-density
polyethylene sheet: laminated to a nonwoven geotextile
fabric, 0.76 mm t hick.
5
Vapor reterder: 2.8 mm thick, semt-flexib'e, seven .ply
sheet membrane consisting of reinforced core end carrier
sheet
with
fortified
asphalt
layers,
protective
weathercoating, and removable plastic releese l iner.
------------~~------
li.
iii.
6
Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or
kenaf weighing approximately 0.29 kg/sq.m and
complying with AASHTO M182. Class 2.
Moisture Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171. polyethy~ene
7
sheet, polyethylene coated burlap or Kraft paper.
5.3.2.4
Curing Compounds
7
Reglets: Fabricated from not less than 0.55 mm thick
galvanized steel sheet. Temper arily fill or cover face
opening of regie! to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
8
Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet,
not less than 0.85 mm thick, with bent tab anchors.
Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent
intrusion of concrete or debris.
5.3.2.6
Repair Materials
i.
2
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular
film forming, manufactured for application to fresh
concrete
ii.
curing
iii.
4
Clear, waterborne,
membrane-forming
compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
curing
iv.
5
Clear, solvent-borne, membrane-forming curing and
sealing compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A .
5.3.2.5
Concrete Accessories
2
Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based,
polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 6 mm.
i.
ii.
3
Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated
cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding
cork.
iii.
4
Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semi-rigid, 100
percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A hardness of 80
per ASTM 0 2240.
iv.
2
Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self
expanding cork.
5
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
ii.
iii.
5.3.3
Construction Requirement&
5.3.3.1
Formwork
i.
Class A, 4 mm.
5 19
"-..//"'..,/
DGIIlT
il
Class B, 6 mm.
Iii.
Class C, 10 mm.
iv.
Class 0 , 25 mm.
4
Construct forms rigid and t ight enough to prevent
loss of concrete mortar.
5
Fabricate forms for easy removal w ithout hammering
ot prising against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or
wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast
concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for Inclined surfaces
steeper than 1.5 horlzonta I to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts
for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for
easy removal.
i.
6
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed
strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes
in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to
support screed strips; use strike-off templates or
compacting-type screeds.
3
The Contractor shall compute falsework settlement
and deflection for bridges so that when the final
settlement Is complete, the structure will conform to the
required camber, section and grade es shown on the
Drawings.
4
The Contractor shall provide means for accurately
measuring settlement In falsework during placement of
concrete, and shall provide a competent observer to
observe and correct the settlement.
6.3.3.2
Falsework
520
6
Props and towers supporting forms or partially
completed structures shall be interconnected in plan
orthogonally at levels to be determined in the design.
They shall also be interconnected by diagonal bracings in
orthogonal vertical planes.
7
If the concrete is required to be post-tensioned in the
field, the fatsework shall be designed to support any
increased or readjusted loads caused by the prestressing
forces.
5.3.3.3
Embedded Items
5.3.3.4
ii.
iii.
3
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in
the work.
Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherw'se
damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for
exposed surfaces. Apply new form release agent.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and
laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure
joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for
exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by the
Engineer.
5.3.3.5
Vapor Retarders
i.
Place and compact a 15 mm thick layer of finegraded granular material over granular fill.
4
Place vapor retarder/barrier sheeting in position with
longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.
Lap joints 150 mm and seal with manufacturer's
recommended mastic or pressure-sensitive tape. Cover
vapor retarder/barrier with sand cushion and compact to
depth indicated.
5.3.3.6
Construction Joints
5.3.3.7
5-21
~
~ M~nJtrv or Trnnapan &
Cotnmunicat.one
~ OGRlT
2
Expansion and contraction joints shall be constructed
at the locations and in accordance with the details
specified In the contract documents. Such joints include
open joints, filled joints, joints sealed with sealants or
waterstops, and joints with combinations of these features.
3
Contraction Joints in Stabs-on-Grade: Form
weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete
i nto areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a
depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as
follows:
i.
ii.
iii.
i.
6
Pourable sealants for placement along top edges of
contraction or filled expansion joints shall be one of the
following:
i.
5-22
iii.
6.3.3.8
Concrete Placement
1
General: Comply with AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Construction Specifications Sub-sections 8,6 and 8 ,7 as
complemented herein for protection from environmental
conditions during placing and curing and for handling and
placement of concrete.
2
Concrete shall be handled, placed, and consolidated
by methods that will not cause segregation of the mix and
will result in a dense homogeneous concrete that is free of
voids and rock pockets. The methods used shall not cause
displacement of reinforcing steel or other materials to be
embedded In the concrete. Concrete shall be placed and
consolidated prior to initial set and in no case more than
1.5 hours after the water was added to the mix. Concrete
shall not be re-tempered.
3
Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and
complete formwork installation. reinforcing steel, and
items to be embedded or cast in. Notil'y other trades to
permit installation of their work. Concrete shall not be
placed until the condition of the reinforcement, other
embedded items, and the formwork has been inspected
and approved by the Engineer. All mortar from previous
placements. debris, and foreign materia l shall be removed
from the forms and steel prior to commencing placement.
The forms and subgrade shall be thoroughly moistened
with water immediately before concrete is placed against
them. Temporary form spreader devices may be left in
place until concrete placement precludes their need, after
which tney shall be removed.
4
Transportation: Concrete, after be'ng discharged
from the mixer, shall be transported as rapidly as possible
to its final position in the Work by agitator trucks, which
shall prevent adulteration. segregation, loss of workability
or contamination of the ingredients. The containers that
convey the concrete shall be kept clean and free from
hardened or partially hardened concrete.
ii.
6
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at
Project site, or during placement, unless approved by the
Engineer.
7
Placement of concrete for each section of the
structure shall be done continuously without interruption
between planned construction or expansion joints. The
delivery rate, placing sequence, and methods shall be
such that fresh concrete is always placed and consolidated
against previously placed concrete before initial set has
occurred in the previously placed concrete.
8
During and after placement of concrete. care shall be
taken not to damage the concrete or break the bond with
reinforcing steel. Workers shall not walk in fresh concrete
Platforms for workers and equipment shall not be
supported directly on any reinforcing steel. Once the
concrete is set, forces shall not be applied to the forms or
to reinforcing bars which project from the concrete until
the concrete is of sufficient strength to resist damage.
I.
ii.
iii.
9
Sequence of Placement: Whenever a concrete
placement plan or schedule is specified or approved, the
sequence of placement shall conform to the plan.
15
i.
ii.
Equipment:
i.
~23
~~
DGRL1
ii.
Iii.
16
vii.
viii.
17
Underwater Concreting:
j,
ii.
iii.
Consolidation:
l.
li.
t ii.
~v.
lv.
v.
v.
vi.
6.3.3.10
vi.
s.:u
Hot-Weather Concreting
Sultonete of Orner
2
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete
temperature at time of placement to below 25 deg C.
Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used
to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is
calculated to total amount of mixing water.
3
Concrete temperature shall not exceed 32 degree C
and the temperature differential shall not exceed 25
degree C.
4
No concreting operation shall be carried out at
ambient temperature of 40 deg. Cor more.
5
For bridge decks that are located over or adjacent to
salt water the maximum temperature of the concrete at
time of placement shall be 27 deg. C.
6
Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it
becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed
the ambient air temperature immediately before
embedding in concrete.
7
Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just
before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform
without puddles or dry areas.
B
Use water-reducing retarding admixture when
required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other
adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to the Engineer.
Shade mixing plant and trucks, aggregates, water
9
tank, and cement silo.
10 Paint the mixing plant, trucks, water tank, and
cement silo with white or reflective paint
11
ii.
i'i.
iv.
Curing Concrete
Methods:
i.
ii.
5-25
~
~
Ccunrnuntcnt~on. OGRlT
~
~<::concrete and Concrete Structures
iii.
iv.
v.
Formed Finishes
2
Class F2. Formwor1c: shall be lined with a material
approved by the Englneer to provide a smooth finish of
uniform appearance. This material shall leave no stain on
the concrete and shall be so joined and fixed to its backing
so that it imparts no blemishes. It sh11ll be of the same
type and obtained from only one source for any one
structure.
The Contractor shall make good any
imperfections in the finish as directed by the Engineer.
Internal t ies and embedded metal parts will not be
permitted unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Class F3. I rregularities in the finish shall be no
greater than those resulting from the use of wrought thick
square edged boards arranged in a uniform pattern. The
finish is intended to be left as struck. Imperfections such
$2.6
5
Permanently exposed concrete surfaces to classes F1,
F2 and F3 finish shall be protected from rust marks and
stains of aU kinds. Internal ties and embedded metal parts
will not be permitted.
5.3.3.14
Tolerances
In-Situ Construction
i.
Lenathlmml
Tolerancalmml
Up to 3000
:1:3
3001-4500
:1:6
il.
4
Class F4. No special requirements. To be used ln the
earth-face or below ground structures if no waterproofing
membrane will be applied.
6
Bri dge Decks; The top surfaces of bridge decks shall
be cured by a combination of the liquid membrane curing
compound method and the water method. The liquid
membrane shall be Type 2, white pigmented, and shall be
applied from finishing bridges progressively and
immediately after finishing operations are complete on
each portion of the deck. The water cure shall be applied
not later than 4 h alter completion of deck finishing or, for
portions of the decks on which finishing is completed.
5.3.3.13
:1:6
501 -750
:1: 10
Tolerance lmml
Up to 500
1mm
Precast Construction
i.
Langth (mml
Toleranca(mml
Up to 3000
:1:5
ii,
Tolerance lmml
Up to 500
:1:6
501-750
:1:9
3mm
3
Squareness: For insitu and precast construction the
tolerance between the short side and tl\e long side shall
be within the following limits:
Member Size (mm)
Tolerance (mm)
Up to 3000
:1:3
:1:6
4
Straightness: For in-situ and precast construction the
straightness or bow, defined as deviation from the
intended line, shall be within the following tolerances:
Member Length lmm)
Tolerances lmm)
Up~~oo
~3
~6
5
Alignment: The alignment of members shall be
within the following tolerances:
Columns and piers.
Others.
1:600 of length
6
Flatness: The flatness of a surface, measured with a
straight edge of 1.5 meter, shall be not greater than 6 mm
at any point.
7
Twist: Twist, measured as the deviations of any
corner from the plane containing the other three corners,
shall be within the following limits:
Member Length lmm)
Toletancelmm)
Up to 6000
Above6000
12
5.3.4
5.4
5.4.1
Description
5.4.1.1
Scope
5.4.1.2
3
Pretensioning: The process when the prestressing
steel is tensioned against independent anchorages before
the concrete is placed round it. The prestressing strand or
tendons are stressed prior to casting the concrete. After
the concrete has attained the required strength, the
prestressing force is released from the external
anchorages and transferred, by bond, Into the concrete.
4
Combined Method: Part of the reinforcement is
pretensioned and part post-tensioned.
5
Cable end Tendon: Cable and tendon both refer to a
bundle of prestressing steel of the same type and size
bundled together to be contained within a duct and
stressed, individually or collectively, from the same
anchorage.
6
Prestressing System: A proprietary system of
applying prestress and includes anchorages, couplers and
jacks but does not necessarily include prestressing steel
and cable ducts.
5.4.1.3
References
2
PostTensioning: The process when the prestressing
steel is tensioned after the concrete has hardened. The
tendons are installed in voids or ducts within the concrete
and are stressed and anchored against the concrete after
the development of the required concrete strength. As a
final operation under this method, the voids or ducts are
pressure-grouted.
and
AASHTO 2008
AASHT02008
AASHTO
LRFD
Bridge
Design
specifications, 3rd Edition, 2004, 2008
Interim Revisions.
AASHTO 1999
ASTM C940
ASTM C1202
Definitions
Highway
British Standards:
BS4447
S-27
~~
BS EN 5896
5.4.1.4
iv.
v.
Submittals
Design:
i.
i~
ii.
ilL
S28
Prestressing steel
ii.
Prestressing system.
iii.
5.4.2
Materials
6.4.2.1
Concrete
5.4.2.2
Reinforcing Steel
5.4.2.3
Prestressing Steel
5.4,2,4
3
All anchorages and couplers shall develop at least 96
percent of the actual ultimate strength of the prestressing
steel, when tested in an unbonded state, without
exceeding anticipated set
4
The coupling of tendons sha~ l not reduce the
elongation at rupture below the requirements of the
tendon itself. Couplers and/or coupler components shell
be enclosed in housings long enough to permit the
necessary movements. Couplers for tendons shall be used
only at locations specifically indicated in the contract
documents and/or approved by the Engineer. Couplers
shall not be used at points of sharp tendon curvature
5
If the Engineer Is not satisfied with the testing
certificates submitted for the prestressing system, he may
request post-tensioning anchorages and couplers to be
tested in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Construction Specifications Article 10.3.2 at no extra cost.
5.4.2.5
5.4.3
Construction Requirements
5.4.3.1
Placement of Ducts
2
Polyethylene duct and metal duct for longitudinal or
transverse post-tensioning in the flanges shall be
supported at Intervals not to exceed 600 mm. Polyethylene
duct in webs for longitudinal post-tensioning shall be tied
to stirrups at intervals not to exceed 600 mm, and metal
duct for longitudinal posttensioning in webs shall be tied
to stirrups at intervals not to exceed 1200 mm.
3
Joints between sections of duct shall be coupled with
positive connections which do not result in engle changes
at the joints and will prevent the intrusion of cement paste.
Joints in adjacent ducts shell be staggered by at least 300
mm.
4
After placing of ducts, and reinforcement and
forming is complete, an inspection shall be made to locate
possible duct damage. All unintentional holes or openings
in the duct shall be repaired prior to concrete placing.
5
Grout openings and vents shall be securely anchored
to the duct and to either the forms or to reinforcing steel
to prevent displacement during concrete-placing
operations.
6
After installation in the forms, the ends of ducts shall
at all times be sealed as necessary to prevent the entry of
water or debris.
7
Where members are made up of precast units
stressed together, the ducts in the joints between the units
shall be in perfect alignment and joined securely so as to
allow unimpeded cable threading and pulling and prevent
the ingress of the epoxy mortar used for gluing the several
units together before stressing. Details of such joints shall
first be approved by the Engineer. The tolerance in the
location of the sheath shall be plus or minus 3 mm.
8
~
~
~ OGRLT
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
6.4.3.2
1
9
Ducts shall be kept free of any maner detrimental to
the bond between the sheath and the grout and. except for
material sealing a sheath joint, between the sheath and
the concrete
10 All ducts for continuous structures shall be supplied
with outlets at the high and low points of the duct profile,
except where the profile changes are small, as ln
continuous slabs, and at additional locations as specified
in lhe contract documents. Low-point outlets shall remain
open until grouting is started.
11 Upon completion of concrete placement, the
Contractor shall prove that the post-t ensioning ducts are
free and clear of any obstructions or damage and are able
to accept the intended post-tensioning tendons by passing
a torpedo through the ducts. The torpedo shall have the
same cross-sectional shape as the duct. and 6 mm smaller
a1J around than the clear nominal inside dimensions of the
duct. No deductions shall be made to the torpedo section
dimensions for tolerances aDowed in the manufacture or
fixing of the ducts. For straight ducts. a torpedo at least
600 mm long shall be used. For curved ducts, the length
shall be determined so that when both ends touch the
outermost wall of the duct. the torpedo is 6 mm clear of
the innermost wall. If tile torpedo will not travel
completely through the duct, the Engineer shal I reject the
member, unless a workable repair can be made to clear
the duct. to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Upon
completion of the repairs, the torpedo shall pass through
the duct easily, by hand, without resorting to excessive
effort or mechanical assistance.
12 Before stressing and grouting internal or external
tendons, l nstal.l all grout caps. inlets and outlets and test
the tendon with compressed air to determine if duct
connections require repair. In the presence of the Engineer,
530
General:
L
ii.
iii.
lv.
ii.
iv.
v.
i~ .
vi.
iv.
ii.
v.
fi.
iii.
5.4.3.3
Placement of Anchorages
5.4.3.4
ii.
Cross-sectional area,
iii.
iv.
Elongation at rupture,
v.
vi.
!5-31
~
~
../".~<:concrete and
Cornm~nic.,tiooe
OGRL T
Concrete Structures
4
The Contractor shall furnish to the Englneer for
verification testing samples sele<:ted at random from each
lot as follows. The actual strength of the prestressing steel
shall not be less than specified by the applicable ASTM
Standard stated in Paragraph 5.4.2.3.
i.
i~
Corrosion Inhibitor:
I.
ii.
iii.
Anchorages:
I.
li.
6
For prestressing systems previously tested and
approved on projects having the same tendon
configurstion. the Engineer may waive t he anchorage
testing.
6.4.3.6
7
Epoxy Bonding Agel'lls: Epoxy bonding agents shall
be tested for and satisfy t he requirements of all the tests
listed i n the recommendations of FIP "Proposal for a
standard for acceptance tests and verification of epoxy
bonding agents for segmental construction".
5.4.3.5
ti-32
Metal Ducts:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Duct s
Plastic Ducts:
I.
ii.
Duct Diameter
Duct Thickness
in millimeters
in millimeters
any size
2.0
Round
23
2.0
Round
60
2.0
Round
75
2.5
Round
85
2.5
Round
100
3.0
Round
115
3.5
Round
130
4.0
Round
145
4.0
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
4
Duct Area: The provisions of AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications, Article 5.4.6.2, 'Size of Ducts,' shall
apply.
5
Duct Fittings:
i.
or
metal
polyolefin
(polyethylene
polypropylene), and shall be air and watertight
and of sufficient strength to prevent distortion
or displacement of the ducts during concrete
placement and/or tendon grouting.
ii.
iii.
5.4.3.7
Grout
5-33
~~
M nlatrv
or Trnnaport S.
Communieationa DGRtT
i.
H.
iii.
8
Manufacturers of pre-bagged post-tensioning grout
shal l submit for approval certified test reports from an
audited and Independent Cement Concrete Research
Laboratory (CCRLI which shows the material meets all the
requirements specified herein.
m.
iv.
v.
vl.
vii.
vlil
9
Preapproved pre-bagged grout shall be milCed in
accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.
5.4.3.8
Tensioning
Prestressing Equipment:
i.
il
53-4
5
Sequence of Stressing: When the sequence of
stressing lndlvldual tendons is not ot herwise specified in
the contract documents or on the approved working
drawings, the stressing of post-tensioning tendons and
the release of pretensioned tendons shall be done in a
sequence that produces 1 minimum of eccentric force in
the member.
Measurement of Stress:
i.
it
iil
6.4.3.9
the length of the casting bed and the size and number of
tendons In the group to be tensioned.
5
1
The strand stress prior to seating (jacking stress)
shall not exceed 60 percent of the minimum ultimate
tensile strength of the prestressing steel. This allowable
stress, which slightly exceeds the values allowed in
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Article 5.9.3,
may be permitted to offset seating I asses and to
accommodate compensation for temperature differences
specified below.
2
In pretensioned members where tendons are
specified as debonded from the concrete, they shall be
covered with sleeves of PVC or other material approved by
the Engineer. The ends of the sleeves shall be taped to
the tendon to prevent the ingress of grout.
3
Stressing shall be accomplished by either single
strand stressing or multiple-strand stressing. The amount
of stress to be given to each strand shall be as shown in
the contract documents or on the approved working
drawings.
All strands to be stressed in a group (multiple-strand
4
stressing! shall be brought to a uniform initial tension
prior to being given their full pretensioning. The amount
of the Initial tensioning force shall be within the range
specified in Article 5.4.3.8 (61 Measurement of Stress, and
shall be the minimum required to eliminate all sleek and to
equalize the stresses in the tendons as determined by the
Engineer. The amount of this force will be Influenced by
ii.
iii.
6
When ordered by the Engineer, prestressing steel
strands in pretensioned members, if tensioned
ind'vidually, shall be checked by the Contractor for loss of
prestress not more than 3 hours prior to placing concrete
for the members. The method and equipment for checking
the loss of prestress shall be subject to approval by the
Engineer. All strands that show a loss of prestress In
excess of three percent shall be retensioned to the original
computed jacking stress.
7
Stress on all strands shall be maintained between
anchorages until the concrete has reached the
compressive strength required at time of transfer of stress
to concrete.
~~
OGRt. T
5.4.3. 10
2
I mmediately before tensioning, t he Contractor shall
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that all
t endons are free to move between jacking points and that
members are free to accommodate the horizontal and
vertical movements due to the application of prestress.
3
Unless otherwise specified, concrete shall not be
stressed until it has reached the age at which at least 2 test
specimens taken from It attain the specified transfer
strength, The test specimens shall be cured in similar
conditions to t he concrete to which they relate. The
Contractor shall cast sufficient specimens to demonstrat e
that the required strength of the concrete at transfer has
been reached.
4
Where members consist of jointed elements the
strength at transfer of the jointing material shall be at least
equivalent to the specified transfer strengt h of the
member.
Tension Procedures:
i.
ii.
iii.
536
v.
vi.
viL
viii.
lx,
x.
xi.
iv.
I.
ll.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii .
Date stressed.
he.
X.
xl.
Gage pressures.
xii.
xiii.
xiv.
XV,
Stressing
mode
ends/simultaneous),
(one
endi\wo
Brlcl~e Comlluc:.ar
xvi.
viii.
Direction of grouting;
x.
xi.
xii.
ix.
Preparation of Ducts:
i.
ii.
iii.
2
Ducts shall be grouted as soon as practicable after
the tendons have been stressed and the Engineer's
permission to commence has been obtained. The ducts
shall be completely filled with grout. Grout shall ba
inJected in one continuous operation and allowed to flow
from the vents until the consistency is equivalent to that
being injected or more than 11 seconds.
iv.
v.
6.4.3.11
Grouting
3
Grout shall not be above 32 deg. C during mixing or
pumping. If necessary, cool the mixing water.
4
A grouting operation plan shall be submitted for
approval at least 45 days in advance of any scheduled
grouting operations. Written approval of the grouting
operation plan by the Engineer shall be required before
any grouting of the permanent tendons in the structure
takes place. At a minimum, the following items shall be
provided in the grouting operation plan:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
Equipment:
i.
The grouting equipment shall include a highspeed shear mixer capable of continuous
mechanical mixing which will produce a grout
free of lumps and undispersed cement, a grout
pump, and stand-by flushing equipment with
water supply. The equipment shall be able to
pump the mixed grout in 11 manner which will
comply with all requirements.
ii.
Mixing of Grout:
i.
ii.
537
~../"..../
iv.
Injection of Grout:
All grout vents shall be opened before grouting
starts. Injection and ejection vents with
positive shut-offs shall be provided. Grout shall
be a llowed to flow from the first injection vent
until any residual flushing water or entrapped
air has been removed prior to closing that vent.
Remaining vents shall be closed In sequence in
the same manner. A continuous flow of grout
at a rate between 10 000 mm and 15 000 mm
of duct pe r minute shall be maintained.
i.
i:i.
Iii
iv.
~8
TNt Value
Max. 0.08%by
weight of
camentitlous
material
Max. Size :s No.
50 Sieve
P.roperty
0.0% to+0.2% at
24 h and 28 days
:s2.0% for up to 3
h
Expansion
Compressive
Strength
28 day (average
of3cubes)
Initial Set of
Grout
Flullity Test**
Efflux Time
from Flow
Cone
al lmmediaUI!y
after Mixing
b) 30 min after
Mixing with
Remixing
fo r 30 s
Bleeding at 3 h
Permeability at
28 days
Table 5.4.3.1
26ks1
Min.3h
Max. 12 h
TNt Method
ASTM
C1152/C1152M
ASTMC33
ASTM C 1090*
ASTM C940
ASTM C942
ASTM C !l53
I
Min 11 s
Max. 30sor
Mln, 9 s
Max. 20s
Max. 30 s or
Max. 30s
ASTM C939
ASTMC
939***
ASTM C939
ASTMC
939***
Max. D. D%
940****
ASTMC
Max. 2500
AASHTOT277
(ASTM C 1202)
coUlombs at 30
volts for 6 h
Grout Propenies for
Volume Change at 28 Days
Table5.4.3-1 Notes
Modify ASTM C 1090 to include verification at both
24 h and 28 days.
**Adjustments to flow rates will be achieved by strict
compliance
With
the
manufacturer's
recommendations.
***Grout fluidity shall meet either the standard ASTM
C 939 flow cone test or the modified test described
harein. Modify the ASTM C 939 test by filling the cone
to the top instead of to the standard level. The efflux
time is the time to fill a 1.0 liter container placed
directly unde r the flow cone.
****Modify ASTM C 940 to conform with the wick
induced bleed test described below:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
9
Vertical Grouting: In lieu of a positive shut-off,
vertical or near vertical tendon ducts for grouting shall
terminate in reservoirs at the upper-most point. The
reservoir shall have sufficient capacity to store excess
grout bleed water. Visible grout level shall be maintained
in the reservoirs. The reservoirs shall be maintained until
the grout has set. Grout shall be injected at a rate of 5000
mm of duct per minute.
iii.
iv.
v.
Finishing:
i.
ii.
iii.
5.4.4
Method of Measurement
~~
2
Non-prestressed ~elnforcing steel shall be measured
under the provisions of Section 5.2 .
3
Prestressing steel shall be measured by the weight in
metric tonnes for each size and quality of wire, strands or
bar furnished, installed. completed and accepted. The
weight shall be calculated based on the nominal mass of
each diameter wire, str4nd or bar as stated in the
standards listed in Paragraph 5.4 21.3.
6
Items not measured: Measurement of prestressed
concrete is restricted to the items stated in items 1, 2 and 3
above. No separate measurement i5 made for any other
component or work.
i.
II.
iii.
v.
5.4.6
4
In post-tensioning work, the prestressing steel shalf
be measured In t based on the actual length between the
outermost surfaces of the anchorages except where
couplers are used in which case, the prestressing steel
shall be assumed to be continuous, without any flares,
through the coupler.
5
In pre-tension work, the prestressing steel shall be
measured in t based on the actut l length between the
outermost faces of the member.
iv.
t.
ii
Prestressing strands
[state size and type)
l.
iii
Prestressing bars
[state sit e and type)
l.
5.5
5.5.1
Description
5.5.1.1
Scope
5.5.1.2
References
Highway
and
iv.
AASHTO 2008
v.
AASHT02008
AASHTO
LRFD
Bridge
Design
specifications, 3rd Edit ion, 2004, 2008
Interim Revisions.
AASHTO 1999
vi.
vii.
5.4.5
shall
not
be
Basis of Payment
i.
FIP
5.5.2
Materials
1
Materials shall conform to the relevant requirements
of the followi ng Sub-sections of the Specification:
Concrete
Sub-section 5.1
Concrete
Materials and
Mixes
Reinfor ci ng Steel
Sub-section 5.2
Reinforcing
Steel
(6).
ii.
iii.
5-410
S..lt.,mue
- Pre-stressing
Subsection 5.4
Pre-stressed
Concrete
Structures
5.5.3
Construction Requirements
5.5.3.1
Genera!;
This work consists of Installing temporary
bearings, casting concrete u n' ts insitu end
setting the superstructure on permanent
bearings.
The Contractor shall submit
complete details and descripfons of aU
methods, arrangements and equipment which
he intends to adopt, for approval before
construct on work is started.
ii.
iii.
iv.
i l.
n.
Casting Procedures:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Construction Schedule:
i.
5-41
~~
iv.
v.
vi.
Tolerances:
i.
ii.
5.5.3.2
EpoKY Adhesive:
i.
il.
Iii.
S-42
3
Surface Preparation: The interface of the units shall
be lightly grit blasted before erection to remove laitance.
Before applying the epoxy the interfaces must be clean
and free from laitance or any bond breaking material. Any
oil or grease which may be harmful shall be removed.
The surface shall have no free moisture.
4
Application of Epoxy: Application shall begin
Immediately after a batch has been mixed. Application
shall be to both interfaces to a total nominal thickness of 2
mm with a spatula or by hand. No epoxy may be applied
w ithin 25mm of any duct
5
Preliminary Prestress: Immediately after the
interfaces are coated with epoxy, the unit shall be brought
Into posit ion and the preliminary prestress applied. This
preliminary prestress is to be just sufficient to start
squeezing epoKY resin out of the joint. The amount of
prestress required will depend on the formulation of resin
chosen by the Contractor.
If th:s operation is not
completed within the life time of the first batch of epoxy ta
be applied, the units shall be moved apart. All the epoxy
on both Interfaces shall be removed with spatulas and an
approved solvent. No epoxy may be applied to the joint
until 24 hours after a solvent has been used. The life t ime
shell be reckoned from the end of the pot life unless the
manufacturer's Instructions direct otherwise. A ll excess
epoxy shall be cleaned off from the outer faces of the
webs and the soffit in such a way as not to smea r the
concrete face.
6
Records of Joining: The Contractor shall keep a
record of each joint with the following details:
i.
Joint Number
ii.
iii.
iv.
Weather
conditions
(temperature
humidity) continuously recorded
v.
7
Tolerances; These shall be similar to
prescribed for balanced cantilever construction.
6.6.3.3
those
Cover to reinforcement
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
6mm
+5 orO mm
Prestressing tendons
3 mm in any direction
Dowel holes
3 mm in any direction
li.
iii.
6mm
5.5.3.4
In-Situ Construction
12 mm
Width
:t 10 mm
i.
Thickness
6 mm
Levels
+ 10 mm or -0 mm
12 mm
:1:.
6 mm
+15 mm or-O mm
12 mm
6.5.4
6mm
Void Location
6 mm in any direction
Cover to reinforcement
+ 5 mm or -0 mm
Prestressing tendons
5 mm in any direction
5-43
~~
5.6
5.6.1
Description
5.6.1.1
Scope
5.6.1 .2
References
Earthworks
Section 5
Section 6
Section 8
Drainage
Section 10
Piling
Section 12
Section 15
5.6.2
Materials
Section 10
Concrete
Sub-section 5.1
Reinforcing Steel
Sub-section 5.2
Section 6
Backfilling
Subsection 2.7
Road Pavement
Sections3,4
Concrete Pavement
Sub-section 5. 7
Waterproofing
Sub-section 5.10
Pipe culverts
Sub-section 8.1
Drainage
SectionS
Section 12
Electrical Installations
Section 15
6 -44
2
Rnishes to floors and walls, including tiles, plaster
paint and special finishes shall be as described in the
Special Specification.
5.6.3
Construction Requirements
5.6.3.1
Excavation
3
The Contractor shall comply with arrangements to
maintain the How of pedestrian and vehicular traffic as
stated in Section 1 of the Specification and as detailed on
the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. The
Contractor's attention is specifically drawn to his
responsibilities regarding the safety of such traffic near to
open excavations for the works and the operation of heavy
plant and equipment and the provision and maintenance
of adequate fences and barriers.
4
The Contractor shall protect and support existing
statutory services during the excavation works as stated in
Section 1 and Section 18 of the Specification and co.
operate with all statutory services to ensure efficiency of
diversion of such services where necessary. In the event
that services are uncovered during excavation that have
not been previously located on Drawings. the Engineer's
attention shall be drawn to the matter without delay.
5
Particular care shall be taken by the Contractor to
minimize noise, dust and vib<'at!on caused by excavation
operations especially where such nuisances prove
hazardous to e)(isting structures.
6
Where ground water lowering operations prove
necessary the phasing of pumping operations and their
termination on completion of the underpass structure
shall be approved by the Engineer.
7
Where the Drawings show the use of piles or
diaphragm walls to support the underpass structure or
retain the subsoil the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for hl s approval a detailed method statement
and work program for this work together with the names
of any specialist firms he i ntends to use for this work.
5.6.3.2
Structural Concrete
Section 5.2
Reinforcing Steel
Section 5.3
Section 5.4
5.6.3.3
Concrete Piles
5.6.3.4
Waterproofing
5.6.3.6
5.6.3.7
Electrical Works
5.6.4
Method of Measurement
Excavation,
backfilling,
pi Iing,
concrete,
reinforcement, road pavement, sidewalks and paved areas.
drainage, ducts, waterproofing of concrete and electrica I
work shall be measured in accordance with the relevant
Sections ofthis Specification.
2
Floor and wall finishes shall be measured in
accorda nee with the Special Specification for the
particular work.
5.6.5
Basis of Payment
5.6.6
5.7
5.7.1
Description
5
The standard of acceptance of waterproofing shall be
that there shall be no damp patches or visible leaks on the
inside face of walls, roof or floor of the underpass
structure.
5.6.3.5
6.7.2
Materials
5-45
~
~
/'-.
~<:concrete and Concrete Structures
2
Base Course:
Cement treated base course or
aggregate base course placed beneath the concrete
pavement.
5.7.2.1
Forms
Form Materials:
Plywood, metal, metal-framed
pl ywood, or other approved panel-type materials to
provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed
surfaces. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a
radius 30 m or less.
2
Form-Release Agent:
Commercially formulated
for m-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or
adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair
subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces.
5.7.2.2
Steel Reinforcement
Reinforcement Bars:
deformed.
4
Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615,
Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and
free of burrs.
5
Dowel Bars: High tensile plain steel bars conform' ng
to BS 4449, ASTM A615, ASTM A616, or ASTM A617, and
shall be free from burring or other deformation restricting
slippage in the concrete,
Before delivery to the
construction site, a minimum of two-thirds of the length of
each dowel bar shaU be painted with one coat of zinc
chromate, If plastic or epoxy-coated steel dowels are used,
no zinc-chromate coating is required, except when
specified for a panicular si tuation on the contract p!a ns.
Coated dowels shall conform to the requirements given in
AASHTO M254.
6
Pe"*ltage bv Weight
Puali\gSiwea
SIIIYII DMign.don
(squl!re openings}
318 in (9.5 mml
100
95-100
~o. 8
(2.36 mml
80-100
50- 85
ao
25-
10 30
2- 10
0-3
PIII'CIIfttage bv wefght
PIIAing Slevw
Sltwe DeelQnlltlon
(squire openings}
in(mm)
1 {25)
I
.
I
314 {191
t /2 {12.51
318 (9.5)
19 mm- 2.36 mm
c:
l
c:
!
100
90-100 - -
' 20-55 .
9
Bar Suppons: Bolsters. chairs. spacers. and other
devices
for spacing.
supponing,
and
fastening
reinforcement bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in
place. Use wire bar type suppons complying to CRSI' s
"Manual of Standard Practice .
5.7.2.3
6
Water. Water used in mixing or curing shall be as
clean and free of o il. salt, acid, a lkali, sugar, vegetable, or
other substances injurious to the finished product as
possible. Water will be tested in accordance with the
Concrete Materials
General:
Use the same brand and type of
cementl tious material from the same manufacturer
S-4a
No. 4 {~.75)
No. 8 (2.361
r"'-'
0- 10
0 -5
__JI
I
Sult11nat of Oman. Sral\llatd Spoc:ificatioru lOt Rood & Bndo Conslluclion 2010
5.7.2.4
2
Joint filler shall be furnished in a single piece for the
full depth and width required for the joint, unless
otherwise specified by Engineer. When the use of more
than one piece is authorized for a joint, the abutting ends
shalt be fastened securely end held accurately to shape by
stapling or other positive fastening means satisfactory to
Engineer.
Admixtures
4
Dowels: Galvanized steel, to the dimensions shown
on drawings.
5
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic ernul sion or styrene butadiene.
5.7.2.7
li,
High-Range,
Water-Reducing
ASTM C 494, Type F.
Admhcture:
2
Use a qualified independent testing agency for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the trial
batch method. Do not use Employer's field quality-control
testing agency as the independent testing agency.
iii.
3
Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the
following properties using test specimens prepared in
accordance with ASTM C31 and tested with ASTM C78:
iv.
Water-Reducing and
ASTM C 494, Type D.
i.
5.7.2.5
Retarding
Admixture:
Curing Materials
i.
ii.
iii.
Concrete Mixes
Water: Potable.
Slump Limit:
i.
ii.
iii.
4
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular
film forming, manufactured for application to fresh
concrete.
5
Clear
Solvent-Borne
Liquid-Membrane-Forming
Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type l, Class B.
6
Clear Waterborne
Membrane-Forming
Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
Curing
7 White
Waterborne
Membrane-Forming
Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B.
Curing
6.7.2.6
Related Materials
5
Chemical Admixtures:
Water-reducing and setcontrolling admixtures shall be added to t he mix in the
manner recommended by the manufactu rer and in the
amount necessary to comply with the specification
requirements. Tests shall be conducted on trial mixes,
during the mix design, in accordance with ASTM C494.
~~
6
Slip-form Construction: A high degree of uniformity
In the plastic concrete is required. Some edge stump of
the wet concrete behind the side form on the paving
machi ne will occur, even with low slump concrete. This
may continue. though very slowly, until Initial set has
taken place.
5.7.2.8
Concrete Mixing
i.
ii.
I~
il
5-46
Mixed Concrete:
i.
ii.
iii.
Concrete:
i.
iii.
5.7.2.9
Limitations of Mixing:
2
During periods of hot weather when the maximum
dBUy air temperature exceeds 30 deg. C, the following
precautions shall be taken: the forms and/or the
underlying material shall be sprinkled with water
immediately before placing the concrete. The concrete
shall be placed at the coolest temperature practicable, and
in no case shall the temperature of the co ncrete when
placed exceed 32 deg, C. The aggregates and/or mixing
water shall be cooled as necessary to maintain the
concrete temperature at or not more than the specified
max. Refer to ACt 305 Rn for Hot Weather Concreting.
5.7.3
Construction Requirements
5.7.3.1
Preparation
Proceed with
pavement
layers only
after
nonconforming conditions have been corrected and
subgrade is ready to receive pavement.
2
Remove loose material from compacted sub-base
surface immediately before pl1cing concrete.
5.7.3.2
iii.
iv.
5.7.3.5
Joints
General:
Form construction, expansion, and
contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces
perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct
transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless
otherwise indicated. When joining existing pavement,
place transverse joints to align with previously placed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side
2
and end terminations of pavement and at locations where
pavement operations are stoppl!d for more than one half
hour, unless pavement terminates at Isolation joints.
3
Expansion Joints:
Form expansion joints of
preformed joint-filler strips abutting concretl! curbs, catch
basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed
objects, and where indicated.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
Placement of Reinforcement
I.
Steel Reinforcement
ii.
~~
OGRLT
I.
Iii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
7
Dowel Bars: Dowel bars or other load-transfer units
of an approved type shall be placed across transverse or
other joints in the manner as specified on the Drawings.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
8
Fix dowel bars and support assembl[es at joints
where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of
dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of
joint.
9
Joints Installation:
i.
il.
ii.
6
Tie Bars: Deformed bars shall be fixed in longitudinal
joints as shown on the Drawings.
i.
i~
iii.
iv.
s.s.o
10 Contraction
Joints:
Form
weakened-plane
contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to
at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:
11
i.
ii.
l ongitudinal Joints:
l.
ll.
iii.
12
Transverse Joints:
i.
Expansion Type:
Transverse expansion joints shall be
installed at the locations and spacing as
shown on the plans. The joints shall be
installed at right angles to the centerline
and perpendicular to the surface of the
pavement. The joints shall be formed and
finished to ensure completa separation of
the slabs. Joint filler shall be of a premolded type as specified and shown on the
Drawings and shall el(!end the full width of
the pavement strip.
All concrete shall be cleaned from the top
of the joint material. Before the pavement
is opened to traffic, it shall be swept clean
and filled with approved joint sealing
material.
All devices used for the fixing expansion
joints shall be approved by the Engineer.
They shall be easily removable without
disturbing the concrete and held in proper
transverse
and
vertical
alignment.
Immediately aher forms are removed, any
concreta bridging the joint space at the
ends shall be removed for the full width
and depth of the joint.
When specified, expansion joints shall be
equipped with dowels of the dimensions
and at the spacing and location indicated
on the Drawings. The dowels shall be
firmly supported in pi ace and accurately
alig ned parallel to the subgrada and the
5-51
~~
Ill.
13
5.7.3.6
2
If damage occurs to the base course, It shari be relaid
for the full depth or the damaged areas filled with concrete
integral with the pavement. If traffic is allowed to use the
prepared grade, the grade shall be checked and corrected
immediately before the placement of concrete.
3
The prepared grade shall be well moistened with
water, without saturating, immediately ahead of concrete
placement to prevent rapid loss of moisture from concrete.
5.7.3.7
2
If damage occurs to the base course, it shall be relaid
for the full depth, or the damaged areas filled with
concrete Integral with the pavement.
3
A multiple-pin template weighing not less than 454
kg. per 6 m or other approved template shall be provided
and operated on the forms immediately in advance of the
placing of the concrete. The template shall be propelled
only by hand and not attached to a tractor or other power
unit. Templates shall be adjustable so that they may be
set and maintained at the correct contour of the
underlying course. The adjustment and operation of the
template shall be such as to provide an accurate re-test o f
the grade before placing the concrete thereon. All excess
material shall be removed. Low areas may be filled w ith
concrete integral w ith the pavement.
5.7.3.8
2
Stockpiles: Bui ld up stockpiles in layers of not more
than 900 mm in thickness. Each layer shall be completely
in place before beginning the next layer and shall not be
allowed to "cone down over the next lower layer.
Aggregates from different sources and of different grading
shall not be stockpiled together. Improperly placed
stockpiles w ill not be accepted by Engineer.
3
Aggregates: Handle from stockpiles or other sources
to the belching plant in such manner to secure the
specified grading of the material. Aggregates that have
become segregated or mixed with earth or foreign
material shalf not be used. All aggregates produced or
handled by hydraulic methods. and washed aggregates.
shall be stockpiled or binned for draining at least 12 hours
before being batched.
4
Cement: Store in weather tight struct ures w ith raised
floors or in suitable silos. Different consignments of
bagged cement shall be used separately and in the order
of delivery. Cement manufactured more than twelve
months prior to proposed use on site shall not be used. If
cement becomes partially set or contains lumps of caked
cement. It shall be rejected. Cement salvaged from
discarded or used bags shall not be used.
6
When required by the contract or when permitted,
batehing plants shall be equipped to proportion
aggregat es and bulk cement, by weight, automatically
using interlocked proportioning devices of an approved
type.
7
Water shall be measured either by volume or by
weight accurately measured to within plus or minus 1
6-52
ii.
iii.
3
Protection: Protect pavement and its appurtenances
from damage caused by traffic. The Engineer w m decide
when the pavement may be cleaned and opened to traffic,
but not earlier than 14 days after concrete placing. Protect
freshly placed concrete from premature drying and
excessive cold or hot temperatures Comply with the
recommendations of ACI 306R for cold weather protect:on
and ACI 305R for hot weather protection during curl ng.
5.7.3.10
Concrete Placement
"-../
~
/""-.
~<:\concrete and Concrete Structures
3
Comply
with
requirements
and
with
recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing,
transporting, and placing concrete.
4
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Site,
or during placement.
5
Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous
operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag
concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete Into
place.
6
Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating
equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or
tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate
concrete according to recommendations in ACI 3091'1.
Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to
transverse Joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator
away from joint assemblies, rei nforcement, or side forms.
Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and
consolidation.
Consolidate with care to prevent
dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.
10
iv.
v.
Slip.form Method:
I.
11.
7
Following the placing of the concrete, it shall be
struck off to conform to thll cross section shown on the
Drawings and to level such that when the concrete is
properly consoUdated and finished. the surface of the
pavement shall be at the level shown on the Drawings.
8
Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and
strike off. Commence initial floating using bull floats or
derbies to form an open textured and uniform surface
p~ane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on
the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces
before beginning finishing opllrations or spreading dry
shake surface treatments.
9
i.
ii.
iii.
H~
11
ii.
11:.
iv.
v.
6.7.3.11
5.7.3.12
2
Strike-Off of Concrete: Following the placing of the
concrete, it shalt be struck off to conform to the cross
section shown on the plans and to an elevation such that
when the concrete is properly consolidated and finished,
the surface of the pavement shall be at the elevation
shown on the plans.
3
Finishing at Joints:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
General:
Wetting of concrete surfaces during
screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations is
prohibited.
2
Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation
when bteed-weter sheen has disappeared and the
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit
operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by
hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units.
Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and
fill low spots. Refloat surface Immediately to uniform
granular texture.
Machine Finishing:
i.
ii.
555
~
~
.../"'-.
~<:\concrete and Concrete Structures
5
Hand Finishing: Hand finishing methods will not be
permitted, except under the following conditions:
i.
il.
v.
6.7.3.13
Surface Texture
ii.
iii.
5-56
6
Floati ng: After the concrete has been struck off and
consolidated, it shall be further smoothed, trued, and
consolidated by means of a longitudinal Ooat, using
approved hand or machine methods.
ii.
iv.
i.
i.
iil.
5.7.3,14
Surface Test
6.7.3.16
Removing Forms
Sealing Joints
Opening to Traffic
Pavement Tolerance
i.
ii.
iii.
Surface:
Gap below 3-m long, unleveled
straightedge not to exceed +6 mm.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
ii.
iii.
5.7.3.20
viii.
x.
2
Surface Roughness: The International Roughness
Index {IRII for roads shall be complied with on all concrete
finished surfaces. The acceptable range of IRI test results
shall vary between 0 and 1.5 mm/m for highways and
primary roads and between 0 and 3.0 mm/m for secondary,
tertiary and other access roads. Adopt contact type test
instruments for test stretches not exceeding 400 m in
length and non-contact test instruments (optical or sonicl
for stretches exceeding 400 m in length. The Contractor
Flexural Strength:
i.
ii.
+16 mm.
ix.
Pavement Marking
~
~
Con,munlcnt~ona
DGRlT
~
~<Concrete and Concrete Structures
m.
4
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent
testing and inspection agency to sample materials,
perform tests, and submit test repons during concrete
placement according to requirements specified in this
Clause.
5
Testing Services:
Testing shall be performed
accordlng to the following requirements:
i,
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
5-58
vi .
vii.
v iii.
6
Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer,
concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours o f
testing.
Reports of compressive-strength tests shall
contain Project identification name and number, date of
concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency,
concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in
pavement. design compressive strength at 28 days,
concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive
breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28day tests.
7
Nondestructive Testing : Impact hammer, sonoscope,
or other nondestructive device m!IY be permitted by
Engineer but will not be used as the sole basis for
approval or rejection.
8
Additional Tests:
Testing agency shall make
additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate
slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer.
Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy
of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42,
or by other methods as directed.
5.7.3.22
5.7.3.23
5.7.4
1
Thickness of concrete pavement shall be determined
by average caliper measurement of cores taken from
sections of the pavement as stated in Item 2 below,
rounded upwards taken to the nearest mm.
2
Pavement sections shall consist of each 300 lin.m.
length in each paver lane. The last section in each lane
shall be 300 m plus the fractional part of 300 m remaining.
Other areas such as intersections, entrances, ramps, etc
shall be measured as one section each and the thickness
of each shall be determined separately. Small irregular
unit areas may be included as part of another section,
3
One core shall be taken from each section by the
Contractor at approved locations and in the presence of
the Engineer. When the measurement of the core from
any pavement section is not deficient by more than 5 mm
from the specified thickness, the core will be deemed to be
of the specified thickness as shown on the Oraw'ngs.
4
When the measurement of the core from any
pavement section is deficient by more than 5 mm but not
more than 20 mm, 2 additional cores spaced at not less
than 100 mm shall be taken and used together with the
first core to determine the average thickness of such
section.
2
Reinforced concrete pavement shell be measured in
cubic meters of the paved area multiplied by the executed
slab thickness (as approved by the Eng'neerl and shall
include the same items detailed in Item 1 of Clause 5 7.4
above plus the reinforcement Steel material furnished,
spliced, jointed and placed all as shown on the
Contractor's shop drawings that are approved by the
Engineer.
3
The rates in the Bill of Quantities shall be deemed to
include furnishing of all associated concrete and joint
component materials, preparation of bases, concrete
mixing, placing, compacting, finishing and curing, as well
as all joint sawing, cutting and cleaning operations,
drilling and installing dowels and deformed tie bars and
other joint accessories, and all tests, all as detailed on
Drawings and in the Specifications.
5.7.5
Deflclency In Thlclcn-u
Detarmlnecljlf_Cores (mml
o:o to 5:o
5.1to 10.0
10:1 to 15.0
15.1to.2o:-o
> 20.0
Proportion of AI'N
Meaured for hyment
100%
90%
75%
so%
Basis of Payment
5.7.6
6
Where the average thickness of concrete pavement is
deficient by more than 5 mm but not more than 20 mm
adjustments shall be made In the area measurements as
shown In Table 5.7.3.1.
Method of Measurement
1
Unreinforced concrete pavement shall be measured
in cubic meters computed as the paved area multiplied by
the executed slab thickness as approved by the Engineer.
i.
(cu.m.)
ii.
(cu.m.)
5.8
5.8.1
Description
0%
5.8.2
Materials
7
When the pavement is more than 20 mm deficient in
thickness, the Contractor shall remove such deficient areas
and replace them with concrete pavement of the specified
quality and thickness, all at his own expense.
6.8.2.1
Materials, General
8
When the limits of a deficient area to be removed
and replaced are within 3 m of an expansion, contraction
or construction joint, the entire concrete pavement up to
1
Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and
other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field expert ence.
~~
5.8.2.2
I.
ii.
5.8.2.3
Miscellaneous Materials
Joint Priming;
Prime joint substrates where
2
indicated or where recommended by joint sealer
manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealersubstrate tests or prior experience, Apply primer to
comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations.
Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow
spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
3
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to
prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which
otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by
such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove
sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
5.8.3.3
1
General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers'
printed installation insttuctions applicable to products and
applications indicated, except where more stringent
requirements apply.
2
i.
i~
3
Maski ng Tape: Provide non-staining, nonabsorbent
type compatib1e with joint sealants and to surfaces
adjacent to joints.
5.8.3
Construction Requirements
5.8.3.1
Examination
1
Examine joints for compliance with requirements for
joi nt configuration, installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not
proceed with Installation of joint sealers until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
5.8.3.2
Preparation
5..60
Sultonnte of Oman, Stmd1td Speafie~tians lor Rood & Bndge Conotructian 21110
5.8.3.4
5.9.3
Cleaning
5.8.4
5.9
5.9.1
Description
5.9.2
Materials
Concrete
Sub-section 5.1
concrete Materials and Mixes
Reinforcing Steel
Sub-section 5.2
"Reinforcing Steel"
2
Concrete classes shall be those prescribed on the
relevant Drawings.
Backfill shall be as specified in Section 2 "Earthwork".
Section 2
Earthwork
Sub-section 5.2
Reinforcing Steel
Sub-section 5.3
2
Box culverts, headwalls. wing walls, cutoft walls and
aprons shall be to the lines and levels shown on the
Drawings. Unless otherwise shown, culverts shall have a
constant fall of 1:100 along their centerline.
3
Box culverts shall be constructed In sections such
that expansion joints are located at Intervals which shall
be so spaced as to prevent the box culvert from behaving
as a long beam unless such structural action has been
allowed for in the design. Unless shown on the Drawings
or directed by the Engineer, the spacing of expansion
joints shall be no greater than 35 meters.
Unless otherwise indicated, expansion joints shall
4
also be used at the culvert ends where the culvert meets
the wing walls and apron slabs.
5
Where box culverts are located in road embankments,
the embankments shall first be constructed in accordance
with Paragraph 2.5 3.4 "Embankment Construction". The
compacted embankments shall then be excavated in
trenches for the culverts. This requirement may be
dispensed with by a written permission from the Engineer
to so do. Where a culvert Is to be constructed under a
high embankment, this requirement may be relaxed or
dispensed with provided the fill is designed to arch over
the cuI vert or the culvert Is specially designed for an
increased surcharge load from the embankment.
Embankments may be constructed to within 1 m above
the culvert then construction carried out as above.
6
For culverts located below firm ground, the
excavation shall be carried out in trenches in accordance
with Section 2 "Earthwork".
7
Backfilling and compaction shall be carried out in
layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness and
the difference in the levels of backfill on either side of the
culvert shall et no time exceed 500 mm. Start backfilling
after having attained 75 percent of the culvert 28-day
concrete strength.
8
Protection
Construction Requirements
~..A,./
5.9.4
Method of Measurement
6.9.6
ASTM 0449
ASTM 0450
ASTM 0490
5.10.2
Materials
6.10.2.1
Asphalt
Basis of Payment
5.9.5
ASTM D 173
6.10.2.2
Bitumen
5.10
5.1 0.1
Description
6.10.1.1
Scope
Waterproofing Fabric
,
Flexible,
preformed
waterproof
membrane
comprising strong, hi gh-density polyethylene film w ith
self-adhesive rubber/b itumen compound. and having the
following minimum properties:
Total th ickness
1.5 mm
Weight
1.6 kg/m 2
Elongation
Tear resistance
6.10.1.2
Puncture resistance
220 N 65 mm
References
[ASTMI~
ASTM D 41
ASTM 043
s.62
Tensile strength
5.10.2.5
: 42N/mm2
1.030 to 1.100
3.0
50.0
3.0
1
Tar seal coat shall conform to AASHTO M 52, Grade
RTCBS lASTM D 490).
5.10.2.7
5.10.3
Construction Requirements
4
Waterproofing and dampprooling material shall be
stored in a dry, protected place. Rolls of waterproofing
fabric and membranes shall not be stored on end.
5.1 0.3.1
Surface Preparation
5.10.3.3
Waterproofing:
I.
ii.
the
2
Dampproofing: The surface to which
dampproofing coating shall be applied shall be cleaned of
all loose and foreign material and dirt and shall be dry.
' - . ,~
/
5.10.3.4
Dampproofing
2
The protection course shall follow the waterproofing
so closely that the letter will not be exposed without
protection for more then 24 hours.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or direct ed
the Engineer, vertical faces waterproofed or
dampproofed shall be protected by a porous concrete
block well of not less than 225 mm thickness. If approved
3
by
5-&t
Sultonate of Oman. Slondord Sporcifoalic ns 101' Rud & Bridge Conolr~~ar 2010
5.10.3.8
Testing
5.10.4
2
Tar or bituminous painting to surfaces permanently
in contact with backfilled material shall be measured by
the square meter of surface area so painted .
4
Protection to waterproofing
membrane and
dampproofing course shall not be measured for direct
payment but shall be deemed to be Included in the rates
for waterproofing and dempproofing.
5
Site trials of waterproofing membranes shall not be
measured for direct payment but shell be deemed to be
included in the rates for waterproofing.
6.1 1.1.2
sq.m.
ii
Membrane waterproofing
{State type, thickness)
sq.m.
iii
sq.m.
5.11
5.11.1
Description
5.11.1.1
Scope
Submittals
6.11.1.3
Basis of Payment
5.10.6
2
The coating system she II be used for the protection
of reinforced concrete structures against carbonation or
chloride induced corrosion. Work includes, but not
necessarily l imited to coating for;
Method of Measurement
5.10.5
Performance Requirements
5.11.1.4
Quality Assurance
Trial Panels:
i.
~~
OGRLT
5.11 .1.5
5.11 .2.3
650 microns
400 microns
Testing
Water vapor transmission
greater than 13
glm1.day
3.63x 1010
cmtsec
Tear resistance
Crack bridgeability
Tear resistance
ASTM D624
Crack bridgeability
BREmethod
2
Where test methods are not specified, the procedure
for establishing compliance with the specification
requirements sheM be agreed w ith the Engineer.
Materials
General
Primar
5-86
R value at 3251'
greater than 161
m
5.11 .2.1
Speclflcations
5.11.2
Topcoat
minimum94%
at 28 days
7.3 kNimm
1. 5 mm
Adhesion
m inimum 1.0
N/mm'
mi nimum82
%at 28 days
when testad at a
water-cement
ratio 0.5
5.11.3
Construction Requirements
6.11.3.1
General
Inspection of Concrete
5.1 1.3.3
Surface Preparation
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
5.11.3.5
5.12
5.12.1
Description
i.
ii.
iii.
6
If the Works include a number of similar bridges
testing may be limited as follows:
i.
ii.
iii.
7
Bridges are considered similar when their
superstructures have the same design, same material
specifications and are constructed by the same contractor.
3
The coating shall be applied by spray, roller or brush
to achieve a finish acceptable to the Engineer.
8
If the results of the load testing are unfavorable, and
leave some doubt as to the ability of the bridge to
withstand the loads it is supposed to carry, more elaborate
testing shall be considered, including non-destructive full.
scale testing.
5.11.4
5.12.2
Load Application
5.12.2.1
5-67
~
~
DGRLT
~
~<::concrete and Concrete Structures
4
The stipulations of this Clause are set as minimum
requirements. In particular cases, when there is doubt
about the quality of the bridge, the Engineer may impose
more severe loads.
5.12.2.2
3
The test starts by loading the bearings before
applying any loads on the spans in order to activate
immediately the bearing deformation, and then the
measured deflections will be significant.
5.12.2.3
2
Measurements shall be recorded during passage of
the moving load.
5.12.3
Visual lnspection
6-68 .
3
After the completion of testing, a detailed visual
i nspection shall also be carried out to all accessible parts
of the bridge.
5.12.4
Measurements
6
A report shall be prepared by the Contractor
Including the
testing
procedure, measurements,
interpretation and conclusion.
5.12.5
Method of Measurement
5.12.6
Basis of Payment
5.12.7
nr.
Page No.
Ref.
Title
6.1
Description
6--1
8.1 .1
SumtnMV
Deflnltlone
8-1
6.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
Submittllll
Quality AAuraneo
8-1
8-1
8.1.5
6.1 .8
8-2
8-2
6.2
Materials
6--2
8.2.1
Rallina
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
Grout
8.2.6
8.2.6
Febricatlon
Shop Connec:tlona
Sourca Quality Control
6.3
Construction Requirements
6.3.1
6.3.2
Examination
Praparatlon
8-1
8-2
8-2
&-3
&-3
8-4
8-4
6-4
8-4
6.3.3
Eractfon
8-S
8-5
8.3A
8.3.5
8.3.6
8-5
8-8
8-8
6.4
Method of Measurement
6--6
6.6
Basis of Payments
6--7
6.6
6-7
Sultaru~te of Oman.
id & (
Slandonl s-;f.c
Description
6.1
6.1.1
Summary
6.1 .2
Definitions
i.
4
Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and
Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide details
according to AWS D1.1i01 .1M, 'Structural Welding Code
Steel' for each welded joint qualified by testing, including
the following:
i.
Power source (constant current or constant
voltage).
ii. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for
demand critical welds.
5
Qualification Data:
Submit details for qualified
Installer. fabricator. professional engineer, and testing
agency.
4
Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of
structural members indicated as 'Protected Zone' on
Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural
elements to protected zones are limited.
7
Paint Compatibility Certificates: Submit certificates
from manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
5
Demand Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of
which would result in significant degradation of the
strength and stiffness of the SeismicLoedResisting
System and which are indicated as 'Demand Crifcal' or
'Seismic Critical' on Drawings.
6.1.3
8
Mill test reports for structural steel, including
chemical and physical properties.
9
Product Test Reports:
following:
I.
ii.
Iii.
Submittals
Welding certificates.
iv.
v.
vi.
10
the
6.1.4
Quality Assurance
" J~
/"".~<:structural
4
Welding Qualifications: Welding procedures and
personnel
shall
be
qualified
according
to
AWS D1.11D1 .1M, 'Structural Welding Code . Steel",
t. Welders and welding operators performing work
on bottomflenge, demand-critical welds shell
pass the supplemental welder qual!f~eatlon
testing, as required by AWS 01.8 or shall be
approved by the Client Authority. FCAWS and
FCAWG shall be considered separate processes
for welding personnel qualification.
5
Comp-ly with applicable provisions o f the following
specifications end documents:
i. AISC 303.
ii. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1.
iii. AISC 360.
lv. RCSC's *Speclf.cetlon for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
6
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at
Site.
7
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of rai[ ng or
sjmilar product from single source, from single
manufacturer.
6.1.5
1
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection
and identification. Keep steel me mbers off ground and
spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and
spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials
from corrosion and deterioration.
i.
Do not store materials on a structure in a manner
that might cause distortion, damage, or overload
to members or supporting structures. Repair or
replace damaged materials or structures as
directed.
2
Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed
containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
i. Fasteners may be repackaged only with the
Engineer's approva l and under his supervision.
II. Clean and re-lubrlcate bolts and nuts that
become dry or rusty before use.
iii, Comply
with
manufacturers'
writte n
recommendations for cleaning and lubricating
ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting
fasteners after lubrication.
6.1.6
Coordination
1
Coordinate selection of shop primers with lopcoets
to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating
manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop
primers and topcoats a re compatible with one another.
2
Coordinate Installation of anchorage Items to be
embedded in or attached to other construction so as not to
delay the work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal
templates, instructions, and directions for installation.
6.2
Materials
6.2.1
3
Channels, angles , M shapes and , Sshapes shall
comply, as appropri!1te, with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
ASTM A 572/A 572M Grade 50. ASTM A 529/A 529.\4
Grade 50 and ASTM A 913/A 913M Grade 50.
4
Plate and bar shall comply, as appropriate with
ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 572/A 572M Grade 50, end
ASTM A 529/A 529M Grade 50.
5
Corrosionresisting lowalloy structural-steel shapes,
plates, and bars shall comply with ASTM A 588/A 58BM,
Grade 50.
6
Cold-formed hollow structural sections shall comply
with ASTM A 500, Grade B or C. structural tubing.
7
Corrosion-resisting coldformed hollow structural
sections shall comply with ASTM A 847/A 847M.
structural tub! ng.
Stee l Pipe shall comply with ASTM A 531A 53M,
8
Type f or 5. Grade B.
i.
Weight Class: Sta ndard.
ii. Finish: Black except where indicated to be
galvanized.
9
Steel
castings
shall
comply
with
ASTM A 216/A 216M, Grade WCB with supplementa ry
requirement S 11.
10 Steel
Forgin11s
ASTM A 668/A 66BM.
11 Welding Electrodes
re quire ments.
shall
shllll
comply
comply
with
with
AWS
6.2.2
1
High-Strength
Bolts,
Nuts,
and
Washers:
ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325MI, Type 1, heavy-hex steel
structura l bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M,
Class 8SI heavy.hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436
(ASTM F 436MI, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers;
all with plain finish.
Indicators;
ASTM F 959.
L DirectTension
(ASTM F 959M,
Type B.BI,
Type 325
compressible-washer type with plain finish.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490
(ASTM A 490MI. Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts;
6-2
Sultanat of Oman, Slandanl Sptc.fiationo 'or Road & Bri<l~ Construdion 2010
i.
ii.
iii.
and
8
Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished
carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035.
9
Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon
steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030.
10 S!eeva Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel
bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.
11 Structural Slide Bearings: Low-friction assemblies, of
confi guratCon indicated, that provide vertical transfer of
loads and allow horizontal movement perpendicular to
plane of expansion joint while resisting movement within
plane of expansion joint.
i.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with work
requirements.
ii. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product.
iii. Mating Surfaces: PTFE and mirror-finished
stainless steel.
iv. Coefficient of Friction: Not more than 0.03.
v. Design Load: Not less than 41 MPa.
vi. Total Movement Capability: 50 mm.
12
6.2.3
Grout
6.2.4
Fabrication
iv.
Camber
structural-steel
members
where
Indicated.
Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.
Identify high-strength structural steel according
to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until
structural steel has been erected.
Mark and match-mark materials for field
assembly.
6-3
~~
DGRl T
v.
Thermal Cutting:
Perform thermal cutting by
2
machine to greatest extent possible
i.
Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to
comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/01.1M.
2
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS 01.1101 .1M
and AWS D1.8101 .8M for tolerances, appearances,
welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and
methods used In correcting welding work.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods
i.
tllat will maintain true alignment of axes without
exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill
material.
3
Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes
perpendicular to metal surfaces.
4
Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and
other members transmitting bearing lo1ds.
5
Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are
to remain unpainted according to SSPCSP 3, "Power Tool
Cleaning
6
Shear Connectors:
Prepare steel surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use
automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors
according to AWS 01.1/Dl.lM and manufacturer's written
instructions.
7
Holes: Form holes required for securing other work
to structural steel end for other work to pass through steel
framing members.
i.
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel
surfaces, Do not thermally cut bolt holes or
enlarge holes by burning.
ii. Base plate holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal
cut, or punch holes perpendicular to st eel
surfaces.
Iii. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other
specialty items indicated to receive other work.
9
Galvanization: The minimum average thickness of
coating for all galvanized specimens shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A 123/A 123M.
6.2.5
Shop Connections
6-4
i.
6.2.6
2
Correct deficiencies in work that test reports and
inspections indicate does not comply with the
Specification or Drawings.
3
Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections w~ l
be tested
and
inspected
according
to
RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or
A 490 Bolts.
4
Welded Connections: In addit ion to visual inspection,
shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected
according to AWS 01.1/Dl .lM and the following
inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
i.
Liquid Penet rant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
ii. Magnetic Particle Inspection:
ASTM E 709;
performed on root pass and on finished w eld.
Cracks or zones of Incomplete fusion or
penetration wilt not be accepted.
iii. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
iv. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
6.3
Construction Requirements
6.3.1
Examination
Sultanat of Oman. Srandanl ~~ono for R....t & 9ridge Coootrua.on 21J 0
i.
6.3.2
6
Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless
approved by Engineer. Finish thermally cut sections
within smoothness limits in AWS 01.1/D1.1M.
7
Do not enlarge unfair holes In members by burning
or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to
admit bolts.
I.
Preparation
6.3.3
Erection
6.3.4
~
./'-.../
OGRt T
~
~<Structural Steel and other Meta l Work
The
maximum deviation
from
detailed
straightness or curvature in any direction
perpendicular to its length of a longitudinal
stiffener subject to calculated compressive stress.
Including each orthotropicdeck rib, shall not
exceed U480, where L "' the length of the
stiffener or rib between cross members, webs, or
flanges, in millimeters.
iii. The maximum deviation from
detailed
straightness or curvature in any direction
perpendicular to its length of a transverse web
stiffener or other stiffener not subject to
calculated compressive stress shall not exceed
U240, where L .. the length of the stiffener or rib
between cross members, webs, or flanges, in
millimeters.
6.3.5
Field Connections
HighStrength Bolts:
Install highstrength bolts
according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and
type of joint speclfled.
i.
Joint Type: Slip critical.
1
2
Weld Connections: Comply w ith AWS D1 .1/01.1M
and AWS 01.8/01.8M for tolerances, appearances,
welding procedure specifications, weld quafity, and
methods used in correcting welding work.
i.
Comply w ith AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing.
alignment, adequacy of temporary connections,
and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to
field welds.
i~
Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge,
and grind steel smooth.
iii . Assemble and we:d built-up sections by methods
that will maintain true alignment of axes without
exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges for mill material.
6.3.6
1
Testing Agency: The Employer may engage a
qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.
Bolted Connections: Bolted connections w ill be
2
tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification
for Structural Joints Usi ng ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts.
3
Welded Connections: FJeld welds will be visually
inspected according to AWS 0 1.1/01 .1M.
I. In addition to visual inspection, field welds w ill
be tested and inspected according to
AWS 01 .1101.1M and the following inspection
procedures, at testing agency's option:
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
Magnetic Particle Inspection:
ASTM E 709;
performed on root pass and on finished weld.
Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or
penetration wiH not be accepted.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
6-6
5
Correct deficiencies In work that test reports and
inspections indicate does not comply with the
Specification or Drawings.
6.4
Method of Measurement
1
Structural steel is measured by weight in tonnes.
Except for rolled steel sections and plates whose weights
are computed from nominal weight as paragraphs 2 and 3
below, the weight shaH be calculated on the basis that 1.0
cu. meter weighs 7850 kg
2
The weights of rolled shapes shall be computed on
the basis of their nominal weights per meter as shown on
the Drawings, or listed in the handbooks.
Sult.,....,l., ol Om11n, Sr.ndotd Spoocilic.t"'"" tor Root! & Bride- Construction :1!110
Diameter of Bolt
mm
12
16
19
22
25
29
32
35
38
'
23.8
-
'
36.5
53.0
75.0
96.4
127.3
154.5
ll .
Iii.
6.5
Basis of Payments
ka
8
In computing pay weight on the basis of scale
weights, the pay quantity of structural steel will be the
shop scale weight of the fabricated members, which shall
be weighed on satisfactory scales in the presence of the
Inspector. tt the shop paint has been applied to the
completed member when weighed, 0.4 percent of the
weight of the member shall be deducted from the scale
weight of the member to compensate for weight of shop
paint. The weight of field bolts shall be based on the
approved shipping list. No payment will be made for any
weight in excess of 1.5 percent above the computed net
weight of the whole item.
9
Stejjl ra~ ings are measured in lin. meters as the
actual length fixed in position according to type and
height, without differentiation for straight, curved, raking
and stepped railings The rates are deemed to include for
all accessories and fixings and finishes.
6.6
Railings
(Typel (height)
(!.I
(lin m. )
Ref.
Title
7.1
Description
7.1.1
1 1. 1.1
Summary
Description
1.2
Materials
7.2.1
General
7.2. 1.1
7.2.1.2
7.2. 1.3
72.1.4
7 2.1.5
7.2.1.6
7.2. 1.7
Page No.
7-1
71
7-l
7-1
7-1
7-1
'1-1
Compatibility
Covering Qualities
7-1
Containers
Delivery
7-l
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.41
7-1
71
71
7-1
7-2
Bef.
7.2.5.11
7.2.5.12.
7.2.5.13
7 .2.f
7.2.6.1
7.2.6.2
7.2;6.3
7.2.7
7.2.7.1
7.2.7.2
7;2.7.3
7.U
7.2.8.1
7.2.8.2
7.2.9
7-2
72
7-2
72
7.2.91
7.29.2
7.2.9.3
7.2.4;5
7.2.4.6
Coarse Particles
Consistency
Condition in Container
72
72
7-2
7.2.4.7
Skinning
7-2
7.2.4.8
7.2.4.9
Dilution Stability
Brushing Propert:es
72
7.2.4.10
Spraving Properties
?2
7-3
7.2.4 2
7.2.413
7.2.4.4
7.2.4.11
Drying Time
7.2.4.12
Tinting
7.2.5
Basic Lead Slllco-Chromate Primer
7.2.5.1
Description
7.2.5.2
7.2.5.3
7.2.5.4
7.2.5.5
Composition
Weight per Liter
7-2
7-3
7-3
Description
Zinc Oxide Vehicle
Zinc DustZinc Oxide MilCed Primer
Aluminum Paint
Description
Proportions
Mixing
'11nted Aluminum Paint
Description
Proportions
B.alc Lead Sillco-Chromate Maroon
Field Coat
Description
,...
73
7-4
7-4
7-4
7:.&
75
7 5
7-5
7-S
7 5
7 5
7-5
7-S
7-S
7.2.9.4
7.2.9;5
7.2.9.6
7.2.9.7
Cond,tfon in Container
Sk.nmng
75
7.2.9.8
7.2.9.9
7.2.9.10
D~ution Stability
7-5
Brushing Properties
75
Spravtng Properties
Drying Time
7-6
7.2.9.11
7.2.10
7-5
?5
7-li
Flnlah Coat
Description
7.2. 10.2
Composition
7.2.10.3
7.2.10.4
7-6
7-!i
7-5
7-6
7.2.105
7.2. 10.6
Coarse Particles
Consistencv
Color
Condition in Container
Skinning
0 1 ution Stability
76
Brushrng.Propenies
7-6
7.2.5.6
Flash Point
7.2.5.7
7.2.5.8
7.2.5.9
Dilution Stablity
7.2.10. 7
7.2.10.8
7 2.10.9
7.2.5.10
Appearance
7-3
7.210.10
73
73
7-3
75
7-5
73
73
73
Brushing Properties
Spraving Properties
DTVingTlme
7.2.10.1
73
73
Page No.
Composition
73
73
Coarse Particles
Consistency
Title
76
7-6
7-5
7-5
76
Ref.
7.2..10.11
7.2..10.12
7.2.tl
7.2.11.1
11tle
Spraying Properties
Drying Time
Zinc Dust Paint
Description
Requirements
7.2.11.2
7,2..12
Gloss Enamel
Description
7.2.12..1
7.2.12.2
Requirements
7,2..13
Sampling and Testing
7.2.14
Description
Composition
7.2.15.3
Colors
7.2.18
Polymer Paint
Description
7.2.16.1
7.2.. 16.2
Composition
7.2. 16.3
Colors
7.2.17
Acrylic Emu!.lon Paint
Page No.
Ref.
Title
7-6
7.3.8
7,3.9
7-12
Pile
Shells
Painting Steel Pile Enclosures
7-13
7.3.10
7-13
7..fi
11
77
77
7-7
11
7-7
7-7
1-1
1-7
7-7
7-7
7-8
7-8
7-8
H!
7-8
7-8
18
1 8
7-8
7.3
Con~on R~uirements
7-8
7.3.1
7..3.2
Ge11111111
Application
1-8
7-9
'7.3.2.1
7.3.3
7.3.3.1
7.3,3.2
General
Concrete SurfKel
Preparation
Painting
7.13
7-9
7-9
710
7.3.4
7-11
7.3.6
711
Field Coat
7-12
Field Cleanna
Field Painting
Bridge Raflinga and Guardrails
Bridge Railings
7-12
7.3.5.1
7.3.5.2
7.3.8
7.3..6.1
7.3.6.2
7.3.7
7.3.7.1
7.3.'1!l
Guardrail
7-11
7-11
7-12
7-12
7-12
7 12
Page No.
7.4
Method of Measurement
1-13
'/.5
Basis of Payments
'1-13
7.6
7-13
Paint)
7.1
Description
7.1.1
Summary
7.1.1.1
Description
7.2
Materials
7.2.1
General
7.2.1.1
Compatibility
7.2.1.4
Covering Qualities
Containers
Delivery
7.2.2
ASTM
Zinc Oxide
079
White Lead; Basic Carbonate
081
White Lead, Basic Sulfate
082
D 83 Red Lead, nlnetysev~m (971 percent
Grade
Iron Oxide, Class II Type A -084
Lempbleillc
0209
Chrome Oxide Green
0263
Titanium Dioxide, Type I
0476
Carbon Black
DS61
Magnesium Silicate Piament
0605
AluminumPigments, Type II Class B
0962
[except coarse particles may be two
121 percent maximuml
Copper Phtalocv~~nlne Blue
0963
Basic Lead SiiiCo'!chromate
D1648
Copper Phthalocvanine Green
03021
Table 7.2.21: Specifications for Pigments end Paste
~
2
Siliceous red iron oxide shall meet the following
requirements:
~~
~~<raint
ii.
..
7.2.4.3
I
1
. . ASTM
" 0 13~ 1
Turoentine, steam distflled
Pine Oil Twe 1
- ~F.SS ! LU.-P.~ ~ I
Raw llnseed oil
0234
Mineral spirits
0235
Mineral spirits, Grade 1 and Grade FSS TT-T-291
2
Boiled linseed oil. TYpe 1
0260
DtYers,liquid paint. Class B
0600
Alkyd resin solutions, Type I, II and FSS TTR-266
111
Table 7.2.31: Specifications for Paint Liquids
7.2.4
7.2.4.1
Description
7.2.4.2
Composition
she~
conform to the
Pigment
Sixty-six 1661 percent min.
.
Vehicle
nilrtvfour (34) percent max.
. Fifty-siX (56) percent min.
Non.volatlle
meterial in vehicle
Phthaljc anhydride Fifteen (15) percent min..
based on vehicle :
solids
Water
OFive-tenths (0.51 percent max.
Table 7.2.4-1: Composition of Red lead Paint
Condition in Containe r
Skinning
Red lead paint shall weigh not less than two (21
ldlograms per liter.
7.2.4.6
ComDOMnt
7.2.4.4
7.2.3
Dilution Stability
Brushing Properties
Spraying Properties
Sultanate ol Oman. Stond<d Spoafic..on lot Road & S10dge C<lmtruc:ticn 2!11D
Paint)
7.2.4.11
Drying Time
7.2.5.5
Consistency
7.2.4.12
Tinting
7.2.5
7.2.5.1
Description
Composition
Ninety-three
and two-tenths
minimum
Four and eight-tenths (4.81 to
five and eight-tenths (5.8)
pen:ent
Silica-Chromate Primer
Weight per Liter
7.2.5.7
Flash Point
Condition in Container
Skinning
Dilution Stability
Appearance
Brushing Properties
Spraying Properties
(93.2t~ent
7.2.5.3
7.2.5.6
Coarse Particles
Drying Time
~
~
a. Communlc.otlona
DGRLT
__/"'-...~<:_Paint
7.2.6
7.2.6.1
Description
2
Weight per Uter: Zinc dust-zinc oxide mixed primer
shall weigh not less than one and eight-tenths (1 .81
kilograms per Iller.
Ninety.elght {98)
percent min.
Forty-three {431 pen:ent
min.
TWentytt'ireel231
percent min.
- None
2
Condition in Container: The zinc OlCide vehicle shall
be thoroughly ground and mixed. It shall not be settled,
caked. or thickened to such a degree that it cannot be
redispersed easily with a paddle to a uniform and
homogenous state. It shall be readily Incorporated with
the zinc dust to form a smooth uniform paint of good
brushing consistency.
7.2.&.3
rcent
Water
Metallic zinc
SeventyfourJ741percent mlfl.
Zinc oxide
EiGhteen 118.1 ~rcent min
Metalllc zinc plus zinc Ninety-seven {97) perc ant
oxkfe
min.
None
--Sulfide sulfur
Table 7.2.&-3: Composition of Pigment for Zinc Dust-Zinc
Oxide Mixed Primer
7~
3
Coersa Particles: Coarse particles and skins retained
oo a forty-live thousandths (0.045) millimeter (No. 3251
sieve shall not exceed four (4) percent by weight based on
pigmenl4
Consistency: Consistency shall be not less than sixtyseven (671 nor more than eight-six (86) Krebs Unit (K.U,).
5
Dilution Stability: The mixed primer shall remain
stable and uniform after reduction with mineral spirits in
the proportions of eight {81 parts by volume of paint to
one 111 part by volume of mineral spirits. After standing
twenty-four (24) hours there shall be no curdling or
precipitation on the veh[cle.
7
Adhesion: After air"'tirying for eighteen {18) hours,
baking for three (31 hours at one hundred twenty-one
degrees Celsius {121"CI. a film of the mixed primer
brushed on a clean new galvanized iron panel, seventy
five (75) millimeters by one hundred fifty ( 150) millimeters,
shall cut loose In the form of a ribbon without flaking or
otherwise loosening from the panel when tested with a
knife blade.
9
Spraying Properties: The mixed primer when thinned
with not more than one (1 ) part by volume of mineral
spirits to eight (81 parts by volume of paint shall spray
satisfactorily, show no tendency to orange-peel, sag, creep,
or run. and shall show satisfactory spraying properties In
all other respects.
10 Drying Time-: The miKed primer shall be touch-dry in
not less than thirty (301 minutes nor more than four (41
hours and dryhl rd in not more than eighteen ( 18) hours
when applied as in FSS Test Method, Standard Number
141, Method 4061 .
Sultanate of Om on, Stoncbcd Spedf~r"""' for Rood r.. Bodge Conatrucdou ~10
7.2.7
Aluminum Paint
7.2.7.1
Description
Proportions
7.2.7.3
Mixing
Pigment
Vehicle
Non-volatile material in
vehicle
Phthalic anhydride
7.2.9.3
7.2.8
Maroon field coat paint shall weigh not less than one
and s~xty-seven hundredths (1.67) kilograms per liter.
7.2.8.1
Description
Proportions
7.2.9
7.2.9.1
Description
Compositon
Coat Paint
7.2.9.4
Coarse Partie! es
7.2.9.5
Consistency
7.2.9.6
Condition in Container
7.2.9.7
Skinning
7.2.9.8
Dilution Stability
7.2.9.9
Brushing Properties
75
~~
OGRLT
../"'.~<:,Paint
7.2,!MO
Spraying Properties
7.2.10.4
Drying Time
7.2.10
7.2.1 0.1
Description
7.2.10.2
Composition
7.2.10.3
Dark green finish coat paint shall weigh not less than
one and thlny-three hundredths (1.331 kilograms per liter.
7-6
Consi stency
Color
Coarse Particles
Conditi on in Container
Skinning
Dilution Stability
Spraying Properties
Drying Time
Sultanate of Oman, Stondord Spedfi'~Dill !Gt Road & BridgQ CaMm'<'lion 21!1D
Paint)
7.2.11
7.2.11.1
Description
7 .2.11.2
Requirements
7.2.12
Gloss Enamel
6
The Contractor shall supply manufacturer's samples,
specifications and chemical compositions of paint(s)
meeting the requirements of these specifications and
which correspond to the color and texture specified. A
minimum of five (5) samples per pay item shall be
provided, of which not more than three (3) shall be from
any one manufacturer. The Engineer shall select a
maximum of three (3) coatings per pay item for which trial
panels shall be constructed by the Contractor as specifi ad
herein.
7.2.12.1
Description
7.2.14
7.2.14.1
Description
Requirements
The paint shall conform to Federal Specification TTE-489, Class A, Air Drying. This enamel may be thinned
with Thinner; Federal Specification TT-T-291 E, Type II,
Grade A (Mineral Spirits).
7.2.13
Composition
Colors
Portland cement paint colors shall be as shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
11
~~
OORtT
./".~Vaint
7.2.15
7.2.16.2
7.2.16.1
Description
Single-component
polymer paints
shall be
pigmented solvent-based solutions of resins, such as
chlorineted rubber, styrene butadiene and vinyl chloride
vinyl acetate copolymers. Such 'rubber-based' paints shall
be of a formulation so as to possess a considerable degree
of flexibility and extensibility whel\ app!!ed to the specified
thickness, in order to maintain a continuous coating over
minor cracks which may exist or develop in the concrete
substrate.
1
Polymer latex paint shall conform to the US Federal
Specifications TT-P..()033 - Paint, Latex Base, Exterior, or
TT-P-960 - Paint Latex Base. for Exterior Surfaces and is
intended for use on properly prepared concrete surfaces,
not less than 3 weeks old, with normal, high or varying
moTsture content, on masonry surfaces, and on other
types of old paints. Application over other types of paint is
subject to the manufacturer's written instructions and
limitations, and to the approval of the Engineer. Polymer
latex paint is suitable for use on interior and exterior
concrete and masonry surfaces, below end above grade,
under normal service and climatic conditions. Where more
stringent requl remants are anticipated, preference shall ba
given to solvent-based polymer palnts, described under
Clause 7.2. 16.
7.2.15.2
Composition
Colors
7.2.16
Polymer Paint
7.2.16.1
Description
7-6
Composition
2
The paint formulation shall have a potential to resist
soiling and be cleanable w ith commercial detergents.
Thermoplastic formulations and formulations soluble in
organic solvents shall not be approved for use on surfaces
that need to be c!eaned with steam cleaning or strong
detergents and aggressive solve11ts.
3
Two-component polymer paints: One of the
components shall be a pigmented solution of a
compounded polymer, with or without solvent. such as
epoxy. urethane or polyester; the other component shall
contain a reactive chemical, the hardener. After mixing the
two components to the manufacturer's instructions,
application to the substrate and curing, the painted
surface shall be a hard, strong, chemical. and moisturereslstont film with excellent adhesion to the protected,
properly prep1red surface. The finished surface shall be
easy to clean, resistant to fungus and strong detergents,
end inert to heat and steam in order to be used as antigraffiti pe!nt. when required. Two-component epoxy
formulations shall not be used on surfaces that are
exposed to sunlight. In such cases. two-component
exterior grade urethane formulations (alfphatic grades)
shall be approved for use.
7.2.16.3
Colors
7.2.17
iii.
2
The paint may be t inted by using 'universal' or 'all
purpose' concentrates.
7.3
Construction Requirements
7.3.1
General
,..:.:....,.,.,
: . . ;.:. 'o; :.';.R::.; ood::..:r:...e::r:::.:..eon.
KIQo ==':'.r.
.;=::~:.a_i_n_t"')
X---~
7.3.2
Application
7.3.2.1
General
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
7.3.3
Concrete Surfaces
7.3.3.1
Preparation
1.
Concrete surfaces to receive paint shall be prepared
to ensure complete adhesion of the coating material.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
7-9
_]
~~
DfiAtr
~~Vaint
v.
vi.
vii.
viii,
lx.
x.
NO
7.3.3.2
Painting
J
ensure a complete chemical reaction between the
hardener and the polymer, power stirrers shall be used for
thorough mixing. The paint shall be used aher expiration
of the required induction period end within the expected
pot-life period of the mixed system, as specified by the
manufacturer. Should thinning or viscosity reduction be
necessary, only thinners recommended by the
manufacturer shall be used. Thinners shall be added only
aher the two components are blended.
Dry film thickness shall be not less than forty (401 microns
per coat. A minimum of two coats shall be applied,
excluding primer, unless otherwise shown on the plans or
recommended by the paint manufacturer for the intended
purpose.
4
All finished coatings shall be uniform in color and
texture, free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, etc.,
and shall match the color and texture of the approved
sample panel to the Engineer's satisfaction.
5
Should any coating, in the Engineer's opinion, be
non-uniform in color and/or texture or should there be
runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, etc., in the coating, the
Contractor shall propose remedial works for the
Engineer's approval. Should the Contractor's proposals be
unacceptable, or should the remedial works result in an
unsatisfactory finish. the Engineer shall require the
Contractor to:
Recoat the complete area affected; or
Remove, to the extent possible, the coating
from the affected area and reapply the coating.
The Engineer shall notify the Contractor which option he
requires and, in the case of a re-coating being
unsatisfactory, the Engineer shall require the Contractor to
remove, to the extent possible, the re-coating and the
original coating and reapply a new coating. All re-coating
works and removal and re-application of coatings shall be
at the Contractor's expense.
6
If the color of the coating departs from that of the
approved trial panel color to a degree which, in the
opinion of the Engineer, is unacceptable, the Contractor
shall stop application and shall demonstrate to the
Engineer's satisfaction that the coating formulation and/or
application method can be suitably adjusted to produce a
color matching that of the trial panel. If considered
necessary by the Engineer, the Contractor shall produce
additional trial panel(sl at his own expense to demonstrate
that a color match can be obtained.
7
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a satisfactory color
match cannot be obtai ned, the Engineer, at his option,
may require the Contractor to remove, to the extent
possible, the unacceptable coating applied to the
permanent works and/or to apply an alternative coating.
Such an alternative coating will be selected by the
Engineer on the basis of the previously prepared I rial
panels, except that where In the opinion of the Engineer
such trial panels are unacceptable, the Contractor shall
supply additional manufacturer's samples and trial panels
7.3.4
1
Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings, or in the
Special Specification, all new structural steel shall be
given three (31 coats of paint. The first coat shall be
applied immediately after shop fabrication is complete.
The second and third coats shall be applied after all
erection is complete, except that immediately following
the field riveting or bolting of members. the heads of field
rivets, bolts, and all abrasions of the shop coat due to
handling at the shop, shipment, erection, etc., and all field
erection marks shall be thoroughly covered with one ( 1)
coat of primer as specified for shop coat and permitted to
become thoroughly dry before the first field coat is applied.
2
All metal coated with impure or unauthorized paint
shall be thoroughly cleaned and repainted to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Prime coats of paint shall be
at least four hundredths (0.04) millimeter thick when dry
and each intermediate and finish coat of paint shall be at
least three hundredths (0.03) millimeter thick when dry.
No portion of the paint films shall be less than these
specified thicknesses. The film thickness shall be not so
great that either the appearance or service life of the paint
will be detrimentally affected.
7.3.5
7.3.5.1
Shop Cleaning
1
All surfaces of metal to be painted shall be
thoroughly cleaned of rust, loose mill scale, dirt, oil or
grease, and all other foreign substances. The removal of
rust, scala and dirt shall generally be done by the use of
metal brushes, scrapers, chisels, hammers, sandblasting,
or other effective means. Oil and grease may be removed
by the use of gasoline or benzene. Bristle or wood fiber
brushes shell be used for removing loose dirt. Unless
cleaning is to be done by sandblasting, all weld areas,
before cleaning is done, shall be neutralized with a proper
chemical. after which they shall be thoroughly rinsed with
water. All cleaning shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
7.3.5.2
Shop Painting
7-11
~~
Mlnitry of Ttonport
a.
CQn1munlcatron
OORl. T
~~<:,Paint
li.
iii.
iv.
v.
vl.
7.3.6
Field Coat
7.3.6.1
Field Cleaning
Field Painting
7t 2 .
7.3.7
7.3.7.1
Bridge Railings
Guardrail
7.3.8
~fot.~tnmo f01
vii.
viii.
7.3.9
7.4
Method of Measurement
3
Trial panels made by the Contractor to determine
suitability of surface preparation methods and of the
finished coating color and/or texture shall not be
measured for payment.
7.5
Basis of Payments
7.6
ii
(sq.m.)
(sq.m.)
(lin.m.)
Ref.
Trtle
8.1
Pipe Culverts
8.1.1
Genllf'lll
8.1.1.1
Description
8.1.1.2
8.1.1.3
Submittals
Installation and Checking
&.1.2
8.1.2.1
8.1.2.2
8.1.2.3
8.1.2.4
8.1.2.5
8.1.2.6
8.1.2.7
8.1.28
8.1.2.9
8.1.3
8.1.3.1
8.1.3.2
8.1.3.3
8.1 3.4
8.1 .3.5
8.1.4
Pege No.
M-'erl11t.
Delivery, Storage and H~mdling
.,
~1
8 1
8-1
8-1
8-1
8>1
811
8-1
8-1
.,.1
B-1
B-2
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-2
8.1.5
Method of Menurement
Baal of Payment
8.1.6
B-3
8-3
8-3
8.2
Storm Sewers
8--3
8.2 .1
8.2.1.1
Genllf'lll
Description
installation and Check:ng
8-3
8.2.1.2
8.2.1 .3
1..2-2
8.2.2.1
8.2.2.2
8.2.2.3
Submittals
Materia Ia
Delivery and Storage
Concrete 11nd Steel
Concrete PiP"
8-3
B-3
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-4
8-4
Ref.
Title
Page No.
8.2.2.4
uPVC Pipe
8.2.2.5
8.2.2.6
8.2.2.7
8.2.2.8
8.2.2.9
Surrounds
B tumen Emulsion
Pumping Plant
8.2.2.10
8.2.3
8.2.3 1
8.2.3.2
Construction Requirements
Excavation. Bedding 11nd Backfilling
Pipe Laying
8.2.3.3
Jointing of Pipes
8.2.3.4
8.2.3.5
8.2.3.6
8.2.3.7
8.2.3.8
Sewer Pipes
F.ield Testing: Generally
Air Testing of Pipelinllll
8.2.3.9
8.2.3.10
8.2.3.11
8.2.3.12
8.2.3.13
B-4
8-4
a...
8-5
85
85
85
8-5
B-5
85
85
8-6
8-6
B-6
8-6
86
8-6
87
87
8-7
8-7
8.2.6
Method of Measurement
Basil of Payment
8-7
8.2.6
8-8
8.3
8.2A
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.3.1
8.3.3.2
8.3.3.3
&-7
8-8
Description
8-8
M-'erlail
COIIIttuctlon Requirementl
8-8
8-9
Manholllll
8-9
89
8-9
Ref.
8.3.3.4
Title
Cleaning
Page No.
8-9
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
8-10
8-10
8.4
Drainage of Structures
8-10
8.4.1
Description
8-10
8.4.2
Materials
Gully end Channel Gratings
Bl-10
8.4.2,1
Method of Measurement
~~~s of Pll'f"**l
and,rames
8.4.2.2
8.4.2.3
8.4.3
8.4.4
8.4.5
8.4.8
Pipes
Drainege Beckflltl,g
Construction Requirements
Method of Measurement
Balis of PIIYment,
Items In the Bill of Quntltln
8-9
810
Bl-10
Bl-10
8-10
B-12
8-12
8-12
Drainage)
8.1
Pipe Culverts
8.1.1
General
8.1.1.1
Description
8.1.2.2
1
This Subsection describes requirements for
furnishing all materials, constructing and installing
concrete and steel pipe culverts including excavation,
bedding and backfilling and all work described in this
Section of the Specification and as shown on the
Drawings.
8.1.1.2
Submittals
1
Coordination Drawings: Submit drawings showing
culverts and major system components. Indicate interface
and spatial relationship between culverts, system
components, adjacent utilities, and proximate structures.
2
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of culverts
including plan layout and locations, types, sizes, capacities,
and flow characteristics in accordance with the
requirements of this Specification Sub-section 1.11.
AsBuilt Drawings: At project close-out, submit
3
record drawings of installed culverts, in accordance with
requirements of this Specification, Subsection 1.11.
4
Certificate of Compliance: Submit certificates of
compliance required by the Client Authority and as
directed by the Engineer.
8.1 .1.3
1
The work shall be supervised by qualified
representatives of the Contractor and full facilities and
assistance shall be provided by the Contractor to enable
the Engineer to inspect or check the work at any time.
Such inspection or checking shall in no way relieve the
Contractor from any of his obligations.
2
The Contractor shall be responsible for making minor
adjustments to the location of work as necessary to suit
site constraints and road alignment and profile subject to
the approval of the Engineer.
1
Reinforced concrete pipe shall meet the requirements
of Volume 2 of the Highway Design Standards and shall
comply with BS 5911 1, BS EN 1916 Class H, ASTM C7602
Class IV or DIN V 1201 and DIN EN 1916. Cement used in
manufacture shall be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN
1971.
2
Joints shall be gasket type with flexible spigots and
sockets. The shape of the joint shall be designed to
prevent any movement of the gasket during assembly and
to produce full watertightness. Rubber gasket shall be to
ISO 4633 orBS EN 6812.
3
Manufactured pipe shall, if required by the Engineer,
be tested, prior to delivery to site, for structural strength,
crushing strength and absorption. The manufacturer's
specification and certificate shall be submitted for prior
approval before pipes are delivered to the site.
4
Pipes that fail to meet the strength requirements may,
with the approval of the Engineer, be incorporated in the
work provided the following requirements are met.
i.
The strength does not fall below 80% of that
specified.
ii.
The pi pes are clearly marked and stored
separately from pipes which fully comply with
strength requirements.
iii.
The pipes are bedded in Class 15 concrete.
If understrength pipes are installed with pipes fully
5
complying with the strength requirements, the whole run
shall be classified as under-strength for record purposes.
8.1.2.3
Materials
8.1.2.1
1
Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps.
Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and
handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent
entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
fittings,
end
specialties
from
4
Manufacturer's recommendations on handling,
repairing, laying, jointing, anchoring, cutting and other
works for pipes and fittings era to be strictly followed.
1
Unreinforced concrete pipe shall meet the
requirements of the Highway Design Standards end shall
comply with BS 59111, AASHTO M 86M I M 86, DIN V
1201 and DIN EN 1916 or ASTM Cl4M and with Paragraph
8.1.2.2 items 2 to 5. Class shall be as designated on
drawings. Cement used in manufacture shall be ordinary
Portland cement to BS EN 1971.
8.1.2.4
8.1.2
1
Reinforced concrete arch culvert shall comply with
AASHTO M 206M I M 206 or ASTM C50602. Unless
otherwise specified Class AIV shall be used for spans of
1300mm or less, and Class Alll for larger spans.
8.1.2.5
1
Reinforced concrete elliptical culverts shall be t o
AASHTO M 207M I M 207 or ASTM C507M02. Their Class
shall be as designated on drawings.
8.1.2.6
~
,.A./
DCiRLT
../""'.
~<Drainage
8.1.3
Construction Requirements
8.1.3.1
8.1.3.2
Pipe Laying
82
8.1.3.3
4
Multiple pipe culverts, unless otherwise shown on
the Drawi ngs, shall be laid w ith one-half diameter of pipe
or a mini mum of 300mm, whichever i s greater, between
the pipes.
8.1.3.4
2
Multiple culverts, unless shown otherwise on the
Drawings. shall be laid with one-half span of pipe or 1
minimum of 300mm whichever is the greater, between
pipes.
3
The Contractor shall examine material to ensure
internal coating or lining and outer coating or sheathing
are undamaged. If damaged, the Contractor shall make
good or dispose or as directed. Damage to bituminous or
epoxy resin coati ngs may be repaired on site by
application of a repair materi al of a brand and type
approved by the Engineer.
Pipes having any localized
bends in excess of 5% of the nominal pipe diameter or
dents in excess of 13mm depth wib be rejected. Pipes
rejected because of these defects may be used If
satisfactorily repaired and approved by the Engi neer.
Sultanata of Oman. Slndrd Specifications lor Road & Bndg C..nsltuc:ttOn 2010
Drainage)
8.1.3.5
8.1.6
i.
ii.
2
When the Contractor elects to construct the pipe in a
trench with no external vertical forms, 40mm of additional
concrete cover to the reinforcement steel shall be
provided.
iii.
iv.
3
Longitudinal construction joints will only be
permitted as shown on the Drawings.
Transverse
construction joints will be permitted provided prior
approval is obtained from the Engineer.
v.
4
Forms for cast-in-situ pipe shall be approved prior to
their use. Inside pipe forms shall be suitably unyielding
during placement of concrete. Interior arch forms may be
removed after 72 hours if approved by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall take precautions when removing forms to
protect the culvert from damage. Backfilling shall not
commence until tests indicate the concrete has attained
strength of 50% of the requirement for its Class.
vii.
8.1.4
Method of Measurement
8.1.5
Basis of Payment
vi.
8.2
Storm Sewers
8.2.1
General
8.2.1.1
Description
(lin.m.)
{lin.m.)
(lin.m.)
(lin.m.)
(lin.m.)
(lin.m.)
[lin.m)
8.2.1.2
comply to the
8.2.1.3
Submittals
~~
OGRlT
..../"-..~<:prainage
8.2.2
Materials
8.2.2.1
8.2.2.2
8.2.2.3
Concrete Pipes
8.2.2.4
uPVC Pipe
8.2.2.5
&-4
8.2.2.6
GRP Pipes
2
Pipe and fittings shall include a corrosion resist9nt
liner, a structural wall and a resin rich exterior surface.
The liner shall have a nominal thickness of 1.0 mm.
The liner surface shall be reinforced with C glass The
remainder of the liner thickness shall be reinforced with an
acid resistant chopped E glass strand or mat.
4
The pipe structural wall shall consist of gLass
reinforcement, and fine silica sand, all impregnated with
resin. The fine silica sand shall be added to the structural
layer to achieve the design thickness for the required
stiffness specified such that the overall hoop flexural
modulus (EI for pipe is not less than 24 GN/m'. Smca sand
and filler content shall not eKceed 50%.
5
Pipes shall be provided with a resin rich outer layer
reinforced with one layer of C glass veil. The exterior layer
shall have a minimum thickness of 0.2 mm. The layer shall
be resin rich and reinforced with one layer of C glass.
6
The resin used for the corrosion resistant liner of the
pipe and fittings sha ll be high grade polyester resin
(isophthalic or bener) type. For the structural wall and
exterior layer of the pipe a high grade isophthalic
polyester resin shall be used. No dark pigments shall be
used in the pipe or finings.
~~
~~<Drainage
8.2.2.7
3
The Contractor shall Insert two hardwood folding
wedges (of a width equal to the width of the concrete
block) between the body of the pipe and block, and drive
them together until the pipe is brought to the exact level
required. The Contractor shall leave blocks and wedges
undisturbed while pipes are being jointed and the
concrete bed and haunch or surround are baing placed.
The Contractor shall ensure blocks and wedges are of
sufficient size and strength to prevent senlemant of pipes.
The Contractor shall leave sufficient space to enable joints
to be made, tested and inspected.
2
Unless otherwise indicated, pipes and fittings shall
be Extra Strength and shall comply with absorption tests
made In accordance with BS 65.
3
Pipes shall be supplied with approved flexible and
telescopic rubber ring joints which shall be capable of
withstanding the specified tests pressures applied both
internally and externally.
4
Junctions on clay pipe sewers shall be of similar
material and suitable for use with flexibly jointed pipes.
5
Before any length of pipe is laid, it shall be Inspected
and stood or slung vertically at the side of the trench
and 'rung' with a wooden mallet. Any damaged or cracked
pipe shall be rejected.
6
Where shown on the Drawings, pipes for use in the
construction of drains shall be British Standard Surface
Water pipes glazed or unglazed manufactured in
accordance with the requirements of BS 65, with Type 2
sockets or plain ended supplied with sleeve couplings.
8.2.2.8
8.2.2.9
Bitumen Emulsion
8.2.2.10
Pumping Plant
8.2.3
Construction Requirements
8.2.3.1
8.2.3.2
Pipe Laying
2
For pipe on a concrete bed or surround, the
Contractor shall provide rectangu Ia r blocks of concrete
Class 25, made in approved moulds at least 14 days before
use, and approved hardwood folding wedges. The
Contractor shall provide two concrete blocks for each pipe,
8-5
4
The Contractor shall lay pipes on an even formation
true to grade and line, with sockets facing up the gradient
5
Tolerances shall be 6 mm in level and 25 mm in line
between manholes or access points unless otherwise
specified. Where pipe is to be constructed in straight lines
between manholes the length will not be accepted if a
light at each manhole cannot be seen from adjacent
manholes.
8.2.3.3
Jointing of Pipes
3
The inside of the joint shall be finished smooth and
wiped clean. The mortar on the outside shall, after its
initial set, be protected from the sun. Plastic joint
compound may be used in lieu of Portland cement mortar,
in which case it shall be prepared in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
4
Synthetic or rubber joint rings shall be stored until
needed in a cool place away from direct sunlight.
5
Properly fined temporary wooden stoppers shall be
used to close the ends of uncompleted pipe lines. The
stoppers shall only be removed when pipes are being laid
and jointed.
6
The Contractor shall not deflect flexible joints beyond
maximum permissible angles given by manufacturer
and/or relevant Standards.
~~
DGAtl
~~<Drainage
7
The Contractor shall strictly comply with special
instructions issued by rna nufacturers of proprietary jo' nts
when laying and jointing.
8
The Contractor shall joint di ffering pipe and fitting
material with adaptors as recommended by the pipe
manufacturer.
8.2.3.4
8.2.3.5
Floatation
8.2.3.8
2
The Contractor shall remove: any pipe that hes
floated, correct the bedding and relay.
6
The Contrec:tor shall apply pressure by manually
operat ed test pump or, i n the cese of large d ia meter mains,
by power driven test pump, if approved.
8.2.3.6
7
The Contractor shall examine exposed joints and
repair visible teaks.
&-6
A ir Testing of Pipelines
Sultonnta of Oma11. St.ndml Spocl!icot ons tar Rcx>d & Bridjj Construction 2010
Drainage)
8.2.3.10
5
The section shall be deemed to have failed if
allowable infiltration of water is exceeded. The Contractor
shall locate source of excessive infiltration by approved
means i.e. traversing light and mirrors or inflated rubber
plug etc, make good, and repeat tests until successful.
8.2.3.12
2
Pipes not passing the deflection tests at Stage 2 or
Stage 3 will be removed and replaced.
8.2.3.13
Hydraulic Individual
Exceeding 1000 mm
The Contractor shall carry out procedures to BS 5886,
Type 2 testing after backfilling, or equivalent. The
Contractor shall pressurize the joint to 2 bars and wait for
10 minutes then re-pressurize to 2 bars and again wait for
5 minutes. No pressure drop should be observed at the
end of the latter period. If a pressure drop is observed, the
Contractor shall remedy the failed joint to the Engineer's
approval
8.2.4
Method of Measurement
8.2.5
Basis of Payment
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
8-7
~
~
DCiRl t
~~<prainage
ix.
8.2.6
i.
llin.m.)
8.3
8.3.1
Description
8.3.2
Materials
8-8
9
GRP ladders shall be obtained from ao approved
experieoced m anufacturer, fabricated to ao approved
pattern and purpose made to suit the depth of each
installation as shown on the Drawings. The ladders shall
be drilled for wan fixing at both ends and additional
Intermediate fixing connections shell be provided at
centers not greater than 1.5 meters. Rungs shall be at 300
mm centers and at a distance of not less than 150 mm
from the wa D.
I.
The resins. glasses and synthetic fabrics used
In the manufacture of the ladders sha!l be
chosen to produce a chemically resistant
product with a resin-rich surface layer suitable
for use in aggressive atmospheres likery to the
encountered in sewers and sewage pumping
stations.
ii.
Rungs of tubular construction sha ll be no less
than 30 mm outer diameter and stringers shall
be of a rectangular or channel section, no less
than 70 mm x 25 mm in size. The upper face of
non-tubular rungs shall be finished with a non
slip surface such as silica sand. All remaining
surfaces shall be free of sharp edges,
protrusions et c.
iii.
Each rung shall be able to withstand a point
load of 5000 N.
iv.
When supported horizontally over a span of 1
m with the climbing face uppermost and with a
load of 1000 N applied at the centre of the span
the ladder shall not deflect more than 15 mm at
the point of applicat ion of the load and shall
show no permanent deflectio n after removal of
the load. Each ladder fiXing shall be capable of
withstanding shear and pull-out loads of 5000
N.
v.
A ll ladders shall comply with BS 5395: Part 3.
All fixings shall be stainless steel.
10 Fixing bolts shall be steel, type suitable for particular
purpose and use and to approva l When used to fix
galvanized material, washers are to be galvanized and
fixing bolts and nuts cut to pre-plating limits and
electroplated with zinc to BS ENISO 2081.
11 Steel castings shall be mild to medium strength
castings and shall conform to AASHTO M103MIM103.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or instructed by
the Engineer, castings shall be grade 6535 fully annealed.
Steel castings shall conform to t he dimensions shown on
the Drawings. Test bars shall be prepared and tested as
specified In AASHTO M103MIM103.
12 Mortar for masonry shall be mixed in the proportions
1:3 (cement~sand) by volume, or 1:4 :4 lcement:lime: sand).
The sand shall be well graded.
13 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
m anufacturers' Ce11ificates of Guarantee for steel, cast
Iron cast steel and wrought iron parts, stating that the
materials supplied meet the applicable AASHTO or ASTM
specification and Standards. The submission of such test
certificates shall not relieve the Contractor of his
Drainage)
8.3.3
Construction Requirements
iv.
8.3.3.2
5.3.3.
8.3.3.1
Manholes
5
Internal faces of manholes and chambers shall be
coated with four coats of coal tar epoxy paint, 70% epoxy
and 30% coal tar. The coating shall be applied by brush in
accordance with manufacturer's Instructions. Minimum
thickness shall be 1000 microns.
6
Adjustment of level shall be accomplished with top
courses of brickwork or concrete rings after completion of
surround] ng I evels. Final levels sha II be even and accurate.
7
8.3.3.3
Ironwork
8.3.3.4
Cleaning
Manholes,
ditch inlets and
on completion,
the time of final
8.3.4
Method of Measurement
89
~
~
OGRLT
~
~(prainage
8.3.5
Pi.,e Stendlirii
Ductile Iron
BS EN545 [11
BS EN 1452(91 or to DIN 806118062,
Series 4 end 6 -
uPVC
Polyethylena
(PEl
Basis of Payment
8.3.6
P.l.,_ Mal!rf!l
PIPe Material
uPVC
kglcm~
Polvathvlane (PEl
<
nr.
ii.
nr.
Pipe Standard
DIN 8061 Class 10
V'rtrlfied clay
---
2
Pipes for filter drains shall be to the standards listed
In Tab!e 8.4.2.2 or equivalent and as specified in Clausa
8.2.2.
i.
AASHTO M175MIM175
or ASTM C444M
Table 8 4.2.2: Drainage Pipe Standards for Filter Drains
Concrate
iii.
nr.
iv,
nr.
8.4.2.3
v.
nr.
vi.
lin.m.
8.4
Drainage of Structures
8.4.1
Description
8.4.2
Materi als
8.4.2.1
8.4.2.2
Pipes
Pipes used in bridge decks shall be to the
standards listed In Table 8.4.2.1 or equivalent
with a minimum internal diameter of 100mm.
810
Drainage Backfilling
2
Granular backfill to structures shall be natural sand
and gravel or with a particle size distribution as given in
Table 8.4.2.3.
AASHTO lievelize
75.0 mm
100
37.6 mm
85 100
9.5mm
45-100
4.75 mm
25-85
8.4.3
Construction Requirements
~
~
/".~<Drainage
2
Pipe joints in bridge decks shall be flexible and
watertight Seals and gaskets shell be appropriate for the
pipe material used.
3
Joints between bridge deck waterproofing and
drai nag a components shall be watertight and the sealants
shall be compatible with the waterproofing system
&-l 1
Con;tr<JC~jon
20 IG
Drainage)
4
Granular drainage b!lckfill shall be placed and
compacted in accordance with Sub-section 2.5, Paragraph
2.5.4.2.
15
Drainage pipes and connections in bridge decks shall
be tested for water tightness on completion in accordance
with Clause 8.2.3.
6
AIJ excavation and backfill shall conform to the
requirements of Sub-Sections 2.3 - 'Roadway Excavation'
and 2.7 - 'Excavation and Backfilling for Structures,
7
PE pipes instillation shell be in accordance to ASTM
D2321 and manufacturer's recommendations.
8.4.4
Method of Measurement
8.4.5
Basis of Payment
8.4.6
i.
ii.
IY.
lin.m.
iii.
Permeable backfilling
cu.m.
iv.
Granular backfill
cu.m .
3-12
Sultanate
Ref.
'Tit'-
9.1
Riprap
9.1.1
Page No.
Ref.
9-1
9.4.3.3
Description
9-1
9.4.3.4
9.1.2
Materials
9-1
9 .1.3
Construction Requlnunents
9-1
9-2
9.4.3.5
9;4.3.6
9.4.3.7
9.1.4
9.1.5
Method of Mesaurement
Title
Page No.
9-6
97
Tensioning Tendons
97
9-8
9-2
9.4.3.8
9-8
9-2
9.4.3.9
97
9.1.6
Basis of Payment
Items In the SHI of Quantities
9.2
Gablons
9-2
and Mortar
98
9.4.3.10
Reinforcement Mesh
99
9.2.1
Description
9-2
9.4.3. 11
Paint
9.2.2
Materials
9-2
9.4.3.12
Wire Natting
9-9
9-9
9.2.3
Construction Requirements
9-2
9.4.4
9.2.4
Method of Measurement
9.4.6
Method of Mauurement
BasTa of Payment
9,2.6
BuTs of Payment
9-3
9-3
9.4.6
9.2.8
9-3
9.6
Rock Grouting
9.3
Slope Netting
9.3.1
Description
9.3.2
9-6
9-10
9-10
9-10
9-10
9.6.1
Description
9-10
9.6.2
Materials
9-10
Materials
9-3
9-3
9.6.3
Construction Requirements
9-10
9.3.3
Construction Requirements
9-3
9.6.4
Method of Measurement
9.3.4
9.3.5
Method of Measurement
9.5.6
Baals of Payment
9-11
9-12
Basis of Payment
9-3
9-3
9.5.6
9-12
9.3.6
9-4
9.6
9.4
9-4
9.6.1
Delcriptlon
9-12
9.4.1
Description
9-4
9.8.2
Materials
9.4.2
Materia Ia
9-12
9-4
9.6.21
Concrete
9-12
9-12
9.4.2.1
Cement Grout
9-4
9.6.2.2
Reinforcement
9 12
9.4.2.2
9-4
9.6.3
9.4.2.3
9-4
9.6.4
Consln.lctlon Requirements
Method of Measurement
9.4.2.4
9-4
9.6.5
Basis of Payment
9.4.2.5
9.4.2.6
Drain Holes
9-4
9.6.6
Roek Anchors
9.7
9.4.2.7
9-4
95
9-5
9.7.1
Oeterfptlon
9-5
9.7.2
Materials
9.4!2.8
9.4.3
9.4.3.1
9.4.3.2
Wire Netting
Conltructlon Requirements
General
Rock Bolting Procedures
95
95
9.7. 2.1
Sacks
9.7.2.2
Concrete
9-12
9-12
9-12
9-12
9-12
9-12
9-12
912
9--12
Ref.
ntle
F?age No.
Ref.
9.7.3
Construction Requirements
9-12
9.7.4
Method of Measurement
9-13
9.7.6
9.7.6
Bests of Payment
9-13
9-13
9.11.3.3
9-13
9>11.3.4
9.8
9.8.1
9.8.2
9.8.3
Description
Mstariale
9-13
8-13
Construction Requirements
9-13
8-13
8-13
9-13
9.8.4
Method of Measurement
9.8.6
9.8.6
Bella of Payment
Items In the Bill of Quantities
9.9
Ditch Unlng
9.9.1
9.9.2
Description
Mlltetiala
9-13
9-13
9.9.3
Construction Requirements
8-13
9.9.3.1
9.9.3..2
9,9.3.3
General
P.recast Slabs
Stone Ditch Lining and Wash Checks
9-13
9.11.3.2
Title
Page No.
S.16
Materiels
Stabtliution With Vegetative
916
g-16
Treatment
Blankets
9.11.4
9.11.6
Belle of Payment
9-18
8-16
9.11.6
8-16
9.12
9.12.1
Method of Measurement
9-16
Delscriptlon
8-16
~rei
~16
9.12.1.2
Standards and Codes
Mllterlala
9.12.2
General
9.12.2.1
8-17
9.12.1.1
9.12.2.2
9.12.2.3
9.12.2.4
9-18
9.12.2.6
8-18
fiasteners
9-19
9-19
Method of Measurement
9.9.6
9.9.6
Bells of Payment
9-14
9-14
9-14
9.12.2.6
9.12.2.7
9.10
Filter Laye~ns
9-14
9.12.2.8
9.10.1
9.10.2
Descrlptlon
9.12.2.9
Mlltetiels
9-14
9-14
9.10.3
Construction Requirements
9-14
Panels)
Granular Filter
1114
Fabric Membrane
9.10.3.2
9.10.4
Method of M!!5Urement
9-16
9-15
9.10.5
Bests of Payment
9-16
9.10.6
9-16
9.11
9-16
9.11. 1
OeeenptJon
9-16
Materials
9.11.2
Fencas
9.11.2.1
9.11.2.2
Bituminous Materials
9-16
9-15
9.11 .2.3
9.11.2.4
9.11.2.5
Vegetative Materials
Water
Blanket Covers
Construction Requirements
9.11.3
9.11.3.1
F.enclng
11-1'7
913
914
9-14
9.9.4
s.1o.:u-
917
915
915
9-15
9-15
9-16
9-15
9-17
9-18
9-19
9.12.3
ConlbUctlon Requirements
9J12.3.1
Wall Excavat!OI'
9YI2.3.2
F.oundatlon heparation
g.19
9-20
9 20
9-20
9.12.3.3
920
9.12.3.4
9.12.3.5
BaciCtiU Placement
920
9-20
Trial Embankment
9.12.4
Monitoring
General
9.12.4.1
$--21
9J12.4.~
Selected Backfill
921
9 -21
!M2.4.3
9;12.4.4
9.12.4.5
Settlements
9l21
l-:lorizontel Displacements
Durability
921
9-21
Testing F.requency
9-21
9.12.4.8
9.12.6
9.12-6
9.12.7
Method of Measurement
9-22
BeaTa of Payment
9-22
9-22
Ref.
Title
9.13
Coastal Protectlon
Pa No.
922
Dnc:rtption
t-22
9.13.2
Mlterials
t-23
9.13.2.1
Quarried Stone for Armour I.JJyers and
9.13.1
9.13.2.2
Underlayers
Core Material
9.13.2.3
Filter Flbnc - Geotextiln
9 .13.3
Construction Requlrementa
9-23
9-23
9-24
t-24
9.13.3.1
General
924
9.13.3.2
9. 13.3.3
924
9.13.3.4
Stones
Survaying Technique
9.13.3.5
t.1:S.4
9.13.4.1
9.13.4.2
9.13.4.3
9.14.4.4
8.13.6
9.13.5.1
9.115.2
9.13.6.3
Geotextiles
Mttflod of Measurement
t-25
9-25
&-25
t-M
..21
1-21
928
9.13.5.4
Febrics and membranes! Geotextilel
9.13.1
hems In the Bill of Quantities
...:ze
9.1
Rip rap
9.1.1
Description
9.1.2
Materials
% ofTotal
Wliaht
Smallefthan
Weight
Shown
Claaa
A
50
20
100
20
5
5
1
ct.~ B
Clua C
ClaaD
200
1000
400
100 20
5,000
2,000
95=100
50-100
().50
500
().10
100
Table 9.1.2.1: Classes of riprap stones and rocks
5
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or
directed by the Engineer. stones for loose and mortared
riprap shall conform to Class B gradation. Stones shall
generally weigh between 20 and 70 kg. with at least 60%
weighing more than 45 kg.. Nevertheless, any of the
classes shown in Table 9.1. 2.1 above can be used for loose
riprap, as indicated on the drawings. For mortared riprap,
stones of classes A or B only can be used, as indicated on
the Drawings.
6
Mortar for mortared riprap sha II consist of 1 pert
Portland cement to 3 parts sand by volume. Water added
shall be the least amount which will yield a workable mix.
Send and cement shall conform to the relevant
requirements of Sub-section 5,1. The 28 day compressive
strength of the mortar shall be not less then 15 MPa
measured in accordance with BS 1881, Part 108.
7
Fi Iter material for use under loose or mortared riprap.
as shown on the Drawings shall comply with the
requirements of Sub-section 9.10 Fi Iter Layers".
8
Expansion joint filler shall be rotproof and of the
preformed, non-extruding, resilient type made with a
bituminous fiber and shall conform to the requirements of
9.1.3
Construction Requirements
91
~~
DGFU.T
9.1.4
Method of Measurement
9.1.5
Basis of Payment
9.1.6
i,
ii.
ili.
iv.
9.2
Gabions
9.2.1
Description
6
Where shown on the Drawings wire shall be coated
w ith a minimum thickness of 0.55mm of dark green or
black PVC. or any other color to the approval of the
Engineer, which shall be capable of resisting the effects of
Immersion In sea water and exposure to ultra violet light
and abrasion, when tested for a period not less than 3000
hours in accordancewlth ASTM Test G23.
1
Stones for gabion fining shall be hard, sound,
durable and highly resistant to erosion, to the approval of
the Engineer. The specific gravity of the stones shall be
not less than 2.5. The stone size distribution in each
Individual box shall be as given 1n Table 9.2.2.1 .
2
Wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall be
mild steel to ASTM A390 Class 3 or to BS 1052 having an
average tensile strength, before coating of 380 to
500Nfmm2. The core wire diameter shall be 3.00 mm
before galvanizing. Galvanizing shan comply with BS 443.
3
Non.metalllc material for gabion boxes, such as
extruded polypropylene, may be proposed for the
% of
totll-lby no.)
80 125
7% maximum
125-200
200250
5% maximum
"' of
tot:: lbV
Constituents
M8terf.l Type
Sand (Smm
nominal size)
Natural sand or
crushed rock
55-72
Bitumen
80-100 Pen
15-18
Filler
Portland
cement or
hvdrated lime
13-16
Materials
9-2
5
The edges of gabion panels shall be selvedged to
prevent unraveling of the mesh. Steel wire core used for
selvedges shal have a nominal diameter of not less than
3.5mm. Lacing wire shall have a nomi nal diameter of not
less than 2.2mm for the wire core. Wire for selvedges and
lacing shall otherwise comply with the same specification
for the wire used in the mesh.
{cu.m l
(cu.ml
(sq.ml
{sq.ml
9.2.2
4
Gabion dimensi ons shall be as shown on the
Drawings. A tolerance of :t5,. on width and hei ght, and
:t3% on length shall be allowed. Gabion shall have
diaphragms at 1m centers.
Size ohtonlmm)
m-.
9.2.3
Construction Requirements
1
Gablons shall be placed and built to the lines, levels
and patterns shown on the Drawings, on a prepared
SL>IIo11a1v "' Oman. Sr~ndord Spedf.utiDns lot Road & Bridge Constrooion 20 Ia
9.2.4
Method of Measurement
9.2.5
Basis of Payment
9.2.6
r.
il.
iii.
9.3
Slope Netting
9.3.1
Description
(cu.m)
(cu.m)
(cu.m)
9.3.2
Materials
9.3.3
Construction Requirements
9.3.4
Method of Measurement
9.3.5
Basis of Payment
93
~~
/""-~<:slope
9.3.6
3
Rock bolts may consist of tensioned or untensioned
dowel bars anchored by resin or grout or mechanically
anchored.
i.
(sq.m)
9.4
9.4.1
Description
9.4.2
Materials
9.4.2.1
Cement Grout
9.4.2.2
9-<l
4
Protection of rock bolts against corrosion shaD be as
shown on Drawings.
9.4.2.3
2
If the Engineer so directs, rock bolts shall be de
bonded along the length of bar which is not required for
anchorage purposes by means of a suitable plastic sheath
preventing the formation of 11 bond between the grout and
the bar.
3
If untensioned dowel bars are used, all voids shan be
completely filled with grout.
4
If resin-anchored rock bolts are used, the tests
specified in ASTM 04435 shall be carried out. The
Contractor shall ensure that the resin is not adversely
affected by the cement grout.
9.4.2.4
9.4.2.5
Drain Holes
9.4.2.6
Rock Anchors
Sult.,nnta or Omon. Srandard Spec r<c:oliono lor Road & BMge Cons:tuttion 2'J10
9.4.2.7
Thicknnaup
to250mm
12.5 mm (112in.J
Thlcknea
IIXCIIIIda 250
mm
100
100
4.75 mm(No.4)
95-100
- 65-82
2.36 mm(No. BI
8095
45-68
1.18 mm (No.16)
4580
3053
30-60
2038
10.30
7-22
210
210
03
B
Prior to proceeding with the shotcreting works, the
Contractor shall prepare three test panels for approval,
using the proposed materials, mix design and equipment.
Each test panel shall be approximately 750mm square,
using plywood or other similar material for the back form
against which the shotcrete is to be sprayed.
The
thickness of sprayed material shall be a minimum of
75mm or the thickness that is to be used in the structure,
whichever is greater.
9
After curing the test panels, cores shall be taken for
compression testing at 7 and 28 days. The cores shall be
at least 75mm in diameter and shall be measured and
tested in accordance with AASHTO T 22. In addition to
compression testing, the cores shall be carefully examined
visually for soundness or evidence of non-uniformity in
the cons'stency of the concrete or mortar.
9.4.2.8
Wire Netting
9.4.3
Construction Requirements
9.4.3.1
General
90-100
,,
0.3
9.4.3.2
' V~
C:o~=nlcnt;ona
DCiRlT
9-6
9.4.3.3
Sultnnnt" ol Omon. S:ondord Sped!.c:.tJc"" lot RG.ld & Brldgo C<lna:ra<tion 2'J I 0
4
During construction approximately 5% of all bolt
types shall be tested to twice the specified working load . If
significant failures are obtained in the tests results, the
Contractor shall carry out further tests end shell take
approved remedial measures as directed by the Engineer.
6
Pre-stressing bars as delivered shall be straight. Any
small adjustments for straightness necessary on Site shell
be made by hand under the supervision of the Engineer.
Bars bent in the threaded portion will be rejected. Any
straightening of bars shall be carried out cold.
5
A protective barrier (wire netting) shall be erected
around the testing equipment to protect and safeguard
against any injury to any personnel involved in the testing
works and any other measures as deemed necessary by
the Engineer.
9.4.3.4
8
The tendon or tendons shall be accurately located
and maintained in position. Spacers are to be used to
keep the tendons in their correct position in the borehole.
2
If, in the Engineer's opinion, en unacceptably high
percentage of the initial 10% selection of bolts is not fully
grouted along their length, tha Engineer will require
further tests to be carried out.
9
The tendon or tendons shall terminate at the back of
the hole in the rock secured in a ribbed steel cylindrical
anchorage block or be grouted Into pi ace over the
'anchorage length' defined for the working load required.
The end of the borehole shall be filled with a polyester
resin or cement mortar. The length of anchorage shall be
sufficient to take the load on the tendons with a safety
factor of 2. The remaining length of tendon, !the free
length) shall be encased In a corrosion-protected grease
packed, plastic debondi ng sheet.
9.4.3.5
9.4.3.6
Tensioning Tendons
~
/'..../
Commmle~~tlon DGRLT
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
xii.
xiil.
9.4.3.7
9-6
3
Grouting procedures, injection of grout and strength
of grout shall be as specified for rock bolting.
9.4.3.8
9.4.3.9
Sultanata of OmGn, Stondtd Spodr:c.Uo!\0 lot ~lad & Btl'dge Conouuctlon 2<110
8
Where necessary a layer of sprayed concrete or
mortar may be covered by succeeding layers, but it shall
first be allowed to take its initial set. All laitance, loose
material and rebound must first be removed. Remove any
laitance, which has taken final set by grit blasting. Finally
clean and wet the surface using adequate blast of air and
water. The time between applications of successive layer
shall not exceed 24 hours. A longer break may be
accepted if it can be shown by tests that sufficient bond
can be achieved
9
Under no circumstances shall rebound material be
worked back into the construction.
Keep the work
continually free of rebounded material, by use of a high
pressure air jet or any other necessary means.
10 The distance of the nozzle from the work shall be
between 600mm and 1000mm. It shall be, as a general
rule, aimed perpendicu Jar to the application surface.
Commence application for vertical or near vertical
surfaces, at the bottom.
Embed completely the
reinforcement, at least, in the first layer.
11 Provide suitable screening of the nozzle and the
application surface during windy and draughty conditions.
12 Keep the spraying equipment in good condition by
cleaning frequently. This shall be done at feast once per
shift. The spraying nozzle shall be in such condition that
an even and continuous flow of material is obtained.
Change nozzla cover as soon as excessive wear is found in
the cover. The arrangement for the addition of water at
the nozzle must give a uniform wetting of the material. If
the dry mix process is used, add liquid admixtures, if
approved, with the mixing water at the nozzle. If dry
admixture is used, add it into the dry mix at the latest
possible time. In either case, employ accurately calibrated
and adjustable mechanical means to dispense the
admixture in the correct approved proportions.
13 The capacity of the compressor pi ant end water
supply shall be large enough to ensure a constant and
sufficiently high pressure. The water pressure should be
somewhat higher than the air pressure. Manometers
should be provided to measure the air and water pressure.
14 Damp cure sprayed concrete or mortar for at least 7
days.
9.4.3.11
9.4.3.12
Reinforcement Mesh
Paint
g.g
~~
9.4.4
9.5
Method of Measurement
9.4.5
Basis of Payment
9.4.6
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
910
(lin.ml
(lin.ml
(cu.ml
(cu.m)
(sq.ml
(sq.m)
(sq.ml
Rock Grouting
9.5.1
Description
9.5.2
Materials
1
Grout shall consist of a mixture of cement and water.
For grouting of large holes fine sand aggregate passing
1.18mm AASHTO standard sieve may be added if
approved by the Engineer. Chemical admixture and filler
may only be used with prior approval of the Engineer.
2
The compressive strength of the grout measured in
accordance with BS 1881 shaD exceed 15 MPa at 7 days.
3
Grout mixes shell have the mi nimum cement content
consistent with the required workability. The grout shall
not be subject to bleeding in excess of 2% after 3 hours.
nor 4% maximum, when measured at 18'C in a covered
cylinder approximately 100 mm diameter with 11 height of
grout of approximately 100 mm, and the water shall be
reabsorbed bv the grout during the 24 hours after mixing.
9.5.3
Construction Requirements
I.
ii.
iii.
Drilling of holes
Washing of holes
Water testing
lv.
Pressure grouting
6
The hole spacing shall normally be 1.6m to 5.0m with
additional holes as required to intersect individual weaker
areas. Hole depth shell be limited to the range 3-10m and
hole diameter shall be within the range 38-78mm, drilled
with either rotary or rotary-percussive drilling equipment.
9.5.4
Method of Measurement
9-11
~~
9.5.5
Basis of Payment
9.5.6
i.
il.
9.6.1
Description
for
Materials
Reinforcement
9.6.3
Construction Requirements
9-12
Basis of Payment
9.6.6
l.
Concrete
9.6.2.2
Method of Measurement
9.6.5
llin.m)
tcu.m)
9.6.2.1
9.6.4
9.6
9.6.2
7
Conctete shall be cured using water curi ng with wet
burfap for 7 days. Curing compound can be used in
urgent conditions only, to the approval of the Engineer.
9.7
9.7.1
9.7.2
Materials
9.7.2.1
Sacks
9.7.2.2
Concrete
9.7.3
Construction Requirements
2
Embankment slopes at bridge abutments and
elsewhere as shown on the Drawings shall be trimmed to
proper line and grade. A blinding layer of Class 15
concrete, as specified in Sub section 5.1, shall be placed
over the full area of surface to be paved, to a minimum
depth of 50 mm. Precast tiles shall then be laid to the
lines and levels shown on the Drawings, on a bed<fng of
20 mm thick, 1:3 cement: sand mortar and joints shall be
properly aligned and finished, all as specified in Section 12.
9.8.4
Method of Measurement
9.7.4
9.8.6
Method of Measurement
9.7.5
Basis of Payment
9.7.6
i.
lcu m l
Basis of Payment
9.8.6
i.
9.9
Ditch Uning
9.9.1
Description
(sq.m)
9.8
9.8.1
Description
9.9.2
9.8 .2
Materials
9.8.3
Construction Requirements
Materials
9.9.3
Construction Requirements
9.9.3.1
General
9-13
"J
~
~
~<::slope Protection and Stabilisation
9.9.3.2
Precast Slabs
9.9.4
Method of Measurement
~~
2
After the stone surface has been approved the spaces
between stones shall be completely filled with grout.
brushed or broomed into the spaces. The grout shall be
cured as specified in Sub-section 9.1,
--
50m m
9.9.6
i.
ii.
I iii.
1 5 ~ 55
4.75m m
2. ~mm
0 - 10
- --- -~ -- ~-
3
Filter membrane shall be a thermally bonded nonwoven fabric produced from conti nuous filament synthetic
fibers. The hydraulic properties shall allow water passage
of 50 100 I per sq.m.per sec under 1 100mm head. The
pore size distribution shall be 50% not greater than 70 jJm.
4
The mechanical properties of the membrane fabric
(that will have minimum t hickness of 1.0mm) shall be as
given in Table 9.10.2.2.
AllowMil
Value
Teit Mlllhod
Grab
Strength
s2Kg.
ASTMD4632
S11am
Strength
73Kg,
ASTMD4632
Puncture
Strength
36Kg.
ASTMD751
Burst
Strength
2N/m~
ASTMD3766
Trapezoid
Tear
23Kg.
ASTMD4533
ASTMD4571
<D.6mm
<0.927mm
welght
passing 75 jJm sieve
I<F-.>K~o~~
ASTMD4491
70%
Strength
ASTM 04355
Description
Ultraviolet Degradation
at 150 hours
914
0 - 25
- !
- - ~ -~- ---- --
9.10.1
'
0-5
- - _ '!511~--~
Table 9.10.2.1 . Filter Material Gradation
Filter Layers
Materials
100
9.5mm
9.10
9.10.2
95 ~
50 100
Permeability, K
"'"
100
19nim
Basis of Payment
37,5m m
Property
9.9.5
"' ~ (hy-1 1
MSHTo SJev.
~
Retained
9.10.3
Construction Requirements
9.10.3.1
Granular Filt er
Sultanata "I Ornon. Stand.,d St>ec:iUeollollS for Rood r.. Brid9o Consuuctlon 2010
Fabric Membrane
9.10.4
Method of Measurement
9.10.5
I.
ii.
9.11
9.11.1
Description
(sq.ml
(sq.ml
9.11.2
Materials
9.11.2.1
Fences
9.11.2.2
Bituminous Materials
Vegetative Materials
Water
Water shall
substances.
Basis of Payment
9.10.6
9.11 .2.5
Blanket Covers
9.11.3
Construction Requirements
9.11.3.1
Fencing
9-15
~~
OGRLT
9.11.3.2
9.11.6
i.
(!in.m)
ii.
(sq.m)
iii.
(sq.m)
iv.
(sq.m)
9.11.3.3
1
The upwind boundaries of the vegetated area shall
be protected by fences or dikes, to prevent the engulfment
of the vegetation.
2
Selected seed shall be spread as directed and
protected by mulch sprayed with a bituminous material.
3
Seed on slopes shall be anchored by mulch or
matting.
9.11.3.4
Blankets
1.
After placement of blanket covers. a spray
application of bituminous material shall be required to
prevent blanket decomposition and subsequent dust
9.11.4
Method of Measurement
2
Stabilization with bituminous materials shall be
measured by the square meter of area sprayed.
3
Stabilization with vegetative treatment shall be
measured by the square meter of area, Installed (to the
approved frequency by the Engineerl, watered, completed,
and accept ed. A ll trials ordered by the Engineer prior to
the final vegetative treatment works shall not be paid
separately, but shall be deemed to be included in the rate
for the approved final treatment works.
4
Stabilization with blankets shall be measured by the
square meter of area, installed, using the specified
materials and to the dimensions shown on the Drawings,
or ordered by the Engineer. All trials ordered by the
Engineer prior to the installation of the final blanket works
shall not be paid separately, but shall be deemed to be
included in the rate for the approved final blanket works.
9.11.5
9.12
9.12.1
Description
9.12.1.1
General
Basis of Payment
rv
2
The design shall address the cli mate and soil
conditions &Misting in Omen and provide a minimum
design life of seventy.five years. The specification as
presented to the Engineer shall also state any
requirements for the thickness of reinforcing strips and/or
li mitati ons on the backfill used i n the structure to ensure
the design life. The final thickness shan be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
3
The term reinforced soil waP" shall be deemed to
have the same meaning as " mechanically stabilized earth
retaining walls".
ii.
Iii.
iv.
9-16
S"ltQnQt.. of Oman, Sto'Jdrd Spo:illcouon for Rood & Bridga Con;truc:-Jon 2010
v.
vi.
Wall erection
Monitoring
6
The Contractor shell submit for prior approval a
detailed Mathod Statement that describes ell means,
method and techniques to be adopted for construction
and Installation of the "mechanically stabilized earth
retaining walls". The Method Statement shall include
details of equipment to be used, method of installation of
each reinforced earth component taking into consideration
the manufacturer's recommendations, backfill materials to
be used backside of wall, testing and reporting, work
program end any other information required by the
Engineer.
9.12.1.2
2
Materia Is and construction of reinforced earth
components shall comply with Section 5 of these
Specifications.
9.1 2.2.2
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi .
vii.
viii.
9.12.2
Materials
9.12.2.1
General
IIi.
iv.
v.
vi.
9--1 7
~~
M1nltty
ofTr~trtpotl &
Communier.t5on
DGfU.T
b
vii.
vlil.
ix.
x.
9.12.2.3
Concrete Footings
9-18
9.12.2.6
Sieve Size
Fasteners
iL
iii.
iv.
2
Reinforcing strips shall be fixed to the facing panels
using plastic coated steel anchor loops and toggles, unless
otherwise noted on the approved shop drawings and in
accordance with approved samples. The Contractor shall
furnish the Engineer with a Certificate of Compliance
certifying that these materials comply with the applicable
Specifications.
9.12.2.8
v.
vi.
2
Filler for horizontal joints between panels shall be
resin bonded cork filler conforming to ASTM D 1752 (Type
II) unless otherwise noted on the approved drawings.
9.12.2.9
2
Selected Filter Material for Dra'nege Layers: Filter
backfill materiel shall conform to the relevant
requirements of Section 2.
3
vii.
%Passing
250 mm
100
100 mm
75-100
0075 mm
0-15
ii.
%(byweight Passing
125 mm
100
90mm
85-100
9.5 mm
25-100
0.600mm
1065
0.075mm
0-10
919 .
~
/'-,./
DGRLT
9.12.3
Construction Requirements
9.U.3.1
WaiJ Excavation
1
Structure excavation shell be in accordance with the
requirements of Section 2. Limits and construction stages
shell be as shown on the Drawings.
9.12.3.2
Foundation Preparation
3
Backfill shall be placed in accordance with Section 2
of these Specifications and compacted in accordance with
the requirements shown below and on the Drawings. The
maximum lift thickness shall not exceed 250 mm (before
compaction! and sha A closely follow panel erection. The
Contractor shall decrease this lift th'ckness If necessary to
obtain the specified density.
Backfill Placement
9.12.3.5
2
As shown on the shop drawings. reinforcements
shall be placed normal to the face of the wall.
9-~
Trial Embankment
Sllltanot" of Oman, Slo'ldord Speafo..nion for Rod &. 8nd!lo Conwuctian 21ltD
il.
3
The Engineer shall approve the materials and
procedures on the basis ofthe trial results.
9.12.4
Monitoring
9.12.4.1
General
Selected backfill
Settlements
Horizontal displacements and overall
stability
Material durability
Selected Backfill
Settlements
2
Topographic measurements will be performed with
leveling instruments and reference points installed on the
wall face and with benchmarks located in stable areas.
4
Foundation settlements shall be monitored using
steel bars fixed on concrete at a distance of 12 meters
from the wall facing. The vertical steel bar is to be
protected by means of pipes. Measurements shall be
taken from the top of the steel bars.
9.12.4.4
Horizontal Displacements
Durability
5
At every investigation, one indicator is extracted
from each zone in which test samples are located. In case
of abnormal corrosion development, complementary
investigations must be made; excavations must be opened
for examining the first beds of reinforcements.
9.12.4.6
Testing Frequency
9-21
~
~
TEST
Within first
5000m3
-- . -
Grain Size
pH
~Salt Content
lnsitu Density
500
5000
500
5000
L - 500
500
~~
Resistivity
500
Plata Bearing
250
Water Content
1000
ii.
iN.
After first
5000m3
5000
5000
6000
Coastal Protection
9.13.1
Description
2
Quarry run shall consist of natural rock fragi'TI$n1$
and complyi ng with the requirements of this section.
3
Armour rock shall be the quarri ed stone placed in the
top or outer layer(s) of the strutture exposed to sea
conditions.
9.12.5
9.13
1000
Method of Measurement
4
Undertayer shall be the quarried stone placed undet
the armour rock layer(s)
5
Core means the quarry run material forming the bulk
portion of the slope and erosion protection fill sections
protected by underlayers and/or armour rock.
Filter fabric (geotextile) shall be a membrane placed
6
between the underlayer and the seabed soil or the core
stone that shall allow passage of water while retaining of
seabed soil or core stone in place without clogging.
7
The Contractor shaD submit for the Engineer's
approval a Quality Control Manual for the proposed slope
and erosion protection construction.
8
The Contractor shall submit the following method
statements for the Engineer's approval at feast 45 days
ptior to the commencement of work on site:
i.
II..
iii.
9.12.6
Basis of Payment
9.12.7
l..
022
(sq..m)
iv.
9
The Contractor shal submit the following test reports
directly t o Engineer from approved testing services:
i.
ii.
Iii.
iv,
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
9.13.2
Materials
9.13.2.1
Quarried Stone
Underlayers
for
Armour
Layers
and
7
Sodium sulphate soundness carried out in
accordance with BS 812: Part 121 using the 63-125mm
crushed rock and a 50mm sieve to determine losses shall
be less than 12%.
8
The average point load index Is (50) in the planar
direction of the most pronounced layering, should any
visible anisotropy exist, and for sampling testing and
reporting in accordance with ISRM 1986 recommended
method, shall be not less than 4.0 MPa with the average
minus the standard deviation of the point load index at
least 3.0 MPa; where at least ten valid test results obtained
from pieces originating from ten randomly selected stones
have been used to calculate the average and standard
deviation.
9
Methylene blue absorption tests shall be carried out
in accordance with CIRIA SP 83, Appendix 2, in order to
indicate the presence of deleterious clay minerals, the
results ofthis test shall not exceed 1.0gl100g.
10 The contractor shall carry out for each quarry the
three sets of tests as listed in the relevant Clauses above.
The contractor shall submit the results for the Engineer's
approval of the source of quarried stone for underlayers
and armour layers.
11 The contractor shall carry out at I east three sets of
the tests listed in the above Clauses on each consignment
of quarried stone for under-layers and armour layers
imported to site. A higher frequency of testing may be
required as instructed by the Engineer, if this, in the
opinion of the Engineer, Is deemed necessary.
12 Materials failing to comply with any of the
requirements listed above shall not be used in the Works
and shall be considered not in compliance with thls
specifications.
9.13.2.2
Core Material
3
The contractor shall use selected quarry run with
material percentage lighter than 1.0 kg (80mm of
equivalent diameter) not exceeding TO% and complying
with the size gradation defined by the engineer.
4
The contractor shall use quarry run
complying with the following requirements:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
material
6
The water absorption of quarry stone, carried out in
accordance with BS 812: Part 2 shall be less than 3%.
9-23
~
~
DGRLT
/"'-.
~~Slope Prot ection and Stabilisation
v.
< 1,0g/100g
5
The contractor shall carry out for each quarry three
sets of the tests as listed in the above Clauses. The
selection of the quarry source will be based on the results
submitted and subject to Engineer's approval.
6
During construction, the contractor shall take
sufficient sample for every 5000 t of material produced or
production for a working day whichever is greater. Three
sets of the tests as listed in the above Clauses shall be
carried out and submitted to the Engineer. A higher
frequency of testing may be required as i nstructed by the
Engineer, if this, in the opinion of the Engineer, is deemed
necessary.
7
Materials failing to comply with any of the
requirements listed above shall not be used in the Works
and shall be considered not In compliance with this
specification.
9.13.2.3
2
Non-woven TERRAM 4000 or equivalent material can
be used with the following properties:
i.
ii,
iii.
3
The contractor shall provide evidence of the
resistance to deterioration of the geotextiles from
exposure to ultraviolet light and seawater.
4
The contractor shall carry out sampling of geotextiles
for testing in accordance with Silmpling proc e~res
indicated in ASTM - 04354-99.
5
The contractor shall carry out for geotextiles three
sets of tests to certify the required properties and submit
the results for the approval of the Engineer.
6
The contractor shall carry out at least three sets of
tests to verify the required properties on each
consignment of geotextile imported in the site. A higher
frequency of testing may be required as instructed by the
Engineer, if this, in the opinion of the Engineer is deemed
necessary.
7
Materials fai ling to comply with any ol the
requTrements listed above shall not be used in the works
and shall be considered not in compliance with these
specifications.
924 .
9.13.3
Construction Requirements
9.13.3.1
General
2
Seabed clearances: Remove prior to commencing
fil fmg works, all unsu itable material, wrecks, floating
debris, silt, c!ay, loose sand and loose material over the
whole area of the slope and erosion protection. Dispose of
unsuitable material as directed by the Engineer.
3
The contractor shall remove, In accordance with the
instructions of the Engineer any silt, loose sand or clay
that exists in the top layers of the seabed. Remove any silt,
loose sand and clay layers to the levels and areas as
instructed by Engineer.
4
The contractor shall relocate or redirect, at his own
expense, aU underwater services, installations etc. that
may lie in the area to receive rockfil ling. He shall carry out
all such redirection or relocation in accordance with
requirements ofthe relevant local authorities.
5
The contractor shall ensure that the founding bed for
slope and erosion protection is natural seabed material
when working in the sea, consisting of sand, a mixture of
sand and gravel or rock. No filling on silt, loose sand or
clay layers shall be allowed.
6
The contractor shall make his own arrangements for
the supply and transport of slope and erosion protection
material either by land or sea or both and use appropriate
marine and/or land operated plants for filling.
7
The contractor shall protect all placed materia l from
erosion by the action of sea during construction. The
Contractor shall be held responsible for all loss of material
and displacements that mi!Y arise, and shall make good
such losses and displacements at his own expense.
Furthermore, t he ContractQf" shall be responsible for any
obstruction that may be caused by the deposition of any
material washed out from the filling and remove the same
i n accordance to the instructions of the Engineer.
B
The contractor shall take all the necessary
precautions to protect the environment and any damage
to the environment arise from the Works shall be the
Contractor's responsibility.
9.13.3.2
2
The contractor sha II take measurement of each
material profile as placed before any subsequent layer of
material is placed to ensure compliance with the specified
tolerances.
All Armour
Depth of Placing
3
The contractor shall carry out placement of core
material underwater in such a manner to minimize
segregation of material and to ensure its proper mixing.
The placement methods are subject to Engineer's
approval.
4
The contractor shall place core material 0.75m above
mean sea level and higher in layers not more than 1.0m in
loose depth and compact as specified.
5
Before compaction, the contractor shall moisten each
layer as necessary. He shall compact each layer with the
minimum number of roller passes as agreed with the
Engineer.
6
The contractor shall carry out compaction by heavy
vibratory compactor not less than 12 t capacity.
9.13.3.3
Individual
level
Measurements
2
The contractor shall not drop or lip into position
quarried stone, but shall place them individually into the
structure in order to achieve an adequate stability and
deformation to maintain lines and levels shown on
Drawings. He shall tightly pack the stones together so as
to achieve as near as possible a target unit weight of stone
placed of 1.6 tim' and do not place them so that thay can
rock or obtain their stability on a pi ane by frictional
resists nee alone prior to placing further stones.
3
The contractor shall fill any void below finished
profile level in excess of mean rock size with an
appropriate stone or stones.
4
The contractor shall place rock materials to the levels,
dimensions and slopes shown on drawings, and the
surface profile measured in accordance with the surveying
procedure outlined in Paragraph 9.13.3.4, to be within the
vertical placing tolerances given in Table 9.13.1.1.
Profile to
Actual Mean
Profile(m}
lml
Dry: aboVe water
level
-I
+0.35 On-50
0.3 On 50
- 0.25 On 50
~
+0.6 On 50
Less than 5m
0.5 On 50
- 0.4 On 50
.J
Morethan5m
--
0.5Dn50
:1:1 .~
~
Design
Layers and
5
The tolerance on two consecutive mean actual
Notwithstanding any
profiles shall not be negative.
accumulation of positive tolerances on underlying layers,
the thickness of the layer shall not be less than 80% of the
nominal thickness when calculated using mean actual
profiles
9.13.3.4
Surveying Technique
925
lj
~
~
_Co~munlcationa
DGRlT
9.13.4
Method of Measurement
9.13.5
Basis of Payment
2
The amount of completed and accepted work
measured as underlayer, quarry run, rock armour, and
bedding layer will be paid for at the unit rates indicated In
the Bill of Quantities which rate shall be full compensation
for selection and supply of materials, stonekockfill,
crushing, screening, testl~~g, transportati on. hauling,
stockpiling, relocation, placing, compacting, trimming the
underlying material and slope preparation, removal of
discarded material, elCcavatlon and backfilling. finishing
and protecti on, labor, equipment, tools, supplies and other
items necessary for the proper completion of the works.
3
The amount of completed and accepted work
measured as Dredging for Embedded Toe Protection will
be paid for at the unit rates indicated in the Bill of
Quantities which rate shall be full compensation for
supply and installation of all plant and equipment required
to carry out dredging, pumping and transportation of
dredged material to whatever distance required, hauling,
stockpiling. disposal of discarded material to approved
locations, protection, labor, equipment, tools, supplies and
other items necessary for the proper completion of the
works ..
4
The amount of completed and accepted work
measured as Fabric and Membranes (GeotelCiile) will be
paid for at the unit rates indicated in the Bill of Quantities
which rate shall be full compensation for selection and
926
9.13.6
i.
li.
iii.
iv.
v.
(cum)
(cu.m)
(cu.m)
(cu.m)
(sq.m)
Sultanate of Oman, SCaneJ.td Specifoc:ations lllf llolld & Bndge Constructoon 2.010
Ref.
Title
10.1
Piling: General
Page No.
Deac:ription
10.1.1
10.1.2
Materials
Conltruc:tlon Requirement.
10.1.3
10 1 3.1
Genenl
10 1 3.2
Cast In Place Piles
10.1.3.3
Placing Concrete
10.1 3.4
Preliminary Drilled Piles
10 13.5
Precast Concrete Piles
10136
Steel piles
1013.7
Tolerances
10.1.4
Method of Meaaurement
101.5
Bnls of Payment
Items In the Bill of Quantities
10.18
10.2
Pile Testing
1D.2.1
Oelcriptlon
10.2.2
Submm.la
Execution
10.2.3
Preparation
10.2.3:1
10.2.3.2
StatlcLoad Testing
NonDestructive, !;ow-Strain Integrity
10.2.3.3
Testing
10.2.3.4
Test Records
10.2.4
Method of Menurement
10.2.5
Basis of Payment
Items In the BtU of Quantities
10.2.6
10-1
10.1
10.1
10.1
10.1
10.3
1Q.4
11).4
10-4
10.5
10-5
10.5
10.5
10.5
1D-5
1G-5
1o.&
10.S
10-&
106
1016
1~7
10.7
10.7
10.7
SultDnotc of Omon. S~.andrd Spocirrco~ons fot Road & Sridga C<>Mlt~~n ZIJW
10.1
Piling: General
10.1.1 Description
This Section describes requirements for supplying
and installing precast concrete, cast In-situ concrete and
steel piles by boring andfor driving.
10.1.2 Materials
Concrete and steel reinforcement shall be as
specified in the relevant Clauses of Section 5.
2
Concrete mixes, mixing and curing procedures shalt
be as specified in the relevant Clauses of Section 5
Concrete mixes for use In piles shall be capable of
maintaining a slump of 200 mm for 2 hours after
placement Concrete mixes shall be designed to resist
aggressive soils and ground water if encountered in
compliance with the requirements of the Construction
Industry Research and Information Association - CIRIA
'Guide to the Construction of Reinforced Concrete in the
Arabian Peninsula'.
5
The Contractor shall carry out the piling work in such
a manner and et such times to minimize noise and
disturbance to the general public. If, during execution of
the work, damage is likely to be caused to utilities or
adjacent structures. the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer proposals for the repair or avoidance of such
damage.
Piles shall be Installed to the tolerances given in
6
Table 10.1.3.1.
6
Slurry shall consist of pulverized sodium bentonite,
pulverized attapulgite, or polymers, mixed with potable
water to form a stable colloidal suspension; complying
with ACI 336.1, and the values indicated for density,
apparent viscosity (in centipoise), gel strength (in N/sq.m.),
sand content, end pH.
Allowable Limit
Poitlon
Verticality
4
Welds for fabricating steel piles and connecting steel
pile lengths shall be as specified in the relevant Clauses of
Section 6.
5
Sand-cement grout shall consist of Portland cement
manufactured according to ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean
natural sand complying with ASTM C 404.
Unless
otherwise indicated, mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1 t2
parts sand, by volume, with sufficient water to permit flow
during placement.
Characterfltlc
--
Rake
{for raked p~ln only)
-"
75 deviation
---1 in--
I
I
1 in 25 deviation
7
The Contractor shall submit daily records to the
Engineer within 24 hours giving the information listed In
Table 10.1.3.2.
General
10-1
~~
~~<.Piling
Cc:~nlmunlentlon
OGRLT
All piiM
P.HM
P.llei
'
1.
2.
Data
Contract
Identification,
Pile Identification.
Pile type.
Working load.
Ground level at
commencement of
c)perations.
Working platform
level,
Pile toe level.
Details of any
obstructions.
Delay!! or other
interruptions to
the saquenca of
work including
times.
Cut-off level.
Head level of
completed pUa.
Ground heave.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1D.
11.
12.
13.
1.
2.
~-
4.
6.
6.
1.
Cross section
dimensions of
driving tuba
(temporary
casing I.
Cross-sectional
dimensions of
completed pile.
Length of
permanent
casing.
Length of
flnlshe<! pile
excluding any
enlarged base.
2.
3.
4.
I
1.
2.
~.
4.
5.
5.
I
7.
I
I
Cross-sectional dimensions.
Total length of praformad.
pile.
Driven langth of preformed
pile.
Sequence of driving In
groups.
Final set
Sections and joints used.
B.
9.
t.
1.
23.
4.
Diameter of completed
pile.
Diameter of any enlarged
base.
Length of temporary
casing.
Length of permanent
ca~dng .
l
Table 10.1 .3-2: Piling Records.
Notes:
1. The 24 hour clock shall be used.
2. f or any pile not completed In the working day
the date shall be entered in the records together
with the limes of commencement and
completion.
1().2
Sultonata cr On>an, S~.>'ld.r~ Spedr.=';cr;; lor llood 8< Sridga Construct en ~10
10.1.3.2
Tnt Method
andAppwiWi
complying
3
The drilling fluid shall be maintained at an adequate
viscosity and density. Action shall be taken to prevent the
spillage of bentonite slurry onto the site. Disposal of used
slurry shall be made to a tip approved by the Engineer.
4
When drilled shafts are to be stabilized with slurry,
the slurry shall be maintained a minimum of 1500 mm
above ground-water level and above unstable soli strata to
prevent caving or sloughing of shaft. Excess slurry head is
to be related to performance of on-going dewatering and
to allow for fluctuations in depressed water levels.
i.
ii.
iii.
wfththe
Amrbn
Samples
Plllraleum
lnatitute IAP.Il
Property
recommended
pr.ctlce for
FWdTntJna
of Wit
Sample a
IUppliedto
t~~CCW~~tlon
from
exc.vltlon
prior to
piRing
conlll'llte
a...dDrtiHng
Flulda- API RP
138-1
1.10g~ml
Less than
1-15 glml
Low
temperature
test fluid loss
Less than
30mil
{0.762mml
Less than
40mll
(1 .D16mm)
Marsh Cone
30to40
seconds
Less than
60seconds
Less than
10 cP
Less than
20 cP
Density
Mud balance
F.luid
loss
{30 min.
test)
Viscosity
Plastic
viscosity
Fann
viscometer
[material
passing sieve
Less than
No. 2001
Shear
strength
110 min.
gel
strenathl
Sand
content
PH
- -
Fann
viscometer
Sand screen
set
Electrical pH
meter range
pH7 to 14
..,
4to25
N/m~
--
Less than
4to25
Nlm'
- Less-than
1%
3%
9,5 to 10.8
9.5 to 11.7
v.
5
Pumping of ground water from boreholes will only
be permitted where there is no risk of removal of fines
from the subsoil. Water which cannot be sealed off shall
be maintained in the borehole at a level above the
standing ground water.
On completion of baring, loose soil and debris shall
6
be removed from the base of the pile and the Contractor
shall provide facilities required by the Engineer to facilitate
Inspection of the pile base. The method of descent and the
equipment used shall comply with BS 5573.
7
If reinforcement cages are used they shall be rigid
and installed and maintained in the correct position during
concreting.
10-3
~~
OGRlT
.../"'.~<_Piling
10.1.3.3
Placing Concrete
10-4
Sultanata ar Oman, SL.>ndocd Spccifoco~ons fOt RO<td Ill Bnc!go C..nsttuccion 201 C
Piling)
10.1.3.6
Steel piles
6
Sheet piles shall be pitched and supported as a panel
before driving and securely interlocked. Piles shall not
overlap each other and no pile in a panel shall be more
than 1 min advance of another.
ii.
Pili ng (type)(length)(size)
~n.m .
iii.
Un.m.
10.2
8
Steel piles shall be driven to a prescribed set or
depth in a sequence approved by the Engineer. Driving
shall be continuous.
10.2.1 Description
9
If approved, piles shall be lengthened by full
penetration butt welding. Lengthening sections shall be of
the same rolling. Longitudinal and spiral seam welding of
cylindrical piles shalt be staggered.
10.1.3.7
Tolerances
nr.
Pile Testing
10.2.2 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit a method statement for
each type of testing specified end provide details of
specific techniques and processes proposed to be adopted
for testing. The method statement shall include details of
equipment and instrumentation, quality control and report
procedures, work program, and any other Information or
special data required by the Engineer.
I.
The method statement shall include details of
loading and arrangement of reaction frame,
reaction piles or anchors. Due consideration
shall be given to the effect of diameters of piles.
socket length, type of bedrock, strain
measurement in steel reinforcement and effect
of dewatering. The structural analysis data shall
ba supervised, signed and sealed by the
qualified professional independent engineer
responsible for their preparation.
2
The Contractor shall submit daily work progress
reports, identifying Individual piles and type of testing
carried out.
l0-5
~~
OGRLT
~~<riling
3
For non-destructive integrity testing, the Contractor
shall qualify and engage an experienced independent
testing agency, acceptable to the Engineer, who has
specialized in non-destructive testing of driHed piles
similar to that required for the Project.
10.2.3 Execution
10.2.3.1
Preparation
i.
ii.
1143.
3
Provide pile reaction frame, equipment and
instrumentation with sufficient reaction capacity to
perform tension tests and compression tests.
On
completion of testing, remove testing structure,
equipment 41nd instrumentation.
i.
Notify Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of
performing tests.
ii. Provide facilities to enable Engineer to observe
and check testing.
4
Apply test loads by jacking against beams or
equiva!ent reaction system.
i.
Center to center spacing or vertical reaction piles
from a test pile shall be not less than 3 times the
diameter of the test pile or the reaction piles or 2
m whichever is the greater.
5
Test Loads:
Maximum loads to be applied in
maintained load test shall be as follows:
i.
Expendable preliminary piles in tension or
compression toad test: Apply test loads up to 2.5
10-6
ii.
6
In the event of a pile continuing to displace under
constant load before the maximum test load has been
reached, take readings at 15 minute intervals for a period
of one hour white the load Is being maintained. Unload
the pile in approximately 4 to 6 equal decrements at 15
minute intervals and allow recovaring for 3 hours. Take
one set of displacement readings after each decrement of
load and a further set of readings at the end of the
recovery period.
10.2.3.2
Test Records
il.
Iii.
iv.
v.
Test results.
nt.
nr.
nr.
Static-Load Testing
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
10.7
...
Page No.
Ref.
Ref.
Title
11.1
Bearings- General
11.1.1
Description
11 1
11.1.1.1 Definitions
11-1
11.1.1.2 References
11-1
111
11-2
11.1.1.4 Submittals
11.11.5 Quality Assurance
11 .1.2
Materials
11.1.2.1 Steel
11-1
112
11-2
112
11-3
11-3
Construction Requirements
11.1.3
11.1.3.1 Manufacture
11-3
113
11-3
11-3
11-4
11-4
11.1.4
Method of Mea&Urament
11.1.5
Basis of Payment
11-4
11 5
11.1.6
11-6
11.2
Elastomeric Bearings
11-6
11.2.1
Deectlptlon
11-6
11.2.2
Materia Ia
11-6
11.2.3
Construction RequlremenU
11-5
Title
Construction Requirements
11.3.3.1 General
11.3.3.2 Sampl1ng and Testing
11.3.3.3 lnstallati011
11,3.(
Method of Measurement
11-8
11-8
11.4
Description
11.4-1
11.4.1.1 Scope
11-8
119
11-9
11.4.2
Materials
11-9
11.4.3
Construction Requirements
11.4.3.1 General
11.4.3.2 Nosi..gs
11.4.3.3 lnsta 1ation
11 9
11 9
11- 10
Method of MaiiBUrement
11-10
11.4.5
Baal of Pavmant
11.4.6
11-10
11 10
11.3
Pot Bearings
11-6
11.3.1
Deec:ripelon
11-8
11.6.1
11.5.2
11.3.2
Material
11 6
Deleriptlo n
Materials
Construc:tion Requirement.
Method of Me118Urament. Basis
of P..,mant and Bill of Quantities
116
11-9
11.4.4
11.6
11-6
11-9
11 9
11-5
11.3.2.5 Sealant
11.3.2.6 Sealing Rings
11-9
11.4.2.1 General
11-6
11-8
11-8
11.4.1.3 References
11.4. 1.4 Submittals
11 6
11-6
11-8
116
11-B
11-8
Ba51a of Pavment
Method of Measurement
11-6
11-7
Baals of Pavment
11 6
116
11.3.5
11.2.6
11.2.8
11.3.2.2 Steel
11.3.2.3 Stainless Steel
11-6
11-e
11.3.6
11.2.4
11.3.2.1 General
Page No.
11.5.3
11.5.4
11.6
11.6.1
11-6.2
Description
Matenals
11~10
11 10
11-10
11-11
1111
11-11
11-11
11-11
l111
Ref.
11,6.2.2
11.6.2.3
1 1.6.2.4
11, 6.2.5
11.6.3
11.6."
11.6.5
11.6.6
Title
Aluminum Alloy
Structural Steel
Reinforced Concrete
Anchorage System
Constructfon Requirements
Method of Measurement
S.ala of Payment
Item In the Bill of Ouantitle
Page No.
11-11
11 11
11-11
11-11
11-11
11-11
1M2
11-12
Bridge Accessorie s )
11.1
11.1.1
Bearings- General
Description
Definitions
2
Elastomer: A compound containing natural or
chloroprene rubber with properties similar to those of
rubber.
3
Elastomeric bearing: A bearing comprising a block of
elastomer that may be reinforced internally with steel
plates.
Plain pad bearing: An unreinforced elastomeric
4
bearing. It provides limited translation and rotation.
5
Strip bearing: A plain pad bearing for which the
length is at least ten times the width.
6
Laminated elastomeric bearing or steelreinforced
elastomeric bearing: A bearing made from alternate
laminates of steel and elastomer bonded together during
vulcanization. Vertical loads are carried by compression of
the elastomer. Movements parallel to the reinforcing
layers and rotations are accommodated by deformation of
the elastomer.
7
Pot bearing: A bearing consisting essentially of a
metal piston supported by a disc of unreinforced
elastomer that Is confined within a metal cylinder.
Rotations are accommodated by deformation of the
elastomer. It may be movable, guided, unguided or fixed.
Movement is accommodated by sliding of polished
stainless steel on PTFE.
B
Disc bearing: A bearing that accommodates rotation
by deformation of a single elastomeric disc molded from a
urethane compound. It may be movable, guided,
unguided or fixed. Movement is accommodated by sliding
of polished stainless steel on PTFE.
9
References
11.1.1.3
AASHTO
LRFD
Bridge
Design
Specifications, 3"' Edition, 2004, 2008
Interim Revisions.
iv.
v.
vi.
111
~~
/"'-~<:Bridge Accessories
4
Definitions of bear>ng types and bearing components
shall be In accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications, Third Edition, 2004, Section 14 2. Relevant
definitions are reponed in Paragraph 11.1.1.1.
6
Other types of bearings shall follow AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications, Section 14 for design, and
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications for
construction requirements, as follows:
i.
Disc Bearings
ii. Rocker and Roller Bearings
iii.. Spherical Bearings
11.1.1.4
ii.
iii.
Method statements.
iv.
v.
Design calculations.
vi.
Samples:
All samples required to perform the tests
specified for the verilicetion of m aterial
112
Submittals
Sub-Section 18.3
Sub-Section 18.4
Sub-Section 18.5
I.
x.
xi.
Test Reports:
Reports of the specified material tests.
Reports of the specified tests on bearings,
Quality Assurance
AASHTO
LRFD
Bridge
2
The Contractor shall ensure that direct site
supervision of the first of each type of bearing is provided
by an experienced technical representative of the
manufacturer and thereafter, by competent persons who
have been trained in the proper installation of bearings.
11.1.2
Materials
11.1.2.1
Steel
1
Unless otherwise specified, rolled steel shall conform
to AASHTO M 270MIM 270 (ASTM A 709/A 709M), Grade
36 (Grade 2501, and shall cause no adverse electrolytic or
chemical reaction with other components of the bearing
and sha II be free of all rust and mill scale.
2
Unless otherwise specified, steel laminates shall be
made from rolled mild steel conforming to AASHTO M
270M/M 270 (ASTM A 709/A 709MI, Grade 36 (Grade 250),
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, or equivalent. Laminates shall
have a minimum nominal thickness of (1.6 mm). Hores In
plates for manufacturing purposes shall not be permitted
unless they have been accounted for in the design and are
in accordance with the contract documents.
3
Cast steel shall satisfy the requirements of ASTM
A802/A802M and be free of all blow-holes and impurities
larger than 3.2 mm the inside wall of the pot In pot
bearings and the contact surface of metal rocker or roller
S"'llnnnco <>I Onuon. SW"IIIrd Spocjfitwlions l0< Rood & Bridge Con11tucln~n 2010
Bridge Accessories)
5
When nonshrink mortar or grout is specified, a
nonshrink admixture of a type approved by the Engineer
shall be used.
6
Only sufficient water shall be used to permit placing
and packing.
7
Mixing shall be done by either hand methods or with
rotating paddle-type mixing machines and shall be
continued until all ingredienlll are thoroughly mixed. Once
mixed, mortar or grout shall not be retempared by the
addition of water and shall be placed within one hour.
6
Where ASTM is referred, equivalent specifications,
Eurocode for example, may be accepted.
11.1.3
Construction Requirements
11.1.3.1
Manufacture
11.1.2.2
Materiel Testing
2
Material friction test for sliding surfaces shall be
conducted either on samples taken from the same batch of
materials as those used in the prototype bearings, or on
finished bearings. The testing procedure shall be in
accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications Article 18.1.5.2.3. The bearing or specimen
shall show no appreciable sign of wear, bond failure, or
other dafects.
ii.
11.1.2.3
Bedding Material
4
Unless otherwise specified or ordered by the
Engineer, the proportion of cement to sand shall be one to
one.
Manufacture Tolerances
11~
~~
DGfli.T
~~<.::Bridge Accessories
11-4
11.1.4
Method of Measurement
Bridvo Comtruc;t!O<
Bridge Accessories)
4
Short-duration compression tests on bearings shall
be as described in AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications Article 18.2.5.6 except that the compression
load shall be 200 percent of the rated servce load.
11.1.5
Basis of Payment
11.1.6
11.2
11.2.1
(nr.)
Elastomeric Bearings
Description
3
Bearings shall be constructed as specified in the
latest edition of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications, Section 18, as complemented or modified
herein.
11.2.2
11.2.3
Materials
3
Materials for elastomeric bearings and the finished
bearings themselves shall be subjected to the tests
described in AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications Article 18.2.5. Material tests shall be In
accordance with either Table 18.2.3.1 1 or Table 18.2.3.1-2,
as appropriate. Frequency of testing shall be as specified
in Article 18.2.5.2.
Construction Requirements
2
Where elastomeric bearings are equipped with
sl'ding surface of PTFE and stainless steel mating surface.
the fabrication requirements shall be as specified in
AASHTO LRFO Bridge Construction Specifications Arttcle
18.8.3.
11.2.4
Method of Measurement
2
Bearing tests, installation trials, bedding, grout
injection where applicable, measuring devices for
movement andlor load. as well as plinths, downstends,
masonry plates and all elements between the substructure
and superstructure shall not be measured for direct
payment but shall be considered as subsidiary works the
costs of which shell be deemed to be included in the rates
for bridge bearings.
11.2.5
Basis of Payment
1.
The amount of completed and accepted work
measured as provided above. will be paid for at the rate
for each type of elastomeric bearing as specified in the Bill
of Quantities, which rate shall be full compensation for
furnishing ell materials, labor, equipment. tools, supplies
and other items necessary for proper completion of the
Work.
11.2.6
(nr.)
~~
OGftLT
/'~<:::Bridge Accessories
11.3
Pot Bearings
11.3.1
Description
il.
11 .3.2.6 Sealant
ii.
2
Bearings shall be designed in accordance with the
latest edition of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications, Section 14.7, as complemented or modified
herein.
3
Bearings shall be constructed as specified In the
latest edition of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Constructlon
Specifications, Section 1e. as complemented or modified
herein.
4
A"ternatively, the bearings may be designed and
constructed in accordance with BS EN 13375 Structural
Bearings - Part 5: Pot Bearings, as complemented or
modified herein.
5
All pot bearings including sliding bearing shall be
attached to the substructure and superstructure by
mechanieal fiXings or other approved methods.
6
The capacity of bolts fixing the bearings to the
substructure and superstructure shall be adequate to
resist solely the entire horizontal force w ithout
consideration of any friction forces.
11.3.2
Materials
1 1.3.2,1
General
Steel
1.
All steel except stainless steel components of the pot
and disc bearing shall conform to the requirements of
Section 6 for carbon steel or high-strength, low.alloy
structural steel for welding.
11.3.2.3
Stainless Steel
i.
11-e
Sealing Rings
1
The sealing rings between the steel piston and the
elastomeric rotational element of pot bearings shall be
made of brass conforming to ASTM B 36/ B 36M for rings
of rectangular cross-section and ASTM B 121 I B 121M for
circular sections. The Engineer may, at his discretion,
approve other sealing ring material on the basis of test
evidence conforming to Article 14.7.4.5 of the AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design Specificalfons.
11.3.2.7
BS EN 13372 Section 5.
.:t
11.3.3
Construction Requirements
11.3.3.1
General
Bridge Accessories)
i.
ii.
iii.
8
Every bearing shall have the project identification
number, lot number, and individual bearing number as
well as its location on the structure indelibly marked with
ink on a side that will be visible after erection.
9
iii.
2
Material Certification Tests: The manufacturer shall
select, at random, samples for material certification tests
as defined in Paragraph 11.1.2.2 of this Specification,
bearings from completed lots of bearings for testing. The
manufacturer shall complete the required testing and
determine compliance with this specification before
submitting the lot(s) for quality-assurance Inspection,
testing, and acceptance consideration. The results of the
manufacturer's tests shall be furnished to the Engineer.
Certification shall be provided for all elastomeric elements.
Their material properties shall satisfy the requirements
specified and the tests described in Paragraph 11.1.3.3.
Additional tests may be required by the Engineer.
3
11.3.3.2
Test:
Properties
Physical
Rotational
Element:
element per lot.
Efastomeric
elastomeric
of
one
one
iii.
iv.
111
"-./
OGRLT
~~<::Bridge Accessories
v.
i.
ii..
jij.
iv.
11.3.3.3
Installation
1.
Pot bearings shall be installed in accordance with the
contract documents and on the approved working
drawings. Upon final installation of the bearings, the
Engineer. In the presence of the manufacturer's
representative, shall inspect the beating components to
assure that they are level and parallel to within 2.6 mm/m.
Any deviations i n excess of the allowed tolerances shall be
corrected.
11.3.4
Method of Measurement
11.3.5
Basis of Payment
i.
ii.
Hi..
11.3.6
il
11.4
(nr.)
11.4.1
Description
11.4.1 .1
Scope
11A.1.2
Types of Joints
H-8
Bridge Accessories)
3
The bedding and nosings of expansion joints shall be
considered Integral parts of the joint and the joint
manufacturer shall be responsible for the supply of all
constituent materials required for bedding end nosing of
joints et the time of supplying the joint.
11.4.1.3
References
AASHT0200B
11.4.1.4
Highway
Submittals
2
The Contractor shall furnish detailed drawings of the
joint and method of assembly and installation procedure
for the approval of the Engineer.
3
Material certificates. signed by manufacturers and
Contractor shall be provided, certifying that the joints are
designed in accordance w'th AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications or equivalent standard end AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Construction Specifications or equivalent and that
they comply with the requirements of this specification.
Quality Assurance
AASHTO
LRFD
Bridge
2
The Contractor shall ensure that direct site
supervision of the first of each type of joint I s provided by
an experienced technical
representative of the
manufacturer and thereafter, by competent persons who
have been trained in the proper installation of expansion
joints.
11.4.2
Materials
11.4.2.1
General
Binder:
ii.
and
11.4.1.5
i.
2
Aggregate: The aggregate shall be single-sized 20
mm aggregate to BS 63. It shall be a clean, dry stone with
a polished stone value of 60, and a maximum flakiness
index of 25, and shall bagged to avoid contamination.
11.4.3
Construction Requirements
11.4.3.1
General
Nosings
11-9
~~
DGRLT
/"-.~<:Bridge Accessories
4
The epoxy mortar and epoxy concrete composition
shall be approved by the Engineer. Aggregate shall be
either silica sand. calcined bauxite or other approved
synthetic or natural aggregate of suitable grading. The
particle size distribution shall be that which produces a
mortar with adequate strength and workability and
minimum voids. Aggregate shall be clean and completely
dry. Whichever type of aggregate is used, the epoxy
mortar or epoxy concrete constituents shall be thoroughly
mixed in a suit.1ble mechanical mixer. The sequence.
duration and temperatu re of mixing shall be in accordance
with the manufacture-'s instructions.
11.4.3.3
11.4.4
11.4.5
Basis of Payment
11.4.6
(i)
(lin.m)
Installation
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(vi
(vii
5
During the placing and hardening of the bedding and
bonding materials. movement between the joint and the
substrate shall be prevented.
11 .5.1
7
Ramps shall be provided and maintained to protect
all expansion joints from vehicular loading. Vehicles shall
(lin.rn l
(lin. m.)
(lin.m)
(lin.m.)
11.5
6
When one half of the expansion joint is being set, the
other hell shalt be completely free from longitudinal
restraint. In particular, where templates are used to locate
the two sides of a joint, they shall not be fi)(ed
simultaneously to both sides.
movement range (
4
The expansion joint and the waterproofing shall be
formed so that a watertight seal is provided.
1110
Method of Measurement
(lin.m.)
11.5.2
Materials
Sutttannto ol Oman, Stondrtl Speci~llllon$ for ROild & Bridge Con1tr~on 2(110
Bridge Accessorie s )
2
For joint sealants, refer to Section 5, Paragraph
5.3.3.1 m.
11.5.3
Construction Requirements
11.5.4
11.6
11.6.1
Description
11.6.2
1 1.6.2.1
Materials
Materials of Construction
Aluminum Alloy
Structural Steel
11.6.2.4
Reinforced Concrete
11.6.2.5
Anchorage System
11.6.3
Construction Requirements
6
3
The Contractor shall ensure the proper installation of
the posts and rails for metal bridge parapets by competent
persons who have been trained In the proper installation
of the type of bridge parapets to be installed, using tools
and procedures recommended by the manufacturer.
4
The rails and posts of parapets shall be closed
sections, presenting no visible seam welds or exposed
bolt heads. The shape and texture of the posts and rails
and the protective treatment to be applied shall be as
indicated on tha Drawings and no deviations and/or
alterations to these shall be permitted.
5
The standard of finish of reinforced concrete parapet
units shall conform to finish of approved sample units
made before main production commences. Where minor
blemishes and discolorations occur on production units,
making good with an approved epoxy mortar compound
will be permitted only with the express approval of the
Engineer. Units which are considered unacceptable for
use In the works by the Engineer shall be destroyed.
Considerable care shall be given during erection of
parapet units to avoid cracking or otherwise damaging the
concrete unit or its finish.
11.6.4
Method of Measurement
H1 1
~
~
Commun~cadona
OGAlT
/".~<:Bridge Accessories
11.6.5
Basis of Payment
11.6.6
(lin.m,J
{lin.m.l
(iill
(lin.m.l
(ivl
(lin.m.l
(v)
(lin.m.l
(vii
(lin,m.)
lil
(iii
11~12
12.1
General
12.1.1
12.1.2
12.1.3
12.1.4
DNcrlpdon
Refere.Materials
Conmuctlon and lnmlldfon
flequlrementl
12.1.4.1
12.1.4.2
12.1.4.3
12.1.4.4
12.1.4.5
12.1.5
12.1.8
12.1.7
12-1
12-1
12-1
12 1
12-2
12-2
12 2
122
12-4
12-4
12-4
12-6
12-6
Sultanaro gf Oman, Stondar<l Specin.,llollalor flolld llo Btldgo ConslruaJan 2010 (S.COncl Draft)
12.1
General
12.1.1
Description
BS 72631 :2001
12.1.2
References
Highway
M235M
D994-98 Standard
Specification
for
Preformed
Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)
C936M- 09
3
Standard
Specification
for
Solid
Concrete Interlocking Paving Units
British/European Standards
BS 7533-3:2005/A 1 2009
Pavements constructed with clay,
natural stone or concrete pavers. Code
of practice for laying precast concrete
paving blocks and clay pavers for
flexible pavements.
EN 1342:2001
EN 1343:2001
BS 6717:2001
Materials
1.
Portland cement concrete shall conform to the
requirements of Section 5 and as shown on the Drawings.
including HDS Section 16, SD16.20.
2.
Precast concrete curbs, edgings and channels shall
be hydraulically pressed units to conform to BS 7263,
obtained from an approved manufacturer, and of the
sections and sizes shown on the Drawings
i.
ii.
and
M-33-99
12.1.3
3
Precast concrete paving slabs (tiles) shall be
hydraulically pressed slabs to conform to BS 7263,
obtained from an approved manufacturer, and of the sizes,
shapes, colors and surface finish shown on the Drawings.
4
Granite blocks shall conform to BS EN 1342 and 1343,
approved natural local granite with sawn finish, and be
obtained from one strata of one quarry, free from faults
and to the shapes, sizes and patterns shown on the
Drawings.
5
Basalt blocks shall be approved natural basalt sets to
BS EN 1342 and 1343 with various finishes, obtained from
one strata of one quarry, free from faults and to the
shapes, sizes, and patterns shown on the Drawings.
Interlocking concrete blocks shall conform to BS
6
6717 (ASTM C 936), precast concrete interlocking block
pavers, obtained from an approved manufacturer and to
the shapes, sizes, colors, finishes and patterns shown on
the Drawings.
7
Interlocking clay pavers shall conform to 856677, be
obtained from an approved manufacturer and to the
shapes, sizes, colors, finishes and patterns shown on the
Drawings.
8
Stone cobbles: selected hard smooth, egg-shaped
beach or river cobble stones obtained from en approved
source and to the sizes shown on the Drawings.
9
Base, sub-base and sub-grade courses for paving
shall comply with requirements of Section 3 of these
standard specifications and as shown on the Drawings.
including HDS Section 16, 5D16.20.
EN 13139:2002
BS 882:1992
from
EN 9981:2003
EN 9982:2003
i.
ii.
12 1
~
~
_./'....
~<\Sidewalks, Paved Areas and Curb s
Iii,
3
Where specified or instructed by the Engineer curbs
shall be bedded in adhesive. The adhesive shall be placed
uniformly on the cleaned pavement surface or on the
bottom of the curb sections in a quantity sufficient to
result in complete coverage of the area of contact of the
curb and the pavement, with no vo:ds present and with a
slight excess after the curb has been pressed in pia ce. The
curb shall be placed in position and pressure applied until
firm contact is made w ith the pavement. Excess adhesive
around the edge of the marker, excess adhesive on the
pavement, and adhesive on the exposed surfaces of the
marker shall be immediately removed. The curb shall be
protected against Impact until the adhesive has hardened.
4
Mixing of adhesive shall be performed in limited
quantities such that the curb sections shall be aligned and
pressed i nto place within five (51 minutes after mixing the
adhesive components. Any mixed batch of adhesion,
which becomes so viscous that the adhesive is not readilY
extruded from under the curb on application of slight
pressure, shall not be used.
12.1.4.3
12.1.4
12.1.4.1
3
Granular subbase shall be constructed where shown
or directed by the Engineer, and shall be placed in layers
not exceeding one hundred fifty (1501 millimeters in depth
a11d each layer shall be compacted to at least 95"l!o of dry
denstty.
12.1.4.2
Curbs
2
Curbs shall be placed to the lines shown on the
Drawings or established by the Engineer. The Contractor
shell mark the location where each section is to be placed
and the marks shall be approved by the Engineer prior to
beginning work. No curb sections shall be placed over
longitudinal or transverse joints of the pavement surface.
122
5
The period of curing shell be at least one full day at a
temperature of flftvf!Ve to seventy-five degrees Celsius
(55" to 75" Cl. This period may be subject to changes and
adjustments after direct tests have been made on the
production or as directed by the Engineer.
6
Tiles shaa not be imperfectly finished. and shall be
free from segregation. honeycombing, broken or damaged
corners and imperfect plan faces. Correction of defects by
polishing, retouching or any other means w ill not be
permitted. Approval of the t iles given bt( the Engineer at
Sultanatu or Ornon. Stan<lord Spec: nusiono for Road llo Bridgo Construe:= ;!010 15clnd Droll)
Impact Strength
ii.
Flexural Strength
iii.
Abrasion Resistance
8
Impact Strength Test; this test establishes the
minimum height of fell of a steel ball weighing one kg.
which, when striking the tile in the middle, breaks it. The
product of the height of the fall by the weight of the ball is
taken as the Impact Strength, limiting value: 0.5 kg -meters
minimum.
Flexural Strength; this test is carried out by placing a
9
tile on two knife supports, with edges rounded with a
radius of one ( 11 centimeter, arranged parallel to the side
of the tile and ten {101 centimeters apart. The load is
gradually transmitted to the tile top surface, along the
centerline, by a third knife arranged parallel to the other
two.
The unit maximum bending stress= fifteen {151 Phb2 ,
where:
'P' is the total breaking load in kilograms, 'b' is the
width of the tile In centimeters and 'h' is the
thickness of the til e in centimeters.
Th a limit acceptance value for Flexure I Strength shall be
thirty (301 kilograms per square centimeter minimum.
10 Abrasion Resistance; this test is carried out with a
machine composed of a horizontal cast-iron disc, rotating
about its vertical central axis at uniform speed; a
horizontal diametrical crosspiece by means of which two
samples are pressed on the disc, at such a distance from
the center of the disc that the rei alive speed with respect
to the disc, is one meter per second; a second horizontal
diametrical cross-piece orthogonal to the first. which is
carried at either end; appropriate devices to let the
moistened abrasive flow onto the track; two pairs of
conveniently arranged brushes to guide the abrasive that
tends to escape under the samples. The samples, pressed
against the disc, rotate by means of a specie I mechanical
device, around their own vertical central axis, at the rate of
one turn of the specimen for fifty (50) turns of the disc.
Carborundum grit sufficiently coated with liquid mineral
oil with an Engler viscosity between five (5) and seven (71
at fifty degrees Celsius [50" C.) shall be used es an
abrasive. The grit shall pass Sieve No. 60 and be retained
on Sieve No. 100. Consumption of carborundum and oil
should be approximately twenty (201 and twelve (121
grams, respectively, per minute. The square sample, with
a surface area of fifty {50) square centimeters shall be
pressed against the disc by a total of fifteen { 15) kilograms
unit pressure of three tenths (0.3) kilograms per square
centimeter. The test is normally carried out with a d"stance
12--3
'-....../~
~~<:Sidewalks,
12.1.4.4
12.1,4.5
1
In situ concrete paving and curbing. where directed
by the Engineer, shall conform to the appropriate
requirements of Section 5.
2
Forms shall be of metal, wood, or other suitable
material and shall extend for the full depth of the concrete.
All forms shall be geometrically accurate, free from warp,
and of sufficient strength to resist the pressure of the
concrete without displacement. Braci ng and staking of
f orms shall be such that the forms remain in both
horizontal and vertical alignment until their removal. All
forms shan be cleaned and oiled before concrete is placed
against them.
3
Mixing and Placlng Concrete. The foundation shall be
lhoroughly moistened immediately prior to the placing of
the concrete. The proportioning and mixing of the
concrete shall be in accordance with the requirements for
the class of concrete specified. The concrete shall be
deposited in one course in such a manner as to prevent
segregat ion and consolidation by vibrators.
4
The surface of paving shall be finished with a
wooden float and light brooming. No plastering of the
surface will be permitted. All outside edges of the slab and
12-4
12.1.5
Method of Measurement
Sd~
ConstnJc.tjon 20 0
12.1.6
Basis of Payment
12.1.7
[sq.m.l
[sq.m.l
[sq.m.l
(sq.m.l
(lin.m.)
(lin.m.l
v.
12..5
Ref.
Tide
13.1
Roadside Barriers
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.3.1
13.1.3.2
13.1.3.3
13.13.4
13.1.4
Dacription
Referenc:es
Material&
Metal Components
Concrete Components
Delineators
Other Materials
Construction and ln.WIIetlon
Requirementa
13.1.4.1
Metal Guardra'ls
1311.4.2
Concrete Barriers
13.14 3
Impact Attenuetors
13.1.5
Method of Meaurament
13.1.8
Bn!ll of Payment
13.1.7
Items In the bin of Ouantltlea
13.2
Fence
13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
13.2.4
Dncription
Referenc:es
Metarlals
Construction and lnatalletion
Requlnlmena
Method of Meawrement
Bull of Payment
Items In the Bill of Quantities
13.2.5
13.2.8
13.2.7
PagaNo.
13-1
13-1
13-1
13-1
13-1
13-2
132
13-2
13-2
1~2
13-3
13-3
13-4
13-4
13-4
134
13-4
13:4
13-6
13-5
13-6
13-CI
13-CI
13.1
Roadside Barriers
13.1.3
Materials
13.1.1
Description
13.1.3.1
Metal Components
13.1.2
References
Highway
end
AASHTOM160
AASHTO M180
AASHTO M237
Impact Attenuators:
i. Rail elements for Thrie beam rail (used in Guard
Rail Energy Absorbing Terminal G.R.E.A.T.
ASTM A36
Standard Specification
Structural Steel
ASTM A653M
ASTMA576
ASTMA449
for
Carbon
ASTMA325
ASTMA563
ASTM A 123M
ASTM A153M
ASTM A413M
131
""'-..J~
Mlnllrv of Trunapott
a. CornmunlciOtlo" OGR~T
13.1.3.2
Concrete Components
13-2
2
Reinforcing steel shall be of the size and grade
shown on the Drawings and shall conform to the
provisions of Sections related to "Reinforcing Steel" In
Section 5 of these Standard SpecifJCBtions.
13.1.3.3
Barrier Reflectors
13.1.3.4
Other Materials
13.1.4
4
Continuous lengths of rail or cable shall be installed
and alignment checked and adjusted before final
tightening of bolts, etc. Unless otherwise specified. bolted
connections shall be tor que to six (6) to seven (7}
kilogram-meters. Bolts that extend at least six (6)
millimeters but not more than twenty-five (25) millimeters
beyond the nuts shall be used. Rail elements shall be
erected in a smooth continuous line with the laps in the
direction of traffic flow.
5
Posts may be erected by driving with approved
mechanical devices. The method of driving shall not
substantially alter the crass-sectional dimensions of the
posts or materially damage the galvanization I coating.
Battered tops shall not be accepted. Posts which, in the
opinion of tho Engineer, are bent or otherwise damaged
during or after erection, shall be removed and replaced at
the Contractor's expense.
6
Damaged galvanized surfaces may be repaired, only
if so approved by the Engineer. Such surfaces shall be
repaired by thoroughly wire brushing and then applying
two coats of primer in accordance with Section 7, Clause
7.2.6.
7
Guardrail anchor terminals shall be installed at the
locations shown on the plans or ordered by the Engineer
all in accordance with the Drawings and Special
Specifications.
133 .
~~
Commun~cl'lltlona
DGRLT
4
The rear end of each Ouadbeam fender panel shall
overlap and be connected to the diaphragm of the next
bay by means of a bolt and enlarged "mushroom" washer.
The bolt fits through the long horilontal slot in the forward
fender panel. This permits the movement. front to back, of
one set of fender panels relative to the panels in the
underlying-rearward bay. The back portion of each fender
panel shall be tapered to help maximize performance
during wrong-way, re-directive impacts.
5
The monorail support structure shall be made of
steel and be anchored to a specified concrete pad. The
monorail shall prevent lateral movement, vertical
movement and overturning movement of the diaphragms
during design impacts.
6
The nose section shall contain a nose cover and a
crushable cartridge and is not counted as a bay. The nose
cover shall be made from a plastic material formulated to
resist weathering. The nose shall attach to the front
diaphr.~gm. Standard colors shall be gray or yellow.
13.1.5
Method of Measurement
13-4 .
6
Guardrail and concrete barrier reflectors shall not be
measured for separate payment. Their installation will be
considered subsidiary to the constructron of the guardrail
or concrete barriers.
7
Terminals, terminal end sections, and Impact
attenuators shall be measured by the unit for each type
authorized, completed and accepted by the Engineer,
based on the number of units shown on the Drawings or
ordered by the El'l{lineer.
13.1.6
Basis of Payment
13.1.7
(ill
13.2
Fences
13.2.1
Description
13.2.2
References
Steel
Sultnata af Omn. St.>rn!Jd Spor;ofic.lttono l01 Roa~ II< 8ridgo C..n&trut:oon 2010
ASTM A501 - 07
British Standards
BS4360 HR
13.2.3
Materials
9
Tie wire shall conform to ASTM A 112 (withdrawn
1990 w<th no replacement!, and shall be minimum three
and five tenths (3.51 millimeters diameter unless otherwise
shown.
10
Concrete for setting posts shall conform to the
requirements of Section 5, Sub-section 5.1 .3.4.
1 1 Reinforcing steel shall be of the size and grade
shown on the plans and shall conform to Section 5. Subsection 5.2
12 Materials for gates shall be of the sizes, dimensions
and types indicated in the Drawings.
13 Gate perimeter frames shall be fabricated of tubular
members. Additional horizontal and vertical members
shall be provided to ensure proper gate operation and for
attachment of fabric. hardware and accessories. Space so
that frame members are not more than two and forty five
hundredths (2.451 meters apart.
14 Gate frames shall be assembled by welding or with
special malleable or pressed steel fittings and rivets for
rigid connections. Same fabric as for the fenca shall be
used, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Fabric
shall be installed with stretcher bars at vertical edges. Bars
may also be used at top and bottom edges. Attach
stretchers to gate frame at not more than three hundred
eighty (3801 mm on centers. Attach hardware with rivets
or by other means which will provide security against
removal or breakage.
15 Diagonal cross-bracing consisting of ten (101 mm
diameter adjustable length truss rods shall be installed on
gales, where necessary to ensure frame rigidity without
sag or twist, as approved by the Engineer.
13.2.4
13-5
~~
Comm~nlcfttlona
DGRlT
4
When fencing crosses ravines or other discontinuities
in the terrain causing gaps under the fence, the Contractor,
if so ordered by the Engineer, shall modify the installation
to the extent practical bv adding strands or additional
fabric so as to provide the required access control without
interfering with drainage.
5
Galvanized gates or fencing materials which are
constructed or repaired bv welding, cutting, or other work
which damages the coating shall be repaired by grinding
smooth all damaged surfaces and painting with two (2)
coats of paint specified in Section 7, Clause 7.2.6, "Zinc
Dust Zinc Oxide Primer" .
6
The materials incorf)Orated Into the fences and gates
shall be sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with
the standards stated in Clause 13.2.2, all to the approval
and acceptance of the Engineer. The Contractor shall
adjust, redo or complement anv test result ordered bv the
Engineer.
13.2.6
Method of Measurement
13.2.6
Basis of Payment
13.2.7
lvl
1U
Ref.
11tle
14.1
Traffic Signs
14.1.1
DefCriptlon
14-1
14.1.2
General
14-1
14-1
14.1.2.1
14.1.3
14.1.3.1
Page No.
Standards
Materials
14-1
14-1
References
14-1
14., .3.2
Sign Classification
14-1
14.1.3.3
Genera ~
Traffic Signs
141
14.1.3.4
14-1
14.1.3 5
14.1.3.6
Signs
14. 1.3.7
14-2
14.1.3.8
142
142
1-4-2
14.1.3.9
142
14.1.3.10
14.1.3.11
14-2
141 .3.12
14-2
14-3
14.1.3.14
14.1.3.15
Traffic Cones
143
14-3
14.1.3.16
lilashlng Beacons
143
14-3
Con.tructlon Requl,.menta
14-3
14-3
14.1.3.17
14.1.4
14.1.4. 1
14.1A.2
14-3
14.3
Page No.
Title
14.1.4.4
14.1.4.5
14.1.4.6
1-4-4
14-4
Traffic Signs
14-4
14. 1.4.7
14-5
14.1.4.8
14-5
14.1.5
Method of Meaaurement
14.1.6
Bast. of Payment
14-5
14-6
14.1.7
Item~ in the
14-6
14.2
Road Markings
BHI of OuantitiM
14-5
14.2.1
Description
14-6
14.2.2
Meteria..
14-5
14-5
14.2.2 1
Thermoplastic Material
14.2.2.2
Liquid P.aint
Testing
1+-7
14.2.2.4
Painting of curbs
,. 2-3
Construction Requirement
14+8
14.2.2.3
1<4--B
14-8
14.2.3.1
14-9
14.2.3.2
14-9
14.2.3.3
14.2.3.4
14-8
1<1-9
14.2.3.5
14.2.6
14.3
Road Studs
14.3.1
14.3.2
Description
14.2.4
14.2.5
M.teria..
14-9
14-9
14-9
14-9
14-9
14-9
14-10
14.3.2.1
Permanent Retroreflecting
14.3.2.2
Temporary Retro~ecting
Road Studs
14-10
14.3.2.3
Ceramic Bunons
14-10
Road Studs
14.1.4.3
Ref.
14.3.3
Construdlon Requirements
1,C.10
14-10
Ret.
14.3.3.1
:mre
Permanent Retroreftecting
Road Studs
14.3.3.2
Tempora!V Retroreflecting
Road Studs
14.3.3.3
14.3.4
14.3.6
14.3.8
P.age No.
1oio10
14--10
Method of Moesurement
14-10
, ...10
Baals ot Payment
1...10
,..,,0
14.1
Traffic Signs
14.1.1
Description
14.1.2
General
14.1.2.1
Standards
2
Signs that are changeable by means other than
manual operation require approval of their construction
and operating mechanisms by the Engineer. This
requirement is in addition to the need for the design of the
sign to be described in the Highway Design Standards or
otherwise approved by the Employer.
3
Before the commencement of manufacture the
Contractor shall submit for the approval of The Engineer
three copies of:
i.
14.1.3
Materials
ii.
14.1.3.1
References
iii.
14.1.3.2
Sign Classification
ii.
iv.
4
The beck of each traffic sign shall have an indelible
label showing manufacturer, year of erection, sheeting
materia I class. sign face product. The text for the label
shall be in English and Arabic with a character height of 5
to 10mm.
5
Traffic signs shall be carefully handled at all times to
prevent damage and transported and stored in accordance
with the sign face or sign sheeting manufacturer's
instructions.
14.1.3.4
ii.
2
Where, exceptionally, traffic signs are illuminated,
base compartments for electrical equipment shall be as
shown in the Drawings or schedules and shall be fitted
with vanda I and weather resistant locks to the approval of
14-1
~
~
OGRLT
~
~<Traffic Signs and Road Markings
14.1.3.8
3
Flange mounted sign posts, where specified on the
Drawings or Schedules. shall have holes or slots i n the
flange plate to accommodate the anchorage system.
Structural design of flange mounted sign assemblies shall
comply with Section 6 (Structural Steel and Other Metal
Work I
14.1.3.5
Traffic Signs
Manufacture and assembly of traffic signs shall
comply with BS EN 128991.
14.1.3.9
i.
Signals
ii.
3
Concrete foundations for multiple posts should
consist of a single t ong composite block.
Sign Plates for Permanent Traffic Signs
2
Posts should be flange mounted to foundations as
shown on the Drawings or Schedules.
14.1.3.6
1-42
i.
ii.
4
Electrical equipment cabinets and metal components
of electrical equipment in base compartments shall be
protected against corrosion as specified in Section15 of
this Specification.
Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings or
5
Schedules. stainless steel shall be left untreated except
where the component is visible against the sign face when
it shall be covered by a compatible material of a color to
match that part of the face.
14.1.3.15 Traffic Cones
Traffic cones shall comply with BS EN 13422.
14.1.3.16
Flashing Beacons
14.1.4
Construction Requirements
14.1.4.1
2
Signs erected on a single post shall be positioned so
that the post is in the center of the sign, unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings.
3
The fasteners used for fixing the sign to the post
shall have shear heads so that the hexagonal head of the
bolt shears off when the fixing is tightened, leaving a
tamper proof fixing.
4
As an alternative for item 3 above, theft resistant
methods of fixing can, with the approval of the Engineer,
consist of welding up appropriate areas offastening.
14.1.4.2
~
~
OGI\~T
.../"'.
~<\:Traffic Signs and Road Markings
2
Fabricated plate signs up to 2.4m wide shall have no
vertical joints. Above 2.4m wide, joints In the stiffening
extrusions shall preferably be positioned at a vertical
support. If not, then the vertical joints in the stiffening
extrusions shall be staggered so that joints are not less
than 1.0 m apart. Only one such joint in each horizontal
stiffening extrusion shall be permitted and all joints shall
be reinforced.
4
Where purllns are not adopted the sign stiffening and
framing shall be continuous in the horizontal direction.
3
Sign face pletes shall have aU corner points rounded
as shown In the Drawings. These should match cleanly
with the associated corner radius of sign face sheeting to
be fined.
14.1.4.4
14.1,4.5
14-4
5
Rivets and other devices used for fixing sign plates to
their stiffeners or framework, or in the construction of
housings, shall be of a material compatible with the
materials being joined. Spacing of rivets or other fixing
devices shall be uniform and shall not elCceed t50 mm
around the outside edge of any sheet or section of sheet,
and shall not exceed 300mm on cross braces. Hollow
rivets shall not be used. Where sign plates need to be
stiffened this shall be achieved in a manner such that the
sign face materia l is not punctured or otherwise damaged
to accommodate the stiffening.
6
Rivets or other fi>cings must not protrude through the
sign face sheeting
3
Signs erected on two posts shall have each post
positioned so that the dista nee from the center of the post
to the edge of the sign plate is 300mm unless otherwise
shown in the Drawings or Schedules.
14.1.7
4
Traffic signs mounted on posts, except those on
gantries, shall be erected to have their face plumb vertical
and be orientated at 95 degrees from the carriageway
centerline to reduce specular reflection.
i.
ii.
iii.
6
No traffic sign shall be dismantled, resited or
removed without the prior approval of The Engineer.
14.1.4.7
14.1.4.8
14.1.5
Method of Measurement
2
Triangular, circular and other shapes of signs shall
be measured by the number of each type as installed.
3
Sign posts support assemblies shall be measured by
the number of each type installed. The rates shall include
for the foundation and all fixings and painting or other
protection.
4
Temporary signs are not measured separately. Their
cost shall be included as part of the traffic management
requirements stated In Section 1, Subsection 1. 7 of the
Specification.
14.1.6
Basis of Payment
14.2
Road Markings
14.2.1
Description
14.2.2
Materials
14.2.2.1
145
~~
OORLT
Whlut
Type I Road Markings
.. -
Qd ;t 100 mcd/mllx
....... .
Qd ~ 130 mcd/m2/lx
-- -
. .
Qd ~ 160 mcdfm2Jix
Yllow
_Type I Road M_!rk~s-
Qd ~ 80 mcdlm2.1hc
Qd ;t 100 mcdlmnx
~
Qd ~ 130 mcd/m1Jix
95"C minimum
ssc minimum
8
The luminance factor !PI for dry road markings shall
be greater than the figures shown in Table 14.2.2.6.
110"C minimum
Whhlr
45minimum
45minimum
55 m inimum
5%maximum
5%maximum
0.50 minimum
I
II = 0..:20 "!inimum
II = 0.30 minimum
II"' 0.40 minimum
9
The luminance coefficient (Od) under diffuse
illumination under dry conditions, measured in
milllcandellas (mcdl shall after one year in use conform to
the figures shown in Table 14.2.2.5.
White
Type I Road Markings
RL ~ 100
RL;t 150
7
The luminance coefficient (Odl u nder diffuse
Illumination under dry conditions measured in
millicandellas {mcd) shall conform to the figures shown in
Table 14.2.2.5.
RL~ao
RL ;t 150
..
1.9 to 2. 1 g/cm
1.9to 2. 1 g/cm
6
The relative density of the thermoplastic road
markings, measured in grams per cubic centimeter, shall
be within the range shown in Table 14.2.2.4.
'
'
Yt~llow
5
The flow resistance of the thermoplastic road
marking shall not be more than the ftgures shown in Table
14.2.2.3.
5%maximum
II=
.
'
1.9to 2. 1 g/cm
--
Yllow
RL;t200
-.
RL;tzOo
-
~----------
14-6 .
Sultam>to of Oon<>n. StlldrcJ Spodfica1ono ror Ro&d 11. Bridge Construction 2010
White
Type I Road Mar!cing!
RL. 0t 25
Rl.Ot 35
Rl.:iso
. ~.
Yellow
RL~~5
Rl.;t35
Rlit50
Liquid Paint
Colour
ca...
l.lumlnance factor p
.LF5
White
LF6
--
LF7
Yellow
it0.30
it0.40
it0.50
it0.30
it0.40
LF1
LF2
Table 14.2.2-10: Luminance factor
2
The x, y chromaticity co-ordinates for dry road
markings shall lie within the regions defined by the corner
points as shown in Table 14.2.2.11.
Corner
Point-No
Yellow
White
Yellow
y
X
0.355
0.355-
X
0.443 -
y
0.399 ~-
Corner
RointNo
-)
0.3(:15
0.305
Q.f!.45
0.455
o~355
0.3-55
0.443
0.399
0.285
0.325
0.465
0.535
0.335
0.375
0:389
0.431
<i.3o5
o:30s
0.545
0.455
0;285
0.325
0.465
o.53Ji
ii.335
!).375
0.3~
0.431
4
The paint shall be free from skin and settlement that
cannot be reincorporated by stirring. Drying (tack free)
time should be between 5 and 7 minutes dependent on
ambient road surface temperature and wind.
5
The skid resistance of the pei nted road markings
(assisted if necessary by the application of drop-on beads)
shall be not less than 50.
6
For the measurement of reflection under vehicle
headlamp illumination, the coefficient of reflected
luminance RL Is used. RL is expressed in mcd.m-2.1x-1.
Road markings in the dry under vehicle headlamp
illumination shall conform to the figures shown in Table
14.2.2.12.
RL it 100
White
Yellow
RLUO
RL<t35
White
RL:t35
~~
8
Testing of spherical gla$$ beads shall be done to
conform with BS EN 1423 for drop on materials and BS EN
1424 for premix glass bead$. The Contractor shall warrant
that markings win continue to achieve all performance
requirements of this Speclf.cation for liquid paint for a
minimum period of 1 {onel year from the time of
application.
9
Liquid paint is unsuitable for forming raised rib edge
line markings and should not be used for this purpose.
14.2.2.3
Testing
Painting of curbs
2
Application of road marking material shall generally
be by mechanized spraying equipment consisting of a
motor powered self propelled machine with compressor.
A m inimum line width of 100mm shall be sprayed in one
pass. The separate bead gun shall be synchronized to
spray glass spheres immediately onto the surface of the
road marking. An automatic mechanism shall be fitted to
produce broken or dotted lines as shown on the Drawings
without the need for pre-measurement.
If material is applied by hand methods., the
3
Contractor shall provide stenc ~s. speclalized labor and all
necessary equipment to ensure that results match the
quality and finish of the sprayed work, to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. Drop on spherical glass beads shall be
hand applied to give a consistent covering over the whole
of the surface of the road marking between 350 to 400
grams per square meter.
4
All road markings shall comply with the dimensions,
angles and proportions stated in the Highway Design
Standards.
5
Where Indicated on the Drawings, curbs shall be
painted alternately black and ye ~ow to cover the entire
exposed surface. Changes in colors shall be made at joints
between curbs.
Obsolete or existing markings to be replaced shall be
6
removed by a purpose designed line removal machine
capable of operating between 600 and 2500 meters/hour. It
should not cause damage to the road surface. The working
width shall be adapted to the width of the marking line up
to a maximum of 400mm. Hand operated machines used
for removal of small areas of marking shall have a work
rate of 3 meters/minute.
7
The pavement shall be prepared in accordance with
the following:
I.
P.roperty
Relative density
Viscosity at 21"C
Allow!ble lllmJt.
1.48 minimum
L65to70
Drying time
Coverage
Luminance
coefficient
eo mcdfmt/lx minimum
Flexibility
--
1!.
.
..
Chlorinated
' 9.0%
rul:lber content
Table 14.2.2-14: Paint for Curbs
14.2..3
Construction Requirements
1"-e
8
Road marking materials shall only be applied to
surfaces which are clean and dry. Markings shall be free
from raggedness at their edges and shall be uniform and
free from streaks. Longitudinal road markings shall be laid
to a regular alignment.
9
Pre-marking sha be carried out manually on straight
lines and curves using a 100m long string, On strafghts the
pre-marking shall consist of 1 dot mark every 3m, and on
curves every 1m. The pre-marking dot shall be a circle of
40mm diameter cut into 2 equal parts by a gap of 10mm.
14.2.3.1
14.2.3.5
T.,_
3
Raised rib road markings shall be in accordance with
the Highway Design Standards. Spacing of the transverse
raised ribs shall be 500 mm.
Upto60
l in 40
80
1 in 5
4
Raised rib road markings shall not be used adjacent
to hatched areas or central reserve crossings.
100
lin 50
120
1 in 55
14.2.3.2
14.2.4
Method of Measurement
2
When temporary road markings are used on surfaces
that will continue to be used by public traffic after their
removal, any shadow trace remaining after their removal
shall be permanently obliterated. Preformed materials
shalt not be used for this obliteration.
4
Temporary preformed road markings shall only be
applied to surfaces that are clean and dry. Upon rem ova I
they shall be disposed of off Site and if any making good
is necessary to the road surface it shall be satisfactorily
carried out before the road Is ope ned to traffic to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
14.2.6
14.2.3.3
14.2.5
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
Basis of Payment
14.3
Road Studs
14.3.1
Description
l+~
~~
OORl.T
14.3.2
Materials
14.3.2.1
14.3.4
Method of Measurement
4
fhcing of studs shall be by epoxy resin adhesive in
accordance manufacturers requirements.
14.3.5
5
The Contractor shall submit details of the road studs
he proposes to use together with the method of fiXing to
the Engineer for approval.
14.3.2.2
14.3.6
14.3.2.3
14.3.3
Construction Requirements
14.3.3.1
1
TraffiC shall be kept off studs until the resin adhesive
has fully cured,
2
Permanent retroreflecti ng road studs shall be
installed l n the locations and to any other requirements as
shown on the Drawings.
3
Road studs shall be filled so that the d isplacement to
the left or right of the correct line does not ellceed 1Omm.
The angular displacement of road studs shall not exceed
5".
4
Where studs are to be placed within the line the
centre line of the marking and the centre line of the studs
must not be displaced by more than 15mm.
5
Studs shall be lnstalted after the complet ion of the
wearing course and the Installation shall be carried out to
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as
agreed by the Engi near.
6
Studs shall be applied on clean, sound, dry surfaces.
Air temperature shall be greater than 5" at the time of
installation and when it wilt remain above 5" for the time
taken for the adhesive to cure.
Temporary Retroreflecting Road Studs
1-4-10
Ceramic Buttons
14.3.3.2
Basis of Payment
(l'lr.l
ii.
(nr.)
Rtf.
Title
15.1
General
~age
No.
Ref.
Title
151
15.3.4
Method of Measu111ment
15.3.5
Basis of Payment
Items In the Bill of Quantities
15.1.1
Scope
15-1
16.1.2
15.1.3
Design
16-1
16-1
15-1
15.1.4
16.1.6
15.1.5.1
Field Teats
General
15.1 5.2
Insulation Resislllnc:e Test
15-1
15-1
15.1.6
15-2
16-2
15.1.7
15.1.8
16.1.9
Switchgear Tests
Completed Tests
Gener1111l Tec:hniCIII Conditions
16.1.10
Approval
16.1.11
16.1.12
15.1.14
EI'IICtlon
Manuals
Handling
Spa111s
15.1.15
151.16
Road Llglrtlng
Sign Lighting
16.1.13
15.1.17
15.1.18
16.1.19
16.1.20
15.2
15-2
15-2
15-2
15-3
15.4
15-4
15-4
15-4
15-4
15.4.1
15.4.2
Description
Meterials
15.4.3
15.4.4
Construction Requirements
15.4.5
15.4.6
16.5
15-3
15-4
15.5.1
16.6.2
15.5.3
15.5.4
Feeder P,illars
15.6.1
Description
15.6.2
15.8.3
Meterials
Construction Requirements
15.6.4
15.6.5
15.6.6
Method of Measurement
Basla of Payment
Items In the Bill of Ouantltln
15-5
16.2.1
Description
16-6
15.2.2
15.2.3
Materials
Construction Requirements
16-S
15-6
15.7
Elecbical Cables
15.2.4
15.7.1
15.7.2
De&crlptl'on
Materials
15.2.5
15.2.8
Method of MNsurement
Basta of Payment
15-6
15-6
15-6
15.7.2.1
15.3
Package Sub-stations
15-6
15.3.1
15.3.2
Descriptfon
15-6
15.7.2.2
16.7.2.3
15.7.2.4
Materials
Conatructlon Requlrementl
15-6
15-7
15.3.3
16-7
15-8
16-8
15-8
15-8
16-8
15-8
15-8
15.6
15-5
15-7
15-8
16-5
Method of Measu111ment
Basis of Payment
Items In the Sill of Quantities
16-7
Materials
Construction Requlrementl
Method of MeasU111ment
15-5
15-5
16-7
16-7
Deseription
15.5.6
15.5.5
Method of Measurement
BuTs of Payment
Items In the Bill of Quantities
Baals of Payment
Items in the Bill of Quantities
Generally
16.3.6
Page No.
15.7.3
Construction Requirements
15.7.3.1
Cable Jointing and Terminataon
15-9
16-9
16-9
15-9
15-9
16-9
15-9
15-11
15-11
15-11
15-11
15-11
15-11
15-12
15 12
16-12
15 12
15 12
15-12
15 13
Ref.
15.7.3-2
15.7.3.3
16.3.4
15 7.4
15.7.6
16.7.8
Title
P-~ge
Procect5on
Method of Meuurement
Beals of Payment
Item In the BUI of Quentitfes
No.
15-13
15 13
15-14
15-14
15-14
15-14
16.8
15.8.1
16.8.2
15.8.2.1
15.8.2.2
15.8.2.3
15.8.2.4
15.8.2.5
15.8.3
15.8.4
16.8.6
15.8.8
Desc:riptlon
Meterillt
Muts 1nd Columns General
Columns
Htgh MIStS
Road Lighting Lumineires lind l.amPII
Flood Lights
Conttrucdon Requinlmenta
Method of Meuurement
Bella of Payment
Item In the Bill of Quentitfes
15-14
15-14
1514
15-15
15-15
15-16
1518
15-18
15-19
15-19
15-19
16.9
15.9.1
16.9.2
16.9.3
16.9.4
16.9.6
16.9.8
Description
Meterfels
Conltructlon Requinlmentt
Method of MeiiUn~ment
Beall of P.yment
Items In the Bill of Quentitfes
15-19
15-19
15-19
15-20
15-20
15-20
16.10
16-20
16.10.1
Description
Mltllrilll
15.10.2
15.10.21 Surfece Mounted Luminaires
15.10.2.2 Recessed Mounted Lum1naires
Conltructlon Requlmnenta
15.10.3
Method of MeiiUrement
15.10.4
15.10.5
Beall of Payment
Items In the Bill of Quentltle.
16.10.8
16.11
Traffic Signals
15.11.1
Description
15.11.2
Materilll
15.11 21 Generll
16-19
15-20
15-20
15 20
1520
15-21
15-2.1
15-21
15-21
16-21
15-21
15-21
1 ~21
Ref.
Title
Page No.
Method of Me~a~n~ment
Bell of Payment
ltiii'M In the Bill of Ountltles
16.12
15.12.1
16.12.2
16.12.3
16.12.4
115.12.5
15.12.6
16.12.7
15.12.8
16.13
Dlllcriptlon
Design Criteria for Mzrteril!.
end Componentl
Operetlonel Requlrementl
Phytlcel Requlrementt
Construction Requln~ments
Method of Me1aurement
B1al1 of Payment
Items In the Bill of Quantities
Emergency Roadside
Telepllone System
DelcriptJon
16.13.1
Reguletlorw end Standarda
16.13-2
Deflnltlona end Mode of Operation
16.13.3
16.13.4
Producta end Mlllerlall
15.13.4.1 PiU1r Des.gn and M1nufactura
15.13.4.2 Pidar Otmens1011s end We[gbt
15.13.43 lirengibi lity
15.13.4.4 PiNer Materiels end Color
15.13.4.5 IPRittnQ
1&.13.4.6 Vibrltlon 1nd Shocli
15 13.4 7 Wind
15.13.48 Temperature
1S.1349 Lightning Protection
15.13.4 10 Vermin 11101'1151
1521
1522
1523
15,23
1523
15-23
16-23
15-24
1524
1524
1524
15-24
15-25
15-25
11).26
15-25
15-25
15-25
15-28
15-27
15-27
15'27
15-27
16-27
15-27
15-28
15-28
16-29
15-29
15-29
>1529
1529
1529
15 29
15-29
15-29
15-30
15-30
Ref.
Title
Page No.
15-30
15.13.4.12 Pillarldentification
15.13.4.13 Concrete
15-30
Power Supply
15.13.5.2
15.13.5 3
16.13.5.4
Battery
Battery Charging
Solar Panel
15.13.8
ConltrUction Requirement.
15.13.6.1 Drawings
15.13.6 3
15.13.6.4
15.13.6.5
16.13.7
16.13.8
16.13.8
16.14
Method of M1181urament
Baals of Payment
Items In the Bill of OuantHies (Unit)
1530
15-30
1530
15-30
1530
16-31
11531
15-31
15.17
16.17.1
16.17.2
16.17.3
16.17.3.1
15.17.3.2
15-31
Ui.14.3
15 14.4
15-32
o.talled Technical Specification
Remote Control Management Soflwall!l 15-33
Hardware
15-35
15-35
Method of Meauramant
Basia of Payment
15-35
15-36
16.16
Earthing
16-36
16.15.1
Ducriptlon
16.16.2
Materia Ia
15-36
15-36
16.16.3
Con.truatlon Reqalramenta
16-38
15.16.4
15.16.6
16-37
15-37
15.15.8
Elrth RMWanceTMt
Method of Meaaurement
Baals of Payment
15.15 .7
15.16
15-37
16-37
15-37
16.16.1
Delcriptfon
15-37
15.16.2
Materlls
Conatruc:tlon Requlrementa
16-37
15-37
15-38
15-36
16-39
16-31
16-38
Materi.lls
Construction Requirements
16.17.6
15-31
15-37
15-38
Deeaiptlon
15-31
15-31
16-31
Page No.
1S31
15-31
Dalc:ription
16.16.3
Labeling
Test ng and Commissioning
Method of Mea.uramant
Basis of Payment
General Requirements
Title
15.17.4
16.17.6
16.14.2
15.14.8
16.14.7
16.14.8
15.16.4
15-30
15.14.1
16.14.5
1518.3.1
1616.3.2
15-30
Ref.
16-38
1539
1539
1!M0
15-40
16-40
Sultanate of Oman, Srndrd Sp.drtelllions lor ROJ<i & Bridg Conctruetioro 2010
15.1
15.1.1
General
Scope
15.1.2
Design
15.1.3
15.1.4
Factory Tests
All equipment and materials shall be subject to preshipment Inspection and testing at the manufacturers'
premises. The Contractor, in coordination with the
manufacturers of relevant materials shall arrange for the
pre-shipment inspection and testing by the authorized
representative of the Engineer at the manufacturers'
premises.
2
The
Contractor shall
make
all
necessary
arrangements and pay all expenses in this regard
including representation, travelling and transponation,
boarding, lodging and any other associated cost for the
pre-shipment inspection procedures and witnessing of
the tests at the manufacturer's premises. In lieu of the
above tests the Engineer, at his sole discretion, may
accept test certificates by an approved laboratory of
International standards.
3
The Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer
and submit to the Engineer for approval, the complete
detai Is of tests to be performed describing the procedures,
test observations and expected results. All test cenificates
shall be In compliance with recognized international
standards as approved by the Engineer and the Concerned
Authority.
4
The Contractor shall ensure availability of all tools,
instruments, test equipment, materials etc., and all
qualified personnel required for the testing, setting and
adjustment of all equipment and materials including
putting the same into operation.
5
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the date
and time of test for each piece of equipment at least two
weeks in advance. The witnessing of tests by the Engineer
or his representative shall not absolve the Contractor from
his responsibility for the proper functioning of the
equipment, and for furnishing the guarantees. All test
results shall be supplied in triplicate.
15.1.5
Reid Tests
15.1.5.1
General
15--1
~~
OGRll
4
The max,imum range for each reading in the three
successive tests shall exceed 20% of the average value.
After tests have been made, the equipment shall be
reconnected as reqlrired.
15.1.6
Loading Test:
Deflection test.
15-2
15.1.7
Switchgear Tests
3
Trip circuits shall be checked for correct operation
and rating of equipment served . The correct size arid
function of fuses. d isconnect switches, number of
Interlocks, Indicating lights, alarms and remote control
devices shall be in accordance with approved
manufacturer drawings. Name plates shall be checked for
proper designation of equipment served.
15.1 .8
Completed Tests
15.1.9
Sui!Mruo!e of Oman, Strdrd Spodficotiono tor Ra.d & Bridgtl Coni! ruction 2010
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
5
Electric power will be supplied by the concerned
power authority at a defined voltage, 3-phase, 3 or 4 wires,
50Hz. It shall be distributed from sub-station feeder pillars
at 4151240 V, 3-phase, 4-wire having solidly grounded
neutral at the transformer neutral point. Single phase
equipment shall be connected between phases and
neutral in a way to balance the three phases.
15.1.10 Approval
Details of the manufacturers of proposed pi ant end
equipment shall be submitted for prior approval of the
Concerned Authority and Engineer. Approval of any
manufacturer will not constitute approval of his products.
The Contractor shall ascertain that the approved
manufacturers are capable of supplying the required
equipment and in conformity with the Specification.
2
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his
approval, in particular, the following luminaire criteria
before placing an order:
i.
ii.
6
The voltage at any point in an installed power
distribution network shall not deviate from nominal
voltage level by more than 5% under normal system
operating conditions.
iii.
7
The equipment shall be capable of giving continuous
and trouble-free service in the conditions given in Table
15.1.9-1.1t shall be designed and constructed to withstand
full load operation when exposed to sun, dust storms,
corrosive agents, occasional heavy rain and a high level of
ultra violet radiation.
iv.
--
50"C
~Perature
Mhiimumramblent
-2"C
~p_er~u~
~imum temperatura of
metal surl~Jn_djr~i sunJig!!_t
IIO"'C
--- - - ---- - -
Humidity
Table
- Altitude
100%
As per pro.feCt
requirement
8
The component parts of each electrical system or
piece of equipment shall be the latest product of a single
manufacturer, of standard design and dimensions, and
similar parts shall have been in satisfactory service for at
least two years
9
The maximum gust speed at 1Om above ground level
in open level country for a 1 In 50 year return period shall
be taken as: 55m/s (198 kmlh)
10 PVC sleeves where used, shall be of the long chain
high molecular mass type capable of reducing the loss of
15.1.11 Erection
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a
schedule of the parts and equipment to be erected. If
requested by the Engineer the Contractor shall open up for
inspection before erection any plant or equipment which
has been delivered to the Site partly assembled.
15-3
~
~
DGRLT
2
The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the
correctness of the electrical and mechanical connections
to plant and equipment installed before it is
commissioned.
3
Operation of plant and equipment stil l under the
control of the Contractor but which is made live shall be
subject to a 'Permit to Work' procedure in a format agreed
wlth the Engineer and the respective authorities.
15.1.12 Manuals
l
Prior to the final acceptance of the installatlon the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six sets of
operation and maintenance manuals for the installed plant
and equipment. The manuals shall be A4 size in loose leaf
binders containing the following:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv,
v.
vl.
vil
15.1.13 Handling
The Contractor shaU provide slings, lifting tackle and
cra nes for the sale handling of items supplied and shall be
responsible for obtaining and keeping up to date the
necessary test certificates for this ha ndling equipme nt.
Protection of surfaces and floors during instillation shall
be the responsibility ofthe Contractor.
15.1.14 Spares
Spare parts indicated in the Bill of Quantities shall be
supplied suitabty packed for transportation to Site and
long term storage. They shall include fastenings, lugs, and
screws needed for their attachment. Identification labe ls
shall be attache d to the outside and also enclosed within
the storage case.
2
Spares for routine maintenance shall be listed and
supplied In quantities equal to 5% {rounded up to the next
whole unit) of Installed quantities of each type of column,
cable, joint, lamp, control gear, circuit breaker, fuse,
lumlnaire, luminaire cover and associated bolts, nuts,
lampholders, etc.
3 Any additional spare parts recommended by t he
manufacturers, but not named above, shall be inc:luded in
the list
:JJ
Ch~
Averege
Luminance level
Lav (cdlm')
lmalntlined)
Overall
uniformity
Uo= L..oJlav
Longitudinal
uniformity
of each lane
U =L..,..JL...
Maximum
threshold
Increment [Til
Road surface
characteristics
CIE classification
with a. = 0.07
Average
Horizontal
Illuminance
Eav. (LuJCJ
(maintained)
Illuminance ~
IJ
II II i2
1.6
0.4
0.4
0,7
0.7
0.75
0.7
0.4
I
0.6 I
-10%
10%
15%
15%
A3
A3
A3
R3
R3
25
25
12
35
~
35
' '
'
Uniformities
1:3
1:3
1:3
1:3
1:3
E..,JJ;.., ~ -- E..,,.n:,....
1:6
1:6
1: 6 ~1:6
1: 6
--I
rAJ: asphalt road surface with rough texture. slightly
specular!
Table 15.1.15.1: Maintained Road Illumination and
Luminance Levels
~
15--4
0.4
0.7
Jl
~~
0.4
1,5
-.
: 1:6
Sultanat of Om.,n. St~nd>td Spoar.c~tiom ror Rood & Brid91 Cons1tue11on 2010
2
The luminaires or floodlights shall be of purpose
built design incorporating the specified size and type of
lamps.
3
The luminaires or floodlights shall be of pleasing
aesthetic appearance with high quality finish, and shall
comply with BS EN 128991, IEC 60598-1, IEC 605982-3,
IEC 60598-2-5 and other related parts of this standard as
applicable.
i.
ii.
Keep Out.
iii.
Telephone
contact.
number
of
emergency
(LSI
15.2
15.2.1
Description
15.2.2
Materials
15-5
~
~
./"".
~<:Road Lighting and Electrical Installations
15.2.3
Construction Requirements
15.2.4
Method of Measurement
15- 6
15.2.5
Basis of Payment
15.2.6
15.3
Package Substations
15.3.1
Description
lnrJ
15.3.2
Materials
1
Package sub-stations shall be completely self
contained, factory assembled i n a totally enclosed, vandal
and weather resistant housing. ready for placing into
positi on upon a concrete base pad.
2
Package sub-station shall comprise of a single
integrated metal housing, with three totally segregated
compartments, accommodating MV switch-gear, MVII..V
distribution transformer and LV switchgear. Degree of
protection shall be IP 54 for switchgear (MV or LVI
enclosures and IP 23 for transformer housing. MV and LV
connections to corresponding transformer terminals are to
be insulated and inaccessible without the use of tools.
3
The MV live parts shell be completely enclosed in
lockable compartments, which shall be segregated for
maximum safety, but give the necessary access for
cabling and connections. IP5X minimum, in accordance
with IEC 62271. Cables shall enter and leave the
compartments from below. A chain link fence 2m high
shall be provided around the substation with a lockable
gate.
4
The medium voltage switchgear shall consist of two
(21 ring main SF6 switches and one switch-fuse {sealed for
lifel, with fuses mounted In a separate compartment.
Handle design is to ensure delay between closing and re
opening of main switch or earthing switch, to provide an
anti-reflex operation. It shall be Impossible to move earth
switch inadvertently into or from earth position except
when mai n switch Is In the open position. Indication of
switch position shall be mechanical, directly connected to
moving contacts. Each switch shall have a padlocking
device in the open, closed and earth positions. Semaphore
type indicators shall be provided to indicate on, off, earth
on eartlt off positi ons, protected wlth polycarbonate
SoltMnat of Otnan. S~ndatd Sptc;foc>llon for Ro.d II< Bti~ Conllruct10f1 2010
iii.
8
The transformer feeder switch shall have a trip
button or shall trip automatically by fuse operation. An
interlock shall be provided so that the switch-fuse cannot
be put back into service until the faulty fuse has been
replaced.
9
The Iow voltage switchboard shall be a separately
enclosed metal compartment with lockable doors within
the package housing and shell be of equal construction to
the feeder pillar. It shall consist of a triple pole and neutral
manually operated main circuit breaker of the molded
case pattern of the required ampere interrupfng capacity.
Overload and short circuit release mechanisms
comprising thermal and magnetic trips and earth leakage
protection (30mAJ, shall be provided.
10 Three ammeters fined with selector switch,
maximum demand fnd'cator and current transformers
shall be incorporated along with a voltmeter with se'ector
switch and protection fuse.
11 A sing~e phase socket outlet of 16-250 DIN rating
complete with plug top and a 12W fluorescent lighting
fitting of the integral battery/inverter emergency type, with
switching facility to allow emergency light to be initiated
shall be mounted adjacent to the low and medium voltage
switchgear panels and shall be prewired at the factory.
12 The low voltage panel circuits serving the lighting
shall be supplied through triple pole circuit breakers and
triple pole contactors (one set per circuitl which shall be
dual photo-electric cell controlted. The low voltage panel
a nd components shall meet the requirements specified In
Subsection 15.6. The package sub-station shall be fined
Rubber gloves.
Spare fuses.
Safety and operating instructions.
Medium voltage line diagram.
Low voltage circuit diagram with designations.
kV potential tester
Kilowatt hour metering as per requirements
15.3.3
Construction Requirements
15.3.4
Method of Measurement
15.3.5
Basis of Payment
15.3.6
15.4
15.4.1
Description
15 7
~~
DGRLT
15.4.2
Materials
15.4.3
Construction Requirements
15.4.4
Method of Measurement
15.4.5
Basis of Payment
15.4.6
15.5
15.5.1
Materials
fu ses.
As indicated on drawings
Phasn
15.5.2
Rating
-Tappings
15-- 8
3~
- .-
.Qin 11 -
Impedance
Cooling
2
The capacity of pole mounted t ransformers shall be
as shown on the Drawings and or as directed by the
Description
Temperature Rise:
Oil
Windings
40"C
50"C
Table 15.5.2.1: Pole Mounted Transformer Characteristics
15 53
Construction Requirements
i.
2
The Contractor shall install the equipment using the
appropriate lifting gear to prevent damage. The medium
and low voltage connections shall be made only after the
equipment is correctly installed and tested.
ii.
iii.
15.5.4
Method of Measurement
15.5.5
Basis of Payment
15.5.6
3
The Contractor shall submit drawings for approval,
Including but not limited to the following:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
15.6.2
Materials
il
[nr)
Moulded case
Circuit Breakers
MCCB's
{to IEC 609472l
Contactors
(to IEC 60947_.
11
15.6
Feeder Pillars
15.6.1
Description
(nr)
Bus bars, 3
phase + full
neutral
Internal
Cabling
15-9
~~
DGRlT
5
Feeder pillars shall be complete with equipment and
linings incorporating molde!S-case circuit breakers
controlling the main supply and the outgoing circuits.
Feeder pillars shall have the fittings given in Table 15.6.2.1.
6
Equipment, busbars, and conductors within the pillar
shall be fully insulated such that there are no live parts or
connections exposed. The feeder pillar shall have a 50mm
x 6mm high conductivity copper main earth bar for
grounding purposes. A distribution diagram showM'!g
circuit connections, MCCB ratings, cables sizes and
references shaD be suitably fixed to the inside of the
cabinet door. Feeder pillars shall be secured against
unauthorized access by means of wedge locks protected
by brass plugs and operated by a special key.
7
A single phase socket outlet of 16250 DIN rating
complete with plug top and a 12W fluorescent lighting
fining of the integral battery/inverter emerge11cy type, with
switching facility to allow emergency light to be initiated
shall be mounted adjacent to the low panels and shall be
prewi red at the factory.
B
Feeder pillars shall be finished with the fo llowing
Internal and external treatments:
i.
it.
iii.
iv.
De-rust.
De-grease.
One coat of sprayed zinc chromate primer.
Two coats exterior paint, dark grey to BS 381 C
shade632.
15- 10
15.6.4
Method of Measurement
15.6.5
Basis of Payment
Wiring
Wiring shall be modular and neatly arranged on
master terminal boards with suitable numbering
strips and appropriate cartridge type fuses where
required
ii. Connections shall be made at front of terminal
board and with no live metal eKposed.
iii. Metal cases of instrument, control switches,
relays, etc... shall be connected, by bare copper
conductors not less than 2.5 mm2 section, to
nearest earthing bar.
iv. Control wiring shall be copper, PVC insulated, 85
degrees C, 600V grade, and PVC sheathed
cables. Finely stranded copper conductor, silicon
rubber insulated cables shall be used in
proKimity to higher temperature components
and as flexible cable.
v. Wires shall be fitted w ith numbered ferrules of
approved type at each termination
i.
15.6.3
Construction Requirements
15.6.6
15.7
Electrical Cables
15.7.1
Description
(nr)
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
3
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the
Drawings, cables and other feeders shall have copper
conductors.
Cable conductors shall be stranded for
sections 4 mm and above, based on IEC 60228 Class 2.
Signal and control cables shall have solid conductors
unless otherwise specified. Flexible cords shall have
finely stranded conductors. Conductors of single-core
cables 25 mm2 and above shall be compacted. Multi-core
cables 35 mm2 and above shall be sectoral shape.
4
Conductor sizes shall be as shown on the Drawings.
Conductors with cross-sectional area smaller than
specified will not be accepted.
5
Wiring insulation shall be color coded or otherwise
identified as required by the applicable regulations as
follows:
Neutral: blue.
Protective earth: green-andyellow striped.
15- 11
~~
DGRlT
15.7.2
Materials
15.7.2.1
15.7.2.2
Cable Trays
15.7.3
Construction Requirements
1~11
i.
i.
ii.
3
Schedule tests and notify Engineer at least one week
in advance of schedule for test commencement.
4
Provide megger testers of various ranges as
applicable, and HV test equipment as necessary for testing
MV installations. Use 1000 V megger on installations with
nominal voltage over 500 V up to 1000 V, and 5000 V
megger for initial checks on MV installations (up to 15 kVf.
5
On installations of medium-voltage cables and before
electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate
product capability and compliance with requirements.
6
MV Cable Testing: Provide cable test set with D.C.
output voltage and ampere range sufficient to test MV
cables. Cables are to be laid in position {trench or duct
bank), jointed where applicable, but left uncovered, with
ends free of equipment and clear of ground.
7
MV Cable Testing: D.C. test voltage is to be applied
between core under test and the screen in steps, pausing
one minute or more eech step (first step being the A.C.
rms rated voltage of the cable, followed by two equal
stepsf up to maximum test voltage. At each step, and for
the last 515 minutes duration at maximum test voltage,
the ammeter {normally a micro-ammeter) is to be
monitored closely and recorded. If, except as voltage is
increased, the current starts to increase, test is to be
stopped and the installation inspected and tested for the
fault.
i.
ii.
iii.
15.7.3.3
1S. 13
~~
DGRLT
Protection
15.7.4
Method of Measurement
15.7.5
Basis of Payment
15.7.6
(lln.m)
15.8
15.8.1
Description
15- 14
15.8.2
Materials
15.8.2.1
1140.
4
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer detailed
manufacturer's design calculation sheets and supporting
data to show that the masts and columns and foundation
designs respectively are safe and meet the above
requirements. The submitted calculations shall include the
following:
i.
Br~ Cont:ruc110n
21110
6
A door shall be provided In the masts and columns to
permit access to the circuit breaker assembly, junction box,
and winch (where provided) mounted on a backboard
made of durable non-hygroscopic material. The door shall
be weatherproof and fitted with a heavy duty lock. A
stainless steel 12mm diameter earthing bolt shall be
welded inside near the access door.
7
Where indicated on drawings and covered in the
BOO. masts and columns shall be painted with two (2)
coats of epoxy resin paint to an approved color or high
by
the
Concerned
gloss
finish
as
required
Authoritvlfngineer.
8
The Contractor shall produce a certificate from a
structural eng I nearing authority that columns and masts
meet the above requirements. In addition. an agreed
official testing authority's certificates shall be presented to
guarantee the life-time and resistance of the products
under worst climatic conditions.
9
The Contractor shall submit a guarantee from the
manufacturer stating that the design lifetime of the
columns and masts is a minimum of twenty five (251 years
after installation under the worst site conditions in Oman.
If any column or mast or any part thereof fails within the
guarantee period, subject to corrosion, the Contractor
shall replace them free of charge. Without this guarantee
the lighting columns and/or masts will not be
approved/accepted.
15.8.2.2
Steel Columns
2
The luminaires shall be rigidly fixed and bolted to the
column or column arms to prevent wind rotation or
vibration.
3
Columns with one or two luminaires shall be
connected over one phase and neutral. Columns with
three or more luminaires shall be connected over 3 phases
and neutral, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
Bolted terminals and cable lugs of the sizes shown on
Drawings shall be provided with 3 phase and neutral
15.8.2.3
2
The lumi naire rings or brackets shall be constructed
of galvanized steel in accordance with Section 6. Where
necessary. they shall be in two halves joined by bolted
flanges to permit removal. For masts with a moveable
luminaire ring, rollers with a serf canting mechanism shall
be provided made of water resistant non-marking material
with oil-impregnated bronze bushings.
3
The weatherproof wiring chambers shall have
terminal blocks. neutral bars, grounding bolts for electrical
connections, and facilities on the luminaire ring to allow
testing of luminaires while in the lowered position.
Cabling shall be in accordance with Sub-section 15.7. The
high mast cables shall conform to Technical Report No. 7
as given in Paragraph 15.8.2.1, Item 3.
4
The luminaire raising and lowering lead assembly if
fitted shall be manufactured of non-corrosive metals and
the operating cable sleeves shall be enclosed and run on
stainless steel shafts. The lu mlnalre ring or bracket shall
be supported by a 3-cable winching system. Flexible
stainless steel stranded aircraft cables entirely suitable for
the application. with factor of safety 5 times safe working
load of the winch, shall support the luminaire ring
assembly. Nylon or similar stops installed on the steel
cable shall support the luminaire ring assembly In extreme
lower position to within 900 mm above the base of the
mast. Provisions shall be made to prevent the power cable
from winding around the steel hoisting cable.
Arrangements shall be provided for the electricity and
support cables to be separated before passing over their
respective pulleys, and close fitting guides shall be
provided so that the cables cannot disengage from the
pulleys during operation. A steadying system shall keep
the luminaire ring in the correct top position preventing
rotation around Its vertical axis.
15- 15
~~
5
Winching systems shall have a lifting capacity of at
least double the weight of the luminaire ring assembly
and shall be fitted with an approved safety system to
control the ring assembly in the event of a suspension
cable failure.
6
Winches shall be capable of normal operation using
either a portable power tool or by hand, and shall
incorporate a torque limiter which can be adjusted and
locked. Winches shall be self-sustaining without brakes or
clutches which require maintenance and shaU be totally
enclosed and self-lubricating,
7
Termination of winch cables shall not involve
distortion or twisting of the cable structure. One full layer
of turns shall remain on the drum when the lumlnaire ring
is fully lowered or alternatively the drums shall be
grooved to ensure a t idy cable lay.
8
The head frame shall be covered by a shaped
protective aesthetic canopy as shown on the Drawings
and designed to give a coordnated appearance of head
frame with the luminaire ring when the latter is in the
raised position.
9
Two red aircraft obstruction lights within cast
aluminium bodies shall be fitted at the t op of each high
mast attached to the tumi naire ring and arranged to
project through the canopy. A transformer and relay shall
automatically connect the second lamp in the event of
lamp failure.
10 High mast distribution equipment shall be mounted
in a weatherproof enclosure on the baseboard of the lower
compartment of the high mast and shall comprise a back
plate chassis comp!ete with:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
15- 16
5
The columns shall be eit her of the burial type or the
flanged base type, with su itable cable access as shown on
drawing/details. Flanged base plates shall be of galVanized
steel equal in construction to flange plates used on steel
columns (15mm to 20mm thickness) with four anchor
bolts and convenient cable entry, bitumen coated on the
inside and outside. Pigment color range shall be
submitted with the proposal and color shall be selected by
the Engineer before approval is granted on the
manufacturer.
6
Sultanate of Oman. StonrUrd SpodfltlltiOOI tor Road & Bri. Construct0011 2010
7
Tests and approvals for GAP columns shall conform
to the following Standards:
General Outdoor Lighting Pole Specifications:
ASTM- 04923-01
ii. Tensile Strength: DIN EN ISO 5272
iii. Elongation: DIN EN ISO 527-2
iv. Flextural Test. (bending I: DIN EN ISO 14125
v. Impact Bending Test: DIN 53435
vi. Rate of Burning: ASTM- D635-03
vii. Dielectric Breakdown Voltage: ASTM - D14997a
viii. DC Resistance: ASTM- D257-99
ix. Outdoor Weathering: ASTM- D1435-99
i.
i.
li.
iii.
iv.
v.
15.8.2.5
columns
shall
6
Luminaire protectors shall be heat and shock
resistant glass, mounted Into suitable frame assembly
fixed to body by captive screws, and secured by extra
safety clamps to allow replacement of protector and
reflector, for maintenance purposes without danger of tha
cover falling to the ground. Ozone resistant ethylene
propylene or approved equivalent rubber shall ensure
sealing of the front glass, to maintain tha required degree
of protection IP65.
7
Lamp sockets shall be high grade porcelain, mounted
in support brackets with provision to adjust lamps
vertically and axially. Lamp support and locking system
shall grip and prevent lamp movement in operation.
B
Ballast and control gear shall be mounted in
luminaire in separate compartment isolated to protect the
electrical accessories from the direct radiant heat emitted
by the lamp, and with enclosed terminal blocks fitted with
quick-disconnect electrical leads. Where required, control
gear shall be contained in the prewired box, having an
enclosure of IP 54, and mounted on luminaire ring
separately from luminaires.
9
Control gear shall be plug in type for operation at 240
V, A C. single phase, 50 Hz. Ballast shall be trop"calized
class H insulated, specially selected for particular type of
lamp used, and lamps shall be able to start with at least +I
10% variation of nominal voltage and continue in normal
operation with dips attaining 20% for four seconds .
Control gear losses shall not exceed 10% of normal lamp
wattage. AFI suppression devicB shall be provided. Refer
to CISPR Power factor shall be compensated to at least
0.9 lagging or better.
10 Control gear (choke, capacitor, ignitor, etc.) shall be
suitable to stand up to 85 degrees C. ambient temperature
ofthe enclosu ra.
11 Internal connections shall be with hlgh quality heat
resistant wire insulated for 105 deg. C and with porcelain
connectors. Control gear shall comply with the IEC 60947
3 or relevant equivalent British Standard specification or
other acceptable International equivalent.
12 HAC ruse cartridges, suitably ratad and conforming
with IEC 60269, shall be provided, complete with base, for
protection of the luminaire. Fuse shall be rated to
withstand starting current and sha II bB preferably located
in centro! gear enclosure.
13 Terminal blocks shall be of the suitable screw-tunnel
type, clearly marked with arrangement to facilitate
maintenance, quick replacement and easy disconnection
of individual components.
14
15- 17
~~
ii.
iii.
iv.
b)
iii.
cl
d)
i.
il.
iiol.
iv.
v.
4800
8100
13500
22500
33000
lumens
lumens
lumens
lumens
lumens
for
for
for
for
for
35W
55W
90W
135W
185W
lamp
lamp
lamp
lamp
lamp
SOX Etype:
i.
il.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
1800 lumens
3600 lumens
5800 lumens
10500 lumens
17000 lumens
26000 lumens
for
for
for
for
for
for
18W lamp
26W lamp
36W lamp
66W lamp
91W lamp
131W lamp
15- 18
Flood Lights
15.8.3
Construction Requirements
Lighting
mastslcolumns
shall
be
handled,
transported and erected in such a way so as to avoid any
damage. Any damage to pole or galvanizing shall be made
good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Sult"n"to of Ornn. Sw1dtd Sptdfi lllont for Rod & Bridg. Cons:ruaion 2010
2
The lighting masts/columns shell be stored clear of
soil. ground water or other rust producing materials. The
fixing of poles shell be carried out in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and good engineering practice.
3
Mests/colu mns shell be bolted to concrete bases
constructed in accordance with Sub-section 15.17 and
erected in accordance with the mast manufacturer's
instructions. The column or mast shell be vertical to within
0.1% of its height. Final setting and adjustment of the
luminaires shall be carried out alter the masts are erected
and operational.
15.8.6
i.
ii.
Iii.
4
The Contractor shall be responsible until final hand
over for correcting the alignment of any column or bracket
to its or;ginal position except where it is due to vehicle
impact.
15.9
Sign Illumination
15.9.1
Description
5
Where lighting columns/masts are to be installed in
the vicinity of overhead power lines, the Contractor shall
inform the Engineer and act as directed. He shall maintain
clearances from the power lines as the Concerned
Authority's requirements.
6
Masts/columns shall be erected to the height and
with the luminaires as shown on the Drawings. Each
luminaire shall house the required lamp oriented to give
the illumination and luminance on the road surfaces as
stated in Clause 15.1.15, (3land Table 15.1.15. 1.
7
Luminaires on columns shall be aligned parallel with
the long' tudinal profile of the road end set at go to the
centre line,
8
High masts incorporating mobile luminaf re rings
shall be capable of supporting a portable personnel cage
for maintenance. The Contractor shall provide the cage
which shall be capable of safely carrying two persons plus
servicing equipment.
9
The Contractor shall number all the columns/masts
with high quality paint using stencil for 50mm high
lettering. The numbering shall be at 1200mm from the
bottom of pole towards the road. The numbering shall be
in a manner as directed by the Engineer.
15.8.4
Method of Measurement
15.8.5
Basis of Payment
15.9.2
Materials
15.9.3
Construction Requirements
15-19
~~
OGRLT
3
Mirror reflectors shall be 99.5% purity, polished
aluminium reflectors and coated with transparent layer of
silicon protection against w iping.
7
Lighting where required for signs located in
sidewalks in urban areas shall be mounted on the top of
the sign supporting poles, projecting in front of the top
edge of the sign and braced.
4
Control gear shaD be mounted on a "plug-in" type
control gear tray, and shall be housed in a self contained
sealed box.
8
The earth of the cables shall be bonded to the earth
terminal of each enclosure.
15.9.4
Method of Measurement
15.9.5
Basis of Payment
15.9.6
i.
ii.
15.10
15.10.1
Description
15.10.2 Materials
15.10.2,1
15- 20
5
Earth wire shall be connected through the plug and
socket connector to ensure that the earth potential is
maintained on the gear tray when it is being removed
from the lumina ire for maintenance purposes.
6
Luminaires shall have a hinged front glass with at
least 2 hinges assembly which shall comprise a clear
toughened glass plate, not less than 5.0 mm thick, capable
of swinging to the vertical position. The front glass
assembly shall seat on to a neoprene non rotting type
gas~et and once seated shall provide the required degree
of protection. Glass used shall be shatter proof (ofthe type
which once broken. no part of the glass will fall on the
carriageway!. Each luminaire shall have an HRC fuse for
protection.
7
Luminaires shall be complete with their mounting
accessories and shall be supported from unistrut
galvanized steel cha nne! fixed to the soffit of the bridge.
Fixing details shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
8
Lamp sockets shall be high grade porcelain, mounted
in support brackets with provision to adjust lamps
vertically and axially. Lamp support and locking system
shall grip and prevent lamp movement during operation.
9
Ballast and control gear shall be mounted ill
luminaire in separate compartment isolated from the lamp
and with enclosed term inal blocks fitted with quick
disconnect electrical leads, Where required, control gear
shall be contained In the prewired box, having an
enclosure of IP 65, and mounted on luminaire r ing
separately from luminaires. Control gear shall be plug in
type for operation at 240 V, A.C. single phase, 50 Hz.
Ballast shall be specially selected for particular type of
lamps used, end lamps shall be able to start with at least
+/10% variation of nominal voltage and continue in
normal operation with dips attaining 20% for four seconds.
Control gear losses shall not exceed 10% of normal lamp
wattage. RFI suppression device shall be provided. Power
factor shall be compensated to at least 0.9 lagging.
15.10.2.2
1
Luminaires shall comply with IEC 605981, IEC 60598
22. and IEC 6059823
15.11
Traffic Signals
2
Luminaires shall be recessed flush mounted
weatherproof type including lamps, a frame for the
concrete opening and a housing for the control gear.
15.11.1 Description
3
The luminaire body shall be made from epoq
powder coated galvanized sheet steel or from extruded or
pressure die-cast corrosion resistant aluminium alloy.
Aluminium shall be anodized and painted grey.
4
Luminaires within 4m of finished ground level shall
be v and aI resistant.
2
The terms used are as defined in the Highway Design
Standards.
5
The luminaires shall have a hinged front glass
assembly of prismatic toughened glass, not less than
15.11.2 Materials
15.11.2.1
General
Controllers
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
lC.
lCL
xii.
ii.
(nr)
(nr)
Manual
FilCed time
Vehicle actuated
Urban traffic control
Pedestrian fixed vehicle period
Pedestrian vehicle actuated
Bus/1 ight rail transit priority
Part-time
Cable-less linking facility
Hurry ca"l
Emergency priority
Standby software flash mode
3
Controllers shall utilile solid state lamp switching
cards, with a maximum load per lamp switch card of 20A.
The switch cards should be able to support both ELV and
LV configurations.
4
1~21
~~
I.
ii.
iii.
li.
Iii.
6
Controllers shall provide visual displays of the
cunent mode of operation and current stage I t im ings.
7
1522
Signal Equipment
1
Signal poles shall be constructed of galvaniZed steel,
covered by seamless high density polythene. A terminal
block assembly shall be mounted on the top of the mast.
covered by a polythene cap.
2
Standard signal poles shall be 4m in length. 4.75m
poles may be used when the extra height would enable
benet signal visibility.
3
6m poles. with two signal heads mounted at d ifferent
heights, may be used on roads with high speed limits or
where a 4m or 4.75m pole would not provide sufficient
signal visibility. However, they should I'IOt be considered
as a preferred solution for signal installations where other
options exist .
4
Short 2m poles may be used at crossing points to
house a single pedestrian push button.
5
Signal heads shall meet the requirements set out in
BS EN 12368:2006. They shall be lightweight, modular
designs with a m inimum lens diameter of 200mm to
300mm. An signal heads shall contain anti sun-phantom
technology. LED signal heads may be utilized as well as
traditional tungsten bulbs.
6
Backing boards shall be provided on all signal heads
with an East-West alignment, to enhance signal visibility.
On other a ~ g n ments backing boards are recommended
and shall be provided if instructed by the Concerned
Authority.
7
For vehicle detection purposes on a v ehicle actuated
control strategy, above ground vehicle detectors may be
used instead of inductive loop facilities.
8
Where the 85th percentile approach speed is over
4kmlh. it is recommended that microwave. radlf or optical
devices be utilized. For stop-line detection of vehicles,
Sultnate of Oman. Sllndattl Sptefteliont fDr Rood & Brld!le ConoltU<'Iion 2010
Lenadt (a)
&andllrd .Period
~
Minimum Green
4 - 50 (in 1s stBps)
Vehicle Extension
Maximum Green
LBaVing Amber
3 (fixed)
2 (fi~Bd)
_Starting Amber
Inter-greens
?t~rting !ntBr-green
B- 12 (in 1s steps)
Phase Delays
o- 20 (in 1s steps)
Pedestrian Blackout
3 - 20 (in 1utaps)
available by manual
5
Under vehicle actuated mode, when there is an
absence of demands, it shall be possible to revert to an all
red condition, flashing ambers, or a specified stage.
If the flashing amber is to be used during periods of
6
low or no demand, such as night-time, then the flashing
mode shall be preceded by a steady amber and the other
vehicle and pedestrian signals extinguished. The flashing
rate shall be between 55 and 85 per minute, with equal on
and off intervals. The flashing mode sequence shall be
ended by the signals reaching an 'all red' period for 3
seconds, followed by the normal start up sequence
leading to a right of way being shown on a predefined
start up stage.
7
Under vehicle actuated mode the controller shall
honor vehicle demands as and when they appear.
B
In fixed time mode, the controller shall cycle through
aU (or pre-defined) stages in a pre-set timing sequence.
Cables
Controller Root
Ducts
~~
Communic~tlon.
DGRLT
2
Ducts shall be laid a minimum of 600mm below the
carriageway surface or 450mm below the footway surface.
2
Where conditions prevent construction of the pole
base as stipulated above, the Contractor shall provide
poles with welded steel base plates and !mchor bolts to
provide stability, all as approved by the Engineer.
3
Whenever a duct network crosses a road, at least 3
ducts shall be provided under the carriageway.
4
Ducts shall be 100mm internal diameter as standard,
however, separate 50mm internal diameter ducts may be
used to carry the electricity supply and telecommunication
cables to the controller, but no other cables shall be
installed inside these ducts.
5
Spur ducts to the signal pole location, from the
nearest draw-pit shall be provided. These can be 50mm o r
100mm diameter depending on the number of cables to
be installed.
6
Polypropylene draw cords, break weight 5.5kN shall
be provided in each duct; these draw cords shall be
continuous over their entire length with no joints or knots
and shall extend one meter from each end of the duct.
They shall be replaced on each cable draw through so that
they can be reused.
7
Cable duct route identification markers in accordance
with MEW Standard OES 2 shall be provided at 25m
maximum spacing throughout the entire installat ion and
at terminations and bends In the route.
8.
Refer to subsection 15. 17 - civil works for electrical
and communication installations for any other conditions.
15.11.3.4
Draw Pits
Pole installation
15- 24
3
For high masts, the design of the concrete base and
anchoring devices shall be proposed by the Contractor.
based on structural calculations for the ambient conditions,
and shalt be approved by the Engineer before construction.
16.11.3.6
Miscellaneous
Completion
ii.
iii.
iv.
submit
final
closedown
2
Cantilever end Gentry supports for traffic signal
heads shall be measured by type and number installed,
end shall include foundations, fixings end mounting.
3
Electronic equipment shall use components of
assessed quality in accordance with the system outlined in
BS 9000 General Requirements for a System for Electronic
Components of Assessed Quality, or other approved equal.
3
The unit rates shall be deemed to cover for all work
at each installation location, including design, submission
of drawings, obtaining approvals from all Concerned
Authorities, the supply, construction and installation,
transport, and all civil work and miscellaneous items and
close-out procedures.
ii
including foundation
15.12
(Lump Sum)
15.12.1 Description
This Sub-section describes requirements for the
design and installation of the system to detect over-height
vehiclellrucks approaching underpass and to display a
warning to alert drivers not to enter the underpass.
4
All equipment shall be to the approval of the
Concerned Authority. It shall have a proven in service
record, and documentary evidence of this shall be
submitted. Full environmental tests shall be carried out
on a production sample by an independent testing
authority and a certificate supplied to show the suitability
of the equipment for use in the specified environment.
5
Materials and components shall be the latest
technology and best of their respective kind and modern
practice, selected and treated so that no corrosion will
occur during the lifetime of the installation estimated at 20
years.
6
All wiring shall be neatly and securely fixed in
position in an approved manner. The wiring shall be in
high temperature PVC insulated cables or silicon rubber,
color coded for ease of identification. All terminals shall
be of adequate sile.
7
NEMA 3R liP 66 of IEC 605291 rated metallic
equipment enclosures shall be provided with terminals for
attachment of ground safety circuit.
B
Masts shall be designed and constructed to provide
adequate support and stability for the sign and shall be
suitable to support more than one assembly. They shall
be complete with base compartment and pole top
compartment complete with terminal chambers for
connecting incoming cables.
9
Masts shall be constructed from seamless steel,
tubular, with a wall thickness not less than 4.5mm and a
tensile strength of 520 MN/sq.m hot dipped galvanized.
No machining operation shall be allowed after completion
of the galvanizing process. Masts shall be painted with 2
coats of epoxy resin paint to an approved color finish after
completion of the galvanizing process as required by the
Concerned Authority I Engineer.
10 Signs shall be mounted on -brackets supporting both
top and bottom of the sign. Attachment shall be of
stainless steel clamps and mounting brackets which shall
incorporate a wiring duct for the sign wiring. The
attachment shall allow vertical and angular adjustment of
the sign assembly and shall be suitable for the sign
presentation.
11 Mounting heights of sign, the type of sign and the
signal presentation shall be as will be detailed by the
Concerned Authority.
15-25
~
~
~
~<Road Lighti ng and Electrical Installations
i.
15-26
4
Two 118 inch (.32 em) boresight holes are to be
located at Top.Middle of each housing. Front and rear
screws are to be installed In these holes so as to insure a
weather t ight enclosure, and should be removed to allow
alignment of units. Looking through boresight hole from
rear of unit so as to see through the boresight hole i n front
of unit gives the installer a basic means of aiming the unit
in the proper direction. Focusing the unit on opposite
sides of the road in the center of the front boresight while
looking through the rear boresight hole ensures that a
general alignment Is accomplished. This step should be
done from both Transminer and Receiver Unit locations.
Fine tuning of alignment can then be done electronically.
5
The transmitter unit and the receiver units shall each
be provided w ith a barrier to protect the operating
equipment. The enclosure shall maintain its structural
integrity for the operationa l life of the equipment and shall
allow ready access for control edjustment and electrical
interconnection without the use of 1ny tools except a
Phillips head screwdriver.
6
Each of the equipment units shall be provided with
means for rigidly attaching the unit to a vertical cylindrical
pole without requiring any machi ning operation. The
attachment means shall not stress or deform the unit and
shall prevent the movement of the unit in any direction by
the force developed by wind. The mounting means shall
allow adjustment of the vertical position o., the pole. The
mounting means for the transmitter unit and the receiver
unit shall have the capability of adjusting the angular
orientation of the optical axis in both the horiZontal and
vertlcal plane over an angular range of plus or minus five
degrees from horizontal. The transmitter and receiver unit
shall be mounted to detect the presence of vehicles that
exceed the specified vertical height.
7
Warning sign shall meet all electrical (electronic
5pecifications and shall conform. in all essential elements,
with the provisions of the U.S. D.O.T, F.l-t.A. Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices. PIIStics on sign faces
shall be protected by LEXAN or other material providing
equal or greater defense against flying object damage or
vandalism. Signs sha ll be activated and time controlled
by the Detection unit. Lighting shall be provided by high
output fluorescent bulbs for message and incandescent
bulbs with parabolic reflectors for arrows at the top and
bottom of sign. Flashers on LED signs should be of
300mm diameter.
8
Sign housing shall be as indicated on drawings and
provided with rectanguler !shape) reinforced aluminum
capable of withstanding wind loading up 95 li.mlh and
provided with a sun shield projecting at least 36 em.
Letters and arrows shall be normally blanked out. When
iQuminated, arrows shall be red in color, but can be made
in any color specified UP 65 rating).
9
Unit mounting poles (shaft) shall be one or two piece,
adjustable height, seamless, round aluminum tube. Poles
shall Include a handhole centered 46 em above the bottom
of the shaft with a cover secured with stainless steel
screws, Base flange for the attachment of the shaft to the
SUltanate of Oman. Sr.rbtd Sl)fc:Hoc>tions Cor Rood & Brli!Qw ComttucloOn 2010
15.13
(nr)
15.13.1 Description
This Sub-section describes requirements for
emergency roadside telephone systems, including
detailed engineering, coordination, manufacture, supply,
transportation. delivery, installation, joint'ng, connecting
up, testing, commissioning, setting to work, training end
maintenance services during the warranty period. Work
includes:
i.
li.
iiL
iv.
v.
vi.
15- 27
~~
Mlniatry or Transport&:
Communic~tt-lon
OGRLT
vii.
i..
15-28
xi.
4
Product Date: For each component including
descriptions, colors, complete technical specifications, and
manufacturer catalogues for all equipment and materials.
5
Factory Tests: All equipment and cables are to be
tested at manufacturer premises, and test certificates. are
to be submitted to Engineer before shipping and delivery
to site.
Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for approval
6
including, but not limited to, the following:
I.
iL
iii.
iv.
v.
ii.
iii.
b.
c.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
iv.
v.
vi.
15.13.4.2
ii.
Network supplier
a.
Telephone
equipment
shall
be
with
the
mobile
coordinated
telecommunications service provider.
b.
Pillar number
b.
The
india!
telephone
number
programmed to call the CC phone
number
c.
d.
e.
Serial number
f.
A four-digit
Number{IDI
g.
Personal
2
The pillar weight, including the phone equipment,
shall weigh less than 60 Kg.
15.13.4.3
Frangibility
I dentificati on
i.
i.
ii.
iii.
15.13.4.6
15.13.4.7
15.13.4.1
The emergency roadside telephone shell be handsfree, vandal resistant and weather resistant.
15.1 3.4,8
2
The emergency roadside telephone shall be housed
in a pillar with on1y the solar cell being pole mounted.
3
The emergency roadside telephone shali be housed
in a plinth mounted pillar of dimensions described in
Paragraph 15. 13.4.2
i.
ii.
iii.
4
The emergency roadsi de telephone shall have as a
minimum the following features:
iv.
Temperature
15-29
~~
Mlnietry ofT<emsp.>rt
e. Comm<JnlciOtlot>
15.13.4.9
OCiRLT
Electrical Installations
Lightning Protection
1
The emergency telephone shell operate from either
of the following, as shown on the Drawings or instructed
by the Engineer;
3
Earth stake shall be fined with a conductor no less
than 6 mm bonding the earth stake to the base of the
phone pole and to an earth point within the electronics
enclosure.
i.
il.
15.13.6.2
1
The pillar shall be vandal and Impact resistant to
prevent unauthorized access to the internal equipment.
Vandal and i mpact resistance can be defined as being able
to remain functional while withstanding moderate to
severe blows by hand held objects ln most circumstances
without suffering more than cosmetic damage.
2
The pillar shall be fitted with an automatic
tiltlllandalism alert feature with configurable sensitivity
settings with provision for the emergency roadside phone
to make maintenance call and log its location and
condition with the CC manager.
3
Access to the fixing bo!ts att~~thing the phone to the
concrete pad shall only be obtained from inside the
emergency telephone pillar.
15.13.4.12 Pillar Identification
International telephone symbols and pillar numbers
shall be installed on each side of the pillar.
2
The International telephone symbols and emergency
telephone pillar number shall be manufactured using
British Standard.
3
The telephone symbol shall be 150mm in height with
a spacing of 150mm from the top of the pillar to the top of
the telephone symbol,
4
The pillar number shall consist of 80 D N numerals
installed vertically down the pillar w ith a spacing of
150mm from the bottom of the telephone symbol to the
top of the first pillar numeral.
15.13.4.13 Concrete
1
A ll concrete and reinforcement for the bases and
anchor bolt assemblies shall be in accordance with Sub
section 15.17
15.13.4.14 Steelwork
A ll steelwork for the anchor bolt assemblies shall be
hot dipped galvanized in accordance with BS EN ISO
14713: 1999 and BS EN ISO 14761 : 1999.
15-30
15.13.4,11 Vandalism
Power Supply
Battery
15.13.5.3
Battery Charging
Solar Panel
1
The solar panel shall be of sufficient size and wattage
to ensure that the battery receives sufficient charge under
al l weather conditions.
2
A bird guard shalt be fined to the solar cell to
discourage birds from sitting on the eel ~
3
The solar cell support shall provide a minimum of 4.0
meters dearance between the ground and the solar cell.
such that the solar cell is not accessible without a ladder.
4
The solar cell shall be vandal resistant and attached
to the mounting such that it cannot be removed without
special tools provided by the supplier.
5
The solar panel shall be installed facing North and be
angled towards the sun, with the angle being dependant
on the latitude of the location.
Sultanat of Ornnn, Sundrt! ~fl('otiOOO fer Rood & Br~ CoRJINCioon 2010
15.13.6.5
15.1 3.6.1
Drawings
i.
rr.
Iii.
Emargency
roadside
telephone
system
schematic
diagrams,
detailed
design,
connection diagrams, etc.
Construction drawings, lnclud'ng civil works
As-built drawings
Quantity ofsubmittals
i.
ii.
iii.
15.13.6.2
15.14
(Lump Sum)
15.14.1 Description
This Sub-section describes requirements for design,
supply, installation, tesfng and commissioning of a
complete PLMCS installed in feeder pillars, with individual
phase voltage stabmzation, dimming. monitoring, remote
control and remote surveillance suitable for later
connection to server based software for decentralized
operation.
2
15-31
~,.A/
DG~lT
4
The PLMCS shall work with all luminaires; HPS and
HPMV type, equipped with standard magnetic ballast,
Ignitor and PFC capacitor.
5
The PLMCS shall be capable of dlmming HPS and
HPMV lamps in a range of 100% 50% and stabilize the
voltage for MH and FL lamps. It shall be capable of
stabjlizing the output voltage for each phase individually
to -1-/-1% for input voltage fluctuations from 175V to 264V
and shall be able to increase the output voltage by at least
30V to compensate for low input voltage.
6
The PLMCS shall be designed to save between 15%
and 35% of energy on average and shall ensure up to
double the lamp life.
7
The PLMCS shall be completely static, that is with no
moving parts such as variactype' transformers and it
shall not contain triac based equipment.
8
The PLMCS shall be a universal system to work with
any brand of HPS, HPMV, MH or FL lamps, mixed in the
same system or circuit of the FP. It shall be independent of
the brand of lumii'\Bires used.
9
The PLMCS shall be operated via, and conform to,
the loca13-phase 4 wire. solidly earthed neutral, 415 VA C.
electrical system.
10 The kVa rating installed shall be based on full load
shown on the Drawings at pf of 0.8 and a spare capacity
of 30% for future connection of additional loads. In
addjtion each unit shall be de-rated by 30%.
11 Each FP shall have an automatic by-pass system. The
by-pass shall be activated automatically in case of any
malfunction of the PLMCS.
12 The local agent for the PLMCS shall have factory
trained and certified personnel to perform commissioning
and all servicing tasks.
13 The PLMCS shall be a field proven system with at
least 1000 similar products installed worldwide. The
chosen supplier shall have si milar systems installed in at
least 5 major cities in the Middle East.
14 The PLMCS shall use the latest technology, and
comply with international standards such as CE-mark. CEI
171311, EN 60439-1 and UL916. PLMCS shall be CE
marked and conform to such standards. Under no
circumstance shall the system induce harmonic currents
to the supply grid.
15 The PLMCS enclosure shaP be for outdoor
installation, IP 54 minimum to IEC 60529, for both the
power and electronic parts.
16 All system components shall be suitable for
operation within a temperature range from 10deg C to
-1-60deg C
17 Materials shall be certified to ISO 9002 quality
standard.
18 Load must be started at each switching on under
nominal conditions (2301240V RMS -1--1% each phase) even
if the input voltage is at 175V for a programmable time,
(th' s is very important to conserve the lamp life end
conform to the lamp manufacturer's warranty).
15- 32
ii.
iii.
Iii.
iv.
v.
2
Main technical features of power controller shall
include:
i.
ii,
iii.
iv,
v.
vi.
vii.
3
Connections;
i.
ii.
ii.
iil.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
iv.
Number of black-outs
Number of resets
Possibility to download the historical data
recorded In the controller, via portable PC
or modem or from the control center.
ii.
iii.
iv.
~~
OGRLT
v.
ix.
x:iv.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
)(.
xi.
xii.
)(iii.
xv.
xvi.
xvii.
4
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
15- 34
i.
ii.
iii.
Communication:
L
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
6
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
ii.
iii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
7
Automatic
elaboration
of
programmed
maintenance plan, according to user's needs
and setta b"e parameters
Facility to customize maintenance operations
Print out of plan of activities
Recording of failures and unplanned activities
Recording of real activity done
Management of historical data
ii.
Maintenance module
I.
2
Operative system shall be as stated below or as
selected by the Concerned Authority:
1.
15- 35
~~
OGRLT
15.15
(nr)
Earthing
15.15.1 Description
This Sub-section describes requ:rements for
supplying, installing, and testing earthing connections in
electrical installatiol1s, includiflg transformer neutral
earthing, maln earthing terminals or bars, exposed
conductive parts of electrical equipment. extraneous
conductive parts. and standby generator neutral earthing
where installed,
2
The Contractor shall carry out work in accordance
with the followlng:
BS 7671 chapter 54 (seventeenth edition)
or
3
Prior to ordering materials, the Contractor shall
submit data for the Engineer's approval including, but not
limited to, manufacture r's catalogues for earth rods,
connecting clamps, earthing conductors, protective
conductors, bonding conductors, connectors and other
accessories, exothermic we lding kits and tools etc.. and
samples of conductors as requested.
4
The Contractor shall submit drawings for approval by
the Engineer, including, but not limite d to the following:
i.
iL
iii.
iv.
15.15.2 Materials
Fittings, plant, equipment, ducts a nd cables used for
each earthing instillation shall be as specified In other
pe rtinent Clauses of this Section 15. Unless otherwise
15-36
H.
Insulated cable:
a.
Transformer neutra l
b.
Earth mat
Bare cable:
a.
Switchgear frame earth
b,
Transformer frame earth
3
The Insulated cable shall be green-yellow striped
50mm' single core PVC fixed at regula r inte rvals with non.
magl"'etic Insulating cleats and terminated with suitably
sized lugs. The bare conductors shall be 35mm x 6mm or
50mm7 high conductivity copper tape or conductor fixed at
re gular intervals with purpose made brass saddles.
4
Each sub-station and feeder pillar earth mat shall
have two 16mm d iameter copper covered steel earth rods
of 2.5m length, connected together and to the earth bar.
Each rod shall be housed inside a concrete inspection box
recessed into the ground and fitted with a re movable
metal lid with the Inscription 'Earthing Rod'. An earth
resistance test shall be carried out on the earth bar at each
sub-station and feeder pillar. Three readings shall be
obtained on each of the two earth paths connected
individually and in paralle l. The results shall be tabulated
and submitted to the Engineer for approval.
5
The earth bar shall be labeled and the connections
idenlified. The insulated earthing cables for high mast and
lighting column circuits shall be earthed at the low volta ge
supply position at the earth bar,
6
At the masts and each last column on a circuit,
earthing shall be by connecting the earthing bolt to a
16mm diameter copper covered steel rod of 2.5 m length
minimum, driven into the ground a djace nt to the mast or
column to a chieve the required resistance (1 ohm
maximum). Bonding is to be by means of a 16mm2
stranded bare copper conductor. Each mast and column
s hall be bonded to the earthing cable. Where the supply
cable is looped into the column the earthing cable shall
not be cut. The final column in each distribution circuit
shall be bonded to a separate earth rod.
7
The earthing system at s ign lighting installations
shall be as specified for masts and columns.
8
Connections between rods and earthing tape or
cables shall be made by the 'Cadweld' process to produce
5
Earth resistance test shall be performed as the
Engineer's requirements. The earth resistance of each
electrode shall be measured by means of resistance
bridge instrument and results recorded.
15.16
15.16.1 Description
This Sub-section describes requirements for labeling,
testing
and
comm1ss1oning
of
electrical
and
communication systems installations and equipment. The
work is supplementary to the work specified in the
respective parts of this Section 15.
15.16.2 Materials
Labels shall be manufactured from sheet aluminum,
plastics or other approved non-corrosive inert material.
Text shall be die-stamped, engraved, painted or printed
with a legible life expectancy of 20 years. Finished labels
shall be permanently bonded, screwed, riveted, bolted or
wire-locked to the part as appropriate.
Labeling
15-37
~~
3
The test and measuring apparatus provided by the
Contractor to carry out the testing shall be seated as
15 3&
4
Advance notice shall be given to the Engineer of the
t esting program proposed together with a list of the
equipment to be used.
5
The Contractor shall re-test any item that fails. No
repeat test shall be carried out until the cause of fail ure
has been identified and removed.
6
After satisfactory completion of the tests the
Contractor shall obtain authorization from the Engineer
and the Concerned Authority to connect the power supply
to the installation.
15.17
15.17.1
Description
15.17.2 Materials
Backfill material for excavations shall be as specified
in Section 2, Subsection 2.7 of these Specifications.
2
Concrete for column and pole bases, equipment
foundations and other structures shall be Class 30 as
specified in Sub-section 5.1. Reinforcement for cone rete
shall be mild steel in accordance with Section 5, Subsection 5.2 of these Specifications.
3
Anchor boits shall be as specifie d and shown on the
Drawings and as instructed by the Engineer.
Minimum standard shall be ASTM F1554, Grade 55,
minimum thread length of 10 inches, galvanized for a
minimum of 12 inches on the threaded end to the
requirements of ASTM A153. Ea ch is to be supplied whh
too hexagonal nuts and two flat washers, all to be hooked
end on the embedded side.
4
Buildings to house switchgear for the medium
vo;tage switching station shall be as shown on the
Drawings. They shall have adequate space for the
conce rned Authority's e quipment. If buildings are not
defined on the Drawings, they sha ll be constructed of
conventional materials with concrete foundations and
floor, blockwork walls, re ndered internally and externalfy,
and suitable waterproof roof, Doors shall be painted steel,
1.
Excavations for foundations shall be carried out in
accordance with Sub-section 2.7. Foundations located an
old backfill shall have the ground bearing material r~
compacted to the Engineer's requirements. The sides of
excavations for foundations that will be subject to uplift or
lateral forces shell be compacted and approved before any
concrete is poured.
2.
The position of anchor bolts in the concrete bases
shall be set by means of templates. The top of foundation
bases shall be horizontal to a tolerance :t0.25mm across
the width of an individual base.
Where shown on the Drawings duct stubs 300mm long
and to the diameter shown shall be provided in the
structural concrete. uPVC ducts shall be cast into lighting
column, mast and feeder pillar bases to run the incoming
and outgoing power cables.
15.17.3.2
3
When cables cross road, paved area or other services
or are buried i n slab, they shall be laid in protective ducts
of adequate size. The duct! conduit ends after installation
of cable shall be plugged to make them watertight by
means of bituminized hessian or equivalent material.
4
Cables shall be laid without sharp bends or kinks,
and if within 500mm of drainage ware, shall be contained
in a duct.
5
Stack shall be left in cables for which purpose the cut
lengths of cables shall allow about 3% more in the
measured length between terminations (Engineer will
verify the lengths of cablesl. At junction boxes, ample
slack shall be left to prevent straining of cable joints due to
settlement of ca b' e trench.
Cables shall be pulled in uPVC ducts or conduits with
6
care, preferably without the use of any lubricant. Where
necessary, and after approval of the Engineer, the cable
manufacturer's recommended lubricant shall be used. Use
of any kind of aii or soap will not be permitted.
Sharp bends or tees shall not be allowed. At road
7
crossings the duct shall have a bedding and surround of
concrete Class 30 and shall be laid at BOO mm below road
surface or as shown on drawings and directed by the
Engineer.
Prior to backfilling at duct location, the following
B
shall be completed:
i.
ii.
iii.
9
Where ducts rest over rocky soil, a layer of 200 mm
dune sand sha~ be spread, compacted and rammed in
order to create proper bedding for the duct. In waterlogged or unstable soil, a concrete base 200mm thick shall
be laid, followed by 100mm laver of dune sand on top of
the concrete as a base for the duct.
10 Spare ducts shall be provided wherever ducts are
used for MV or LV cable routing. 30% spare ducts or at
least one duct per run, whichever is greater, shall be
provided.
11 Cables, whether Installed in bare ground or in uPVC
ducts or conduits shall not be bent to a radius less than
that recommended by the cable manufacturers.
I.
ii.
iii.
iv.
15- 39
~
~
ii
iii
4
Bases for the 33kV/11 kV pole mounted transformer
station shan be measured by the concrete base H type
const ruction for 11m poles, to the detail of Concerned
Authority, including all related civil works.
5
Bases for the feeder pillars shall be measured by the
number of concrete bases, including incoming and
outgoing ducts for cables and other builders work.
6
Trenches for directly buried cables shall be measured
by linear meter completed. including concrete tile.
warning tape and excavation and backfilling to levels and
dimensions as specified in the Drawings.
7
Bases for light ing columns/high masts shall be
measured separately each by the number of concrete base
and other related civil works, including all related civil
work as the column detail approved.
1S. o
(l'lr.)
(nr.)
vi
Co ~~e rete
vii
viii
ix
(nr.)
one cable
(lin.ml
two cables
(lin.m)
three cables
(lin.m)
(lin.ml
two cables
(lin.m)
)(
(nr.)
(ref.dwg)
(l"ir.)
3
Buildings for package medium voltage switching
stations shall be measured by the number of t he
constructed block work buildings, including foundations,
concrete roof, fence, and all necessary related civil worl!s.
(nr.)
(nr.)
(nr.)
Sultntv of Oman. Stondrd Specifietiono fot Rood Ill Brldgo Construction 2010
xi
xii
(lin.m)
(lin.m)
(nr.)
xiv
(nr.)
XV
xvi
xiii
(nr.)
(nr.)
15- 41
Ref.
Title
16.1
l;andscape
16.1.1
Gllneral
16.1.1.1
16.1.1.2
Page No.
16-1
18'1
16-1
16.1.1.3
Summary
Related Documents
Definition11
16.1.1.4
StJbmittals
16-1
16.1.2
Materials
16.1.2.1
Trees and Shrubs
16.1.2.2
Ground Cov1=r
16.1.2.3
Palms
16.1.2.4
1611.2.5
1611.2.6
Grass Seed
Grass Sod (Turf)
Grass Plugs
16J1.2.7
16-1
16-1
16-2
16-2
16-2
16-2
16-2
16-2
16-2
16-2
16.1.2.8
Grass Sprigs
Topsoil
16.1.2.9
16.11.2.10
Soil Amendments
Fertilizer
1S:3
16-3
16.1.2.11
Mulches
Stakes and,Guvs
16-3
16.1.2.12
16.1.2.13
18.1.2.14
lAndscape Edgings
EroslonControl Materials
16.1.2.15
16.1.3
Construction Requirements
16.1.3.1
General
16.1 ~3:2
Preparation
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-4
16-4
16-4
16-4
16-4
1&-5
16.1.3.3
16.1.3.4
16-5
16-5
16!5
16-6
16.1.3.5
16.1.3.6
16.1.3.7
16.1.3.8
16.1.3.9
16.1.3.10
16.1.311
16.1.3.12
16.1.3.13
16.13.14
16!7
18-7
18-7
Hydro-Seeding
16-7
Sodding
Pluggmg
Spngg1ng
16-7
16-7
16-8
Ref.
Title
Page No.
16.1.3.15
16.1.3.16
16.1.3.H
Mulching
Installation of Edgings
16.1.3.18
16.1.3.19
16.1.3.20
16.1.3.21
16-8
Installation of Miscellaneous Materials 115-8
Cleanup and Protec:ti011
16-8
Disposal of Surplus and Waste
Materials
Warranty end Maintenance
16.1.4
16.1.4.1
Warranty
16.1.4.2
16-8
16-8
168
Maintenance
Method of Meuurement
1&U
1611.5.1
Excavation, Soiling, Cultivating
and Grading
16.1.5.2
16J1.5.3
16-8
18-8
1&-8
16'9
16-9
16-9
16-10
16-10
16-10
16-10
18.1.6
Baals of Payment
16.1.7
16.2
Irrigation System
16-10
16.2.1
Description I General
18'10
16.2.1. 1
16.2.1.2
16.2.1.3
16.2.1.4
16.2.1.5
16.2.1.6
16 2.1.7
Scope
16-10
161 1
16-11
Submttals
Dei1very, Storage and Handling
16 1 1
16-12
16-12
1612
16.2.1.8
Equ pment Labels and Charts
16.2.1.9
Operation and Instruction Manuals
16.2.2
Material
16.2.2.1
16;2.2.2
16.2 2.3
16.2.2.4
16.2.2.5
Jo~nt ng
16.'2.2.5
16.2.2.7
Material
16 12
16-12
~~13
16-13
16-15
16-17
16-19
16-20
16-21
1&-21
Ref.
Title
Pa~;~e
16.2.3
Construction Requinlmenta
16.2.3.1
Excavation, Bedding and BaciCfilling
Pipe Laying - Genen~lly
16.2.3.2
16.2.3.3
Jointing
16.2.3.4
L:ine and Gradient
f.loatation
16.2.3.5
16.2.3.6
P-ipe Built Into Structures
F.ield Testing: Generally
18.2.3.7
Hydrostatic TeSiing of Pressure
18:2.3.8
P.lpelines
Visual Inspection Test
16.2.3.9
18.2.3.10 Deflection Tests for GRP Pipes
18.2.3.11 F.h,!shlng
16.2.3.12 F.ield Protection and Coating
18.2.3.13 Irrigation Gontrol
18.2.3.14 Contract Requirl!fTlents
16.2.3.15 Documentation
16.2.3.18 Maintenance P.rogram
Method of MIIMllrement
18.2.4
Baal of Payment
18.2.5
18.2.6
Item in the Bill of Quantities
No.
1&-21
1621
1621
16-22
1622
1622
11$!22
1622
18!23
18!23
18!23
18!23
16-23
16-24
16-24
16-24
18-24
16-24
16-26
16-25
Sultanate
16.1
Landscape
16.1.1
General
16.1.1.1
Summary
ii.
Ground cover.
iii.
Palms.
iv.
Seed.
v.
Turf-grass sod.
vi.
vii.
Plugs.
Sprigs.
viii.
Topsail.
ix.
Sail amendments.
X.
Fertilizers.
xi.
xii.
2
Sub grade: Surface of subsoil after completing
excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately
beneath planting soil.
3
Manufactured Soil: Soil produced off-site by
homogeneously blending mineral sails or sand with
stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or
planting soil.
4
Planting Soil: Native or Imported topsoil,
manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become
topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.
16.1 .1.4
Mulches.
xiii.
Landscape edgings.
xiv.
Erosion-<:ontrol materials.
XV.
Miscellaneous materials.
xvi. Irrigation
2
Requirements for hard landscaping, paving and
curbs of sidewalks and areas adjacent to soft landscaping
are described in Section 12.
3
Landscape work shall be carried out by an
experienced landscape contractor whose qualifications
and resources are approved by the Engineer, including his
operatives and supervisors and equ'pment.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
4
Where tests and analysis on soil and products are
required by this Specification, they shall be carried out by
an agency approved by the Engineer.
16.1.1.2
Related Documents
ii.
iii.
iv.
16.1.1.3
Definitions
Submittals
ii.
4
Qualification data for firms and persons employed In
the work to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and address of architects/engineers and
owners, and other information specified.
5
Material test reports from qualified independent
testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
relative to compliance of the following materials with
requirements indicated:
i.
ii.
16-1
~
~
OGRLT
6
Planting schedule indicating planned dates and
locations for each type of planting.
7
Maintenance Instructions recommending procedures
to be established by the Employer for maintenance of
landscaping during an entire year.
Submit before
expiration of required maintenance periods.
2
Heights of palms are to be as indicated in the Plant of
Material Schedules shown on Drawings and shall have
corresponding root-ball diameters as follows:
16.1.2
Materials
16.1.2.1
i.
6
SmaU trees shall be small upright or spreading type,
branched or Ptuned naturally according to species and
type and with relationship to caliper, height, and
branching recommended by ANSI Z60.1 and stem form as
follows:
i.
7
Deciduous shrubs shaD have no less than the
mi11imum number of canes required by and measured
according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of
shrub.
8
Broad-leafed evergreens shall be: normal-quality,
well-balanced. broadleaf evergreens of type, height,
spread, and shape conforming to ANSI Z60,1.
16.1.2.2
Ground Cover
Palms
16-2
Palro HtiQh!
Root-ball Diameter
1.5 m
0.75 0.90 m
2.0m
0.90 - 1.10 m
2.5m
1.10 - 1.30m
3.0m
1.30 - 1.50 m
3.5m
1.50-1.80 m
4.0m
1.80 2.00 m
16.1.2.4
Grass Seed
Grass Plugs
Grass Sprigs
Topsoil
1
Topsoil shall conform to ASl M 0 5268, pH range of
5.5 to 7, 4 percent organic material m inimum, free of
stones 25 mm or larger In any dimension, and other
extraneous materials harmful to plant growth, obtained
from any of the sour~s stated below.
r.
ii.
iii.
16.1.2.9
1
Lime shall be dolomite limestone conforming to
ASTM C 602, Class T, agricultural limestone, containing a
minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent, with a
minimum 99 percent passing a 2.36 mm sieve and a
minimum 75 percent passing a 250 micrometer sieve.
Aluminum
2
unadulterated.
sulfate
shall
be
commercial
3
Sand shall be cleaned, washed,
manufactured send, free of toxic materials.
natural
or
5
Peat Humus shall be finely divided or granular
texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, composed of partially
decomposed moss peat or reed-sedge peat.
6
Peat Humus for acid-tolerant trees and shrubs, shall
be moss peat, with a pH range of 3.2 to 4.5, coarse fibrous
texture, medium-divided sphagnum moss peat or reed
sedge peat.
7
Sawdust or ground bark humus shall be decomposed,
nitrogen-treated, of uniform texture, free of chips, stones,
sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
When site treated, mile with at least 2.4 kg of
ammonium nitrate or 4 kg of ammonium
sulfate per cu. m of loose sawdust or ground
bark.
8
Manure shall be well-rotted, unleached stable or
cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by
volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free
of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, end
material harmful to plant growth.
9
Herbicides shall be EPA registered and approved, of
type recommended by the manufacturer.
16.1.2.1 0
3
Commercial fertilizer shall be commercial-grade
complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast
and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural
organic sources of urea-form, phosphorous, and
potassium in the proportions recommended in reports
from a qualified soil testing agency.
4
Slow-release fertilizer shall be granular fertilizer
consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen,
phosphorus, and potassium in the proportions
recommended in reports from a qualified soil testing
agency.
16.1.2.11
Fertilizer
Mulches
1
Mineral mulch shall be hard, durable stone, washed
free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances, of
following type, size range, and color:
i.
ii.
Size Range:
minimum.
iii.
Color:
Uniform tan-beige
acceptable to the Engineer.
grade,
4
Perlite shall be horticultural perlite, soil amendment
grade.
i.
2
Superphosphate shall be commercial, phosphate
mixture, soluble; minimum of 20 percent available
phosphoric acid.
20 mm maximum, 6 mm
color
range,
2
Straw mulch shall be air-dry, clean, mildew- and
seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or
barley.
3
Peat mulch shall be peat humus as specified in
paragraph 16.1 .2.9, items 5 or 6 as appropriate.
4
Compost mulch shall be well-com posted, stable, and
weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture
content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing
through 1-inch (25-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to
10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert
contaminants and free of substances tmcic to plantings;
and as follows:
i.
ii.
5
Fiber mulch shall be biodegradable, dyed-wood,
cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic; free of plant-growth or
germination inhibitors; with maximum moisture content
of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.
6
Non asphaltic tackifier shall be colloidal tackifier
recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for slurry
application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or
germination inhibitors.
Asphalt emulsion shall conform to ASTM 0 977,
7
Grade SSl; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or
germination inhibitors.
16.1.2.12
l
Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new
hardwood, redwood, or pressure-preservative-treated
163
~~
5
Hose Chafing Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic
hose at least 13 mm in diameter, black, cut to lengths
required to protect tree trunks from damage.
6
Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape,
white, 150 mm long.
Burlap: Jute of 0.20 kg/m2 or cloth having same
7
strength and resistance to tearing and capable of rotting in
the ground.
ii.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
16.1.3
Construction Requirements
16.1.3.1
General
with
16-<1
5
Coordinate installation of planting materiels during
normal planting seasons fo r each type of plant materia l
required,
Coordinate planting pe riods with maintenance
periods to provide required maintenance from date of
handing over.
7
Proceed with planting only when existing and
forecast weather conditions permit.
16.1.3.2
Preparation
Sultanata of Om1tn, Stndard Specific.t10111 for !mod 1!. Bndge ContrU<:Iion 2010
16.1.3.3
iii.
a. Spread
approximately
one-half
the
th"ckness of planting soil mix over
loosened sub-grade. Mix thoroughly into
top 100 mm of sub grade and then spread
remainder of planting soil mix.
3
For palms and tree pit or trench backfill, mix planting
soil before backfilling, and stockp'le at site ready for use.
4
For planting beds, mix planting soil either prior to
placing or apply on surface of topsoil and mix thoroughly
before planting.
i.
ii.
16.1.3.4
iii.
4
Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface
plane w ith loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within
plus or minus 13 mm of finish elevation. Roll and rake,
remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted in the
immediate future.
3
Till soil in beds to a minimum depth of 200 mm and
mix with specified soil amendments and fertilizers.
5
Moisten prepared lawn area before planting if soil is
dry. Water thoroughly and aII ow surface to dry before
planting. Do not create muddy soil.
4
Remove existing unsuitable soil to a minimum depth
of 200 mm and replace with prepared planting soil mixture.
6
Restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after
finish grading and before planting.
16.1.3.5
1
2
Newly prepared sub grade: Loosen newly prepared
sub grade to a minimum depth of 150 mm. Remove
stones larger than 25 mm In any dimension and sticks,
roots, rubbish, and other exlraneous matter and dispose
off site.
i.
ii.
16.1.3.6
i.
il
b.
Allow 75 mm of
t~5
~~
iii.
iv.
a.
Allow 75 mm of
b.
b.
l.
il.
iii.
Allow 150 mm of
2
Dispose of subsoil removed from excavations. Do not
mix with planting soil or use as backfill.
3
Notify the Engineer if unexpected rock or
obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are
encountered in excavations.
i.
3
Set balled and bur lapped stock plumb and in center
of pit or trench with top of ball raised above adjacent
finish grades as indicated.
4
Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit
or trench with top of ball raised above adjacent finish
grades as Indicated,
4
Notify the Engineer if subsoil conditions show
unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub
pits.
i.
ii.
iii.
2
Deliver freshly dug and container grown palms, trees
and shrubs to the site just before planting. Do not prune
before delivery. except as approved by the Engineer.
Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald,
drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying
damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a
manner as to destroy natural shape. Maintain protective
covering during delivery. Do not drop trees and shrubs
during delivery.
i.
ii.
16~
5
Set bare-root stock on cushion of planting soil.
Spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface.
and carefully work backfill around roots by hand. Puddle
with water until backfill layers are completely saturated.
Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while
working backfill around roots and placing layers above
roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not
break.
i.
6
Dish and tamp top of backfill to form a 75 mm high
mound around the rim of the pit. Do not cover top of root
with backfill.
7
Wrap trees of 50 mm caliper and larger with trunkwrap tape. Start at base of trunk and spiral cover trunk to
height of first branches. Overlap wrap, exposing half the
width, and securely attach without causing girdling.
Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning, and insect
Infestation and take corrective measures required before
wrapping.
ii.
6
Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying
winds by applying compost mulch, peat mulch or planting
soil within 24 hours after completing seeding operations.
Soak and scatter uniformly to a depth of 4.8 mm and roll
to a smooth surface.
16.1.3.11
i.
ii.
iii.
i.
2
3
Rake seed lightly into top 3 mm of topsoil, roll lightly,
and water with fine spray.
4
Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:6 with
erosion-control fiber mash and slopes exceeding 1:4 with
erosion-eontrol blankets installed and stapled according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
5
Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6
by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a
minimum rate of 42 kg/92.9 sq.m. to form a continuous
blanket 38 mm in loose depth over seeded areas. Spread
by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.
i.
Hydro-Seeding
2
Guy and stake trees exceeding 4.2 m high and more
than 75 mm calf per. Securely attach no fewer than 3 guys
to stakes 750 mm long, driven to grade. Attach flags to
each guy wire, 750 mm above finish grade.
Support palms with 4 guy wires secured to ground
anchors and attached to palm at approximately two thirds
height. Adjust tension as necessary with wire adjusters or
turn buckles.
16.1.3.12 Sodding
Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting.
sod if dormant or if ground is muddy.
Do not lay
2
Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints.
Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap.
Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent
courses. Avoid damage to sub grade or sod during
installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with
sub grade, eliminate air pockets, end form e smooth
surface. Work sifted soli or fine sand into minor cracks
between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid
smothering sod and adjacent grass.
i.
ii.
3
Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours
of planting.
During first week, water daily or more
frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a
minimum depth of 38 mm below sod.
16.1.3.13 Plugging
Plant plugs in holes or furrows, spaced 300 mm apart
in both directions. On slopes, contour furrows to neat
levels.
16-7
~~
16.1,3.14 Sprigging
2
Broadcast sprigs uniformly over prepared surface at
a rate of 0.28 cu. m/92.9 sq.m. and meehanically force
sprigs into lightly moistened soil.
i.
II.
iii.
16.1.3.15
4
Sprigged areas: At end of maintenance period, the
required number of sprigs has been established as wellrooted. viable plants; ;md areas between sprigs are free of
weeds and other undesirable vegetation.
4
Erect barricades and warning signs as required to
protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain
barricades throughout maintenance period and remove
when instructed. Remove erosion-control measures after
g rass or plants are established.
16.1.3.21
2
Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots,
and backfill with planting soi~ Work soil around roots to
ellmlnate air pockets and leave a stight saucer indentation
around plants to hold water. Water thoroughly after
planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet
soil,
16.1.3.17 Mulchi ng
1
Mulch backfilled surfaces of pits, trenches, pl anted
areas .and other areas with mulch material as indicated on
the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
2
Lay the mineral mulch where shown or directed,
average 75mm deep, and finish level with adjacent finish
grades. Do not place mulch against trunks or stems.
16-6
16.1.4
16.1 .4.1
Warranty
Cor~~trvctJan2':l10
i.
Trees.
ii.
Shrubs.
ii.
iii.
Ground cover.
iv.
Palms.
v.
4
A limit of one replacement of each plant material will
be required. except for losses or replacements due to
failure to comply with requirements.
16.1.4.2
Maintenance
2
Begin maintenance of grassed areas immediately
after each area is planted and continue until acceptable
lawn is established, but for not less than the following
periods:
i.
Seeded areas:
Completion.
90
days
from
date
of
5
Mow grass as soon as top growth is tall enough to
cut Repeat mowing to maintain grass at a height of 38 to
50 mm. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass-leaf
growth in initial or subsequent mowing. Do not delay
mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted.
Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and
subsequent mowing to maintain the following grass
height:
6
Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass
is dry. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at
least 0.45 kg/92 9 sq.m. to lawn area.
7
Maintain ground cover by watering, weeding and
fertilizing to establish healthy viable planting for a period
of 6 months after the data of Completion
16.1.5
Method of Measurement
16.1.6.1
3
Planting soil for grassed and planted areas, whether
manufactured or imported, shall be measured together in
cubic meters as the volume specified or shown on the
Drawings or as directed on site.
ii.
Sodded areas:
Completion.
45
days
from
date
of
iii.
Plugged areas:
Completion.
45
days
from
date
of
iv.
Sprigged areas:
Completion.
45
days
from
date
of
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
prevention of erosion.
4
Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping,
hoses, and watering equipment to convey water from
sources and to keep grass uniformly moist to a depth of
100 mm.
i.
of
~~
16.1.5.2
16.1.7
ii,
iii.
iv.
v.
temporary protection.
vi.
16.1.6.3
ii.
Iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
he.
Trunk wrapping,
x.
Labeling,
xi.
xii.
Applying mulches,
xiii.
Temporary protection,
xiv.
16.1.6
with
Basis of Payment
16-10
(cu,m.)
ii.
(cu.m.)
Iii.
(cu.m.)
iv.
(cu .m .)
Grass seeding
Grass sods (turf)
(sq.m .)
vii.
Grass p lugs
(sq.m.)
(sq .m.)
(sq.m.)
hole
ix.
(nr.)
x.
xi,
(nr.l
(nr.)
(ru.l
xiii.
Climbers (Type)
(nr.)
16.2
Irrigation System
16.2.1
Description I General
16.2.1.1
Scope
5
The control head for each Irrigalion branch system
shall include all components as shown on the Drawings,
as required for the complete operation of the system. The
final size of all components of each control head for each
irrigation branch system shall be a minimum of 20%
greater than the demand load as submitted by the
Contractor, with the working drawings, in tabular form
drawn up as follows for approval:
Control
Head
No.
16.2.1.2
Irrigation
Controller
Capacity
at
Control
Head
(lltJhrl
Peele
Water
Demand
Uit/24 hr)
Apptox.
Working
Pressure
at Control
Head
(MN/sq.m)
Approval of Equipment
4
The Engineer may verify the performance and quality
of any samples by arranging for such tests as he deems
appropriate to be carried out, at the Contractor's expense.
Approval of samples by the Engineer shall not relieve the
Contractor of his obligations with respect to the suitability
of equipment or its final performance once installed, and
coordination of elements into a fully operational irrigation
system. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any
compensation for the rejection of any sample by the
Engineer and shall be held responsible for any delay
resulting from such rejection.
16.2.1.4
Submittals
ii.
Iii.
iv.
Valves.
Include
aboveground
and
underground; general-duty, pressure-reducing,
manual and automatic control, and quickcoupler types.
mechanical
and
v.
Valve boxes.
vi.
vii.
viii.
2
Shop Drawings: Show irrigation system, including
pi an layout and locations, types, sizes, capacities, and flow
characteristics of piping components.
Include water
meters, backflow preventers, valves. piping, sprinklers and
devices, specialties, accessories, controls, and wiring.
Show areas of sprinkler spray and overspray in
accordance with the requirements of the Specification.
3
Coordination Drawings: Show piping and major
system components.
Indicate interface end spatial
relationship between piping, system components,
adjacent utilities, and proximate structures.
4
Test Reports: Submit reports of tests on materials
and installations as directed by the Engineer.
5
Maintenance Data : Include in maintenance manuals
data for the following:
i.
ii.
iii.
Sprinklers.
iv.
Specialties.
v.
Controllers.
6
As-Built Drawings: At project close-out, submit
record drawings of Installed pipework and products, in
accordance with the requirements of the Specification,
Section 1, Sub-section 1.12. The drawings shall show the
location, with respect to the highway and other pipelines
and other permanent features, of all pumping stations,
1611
~
../"..../
M nletry of Trcnport
a. Communl=tlono
DGRLT
16.2.1.5
ii.
~i.
2
During Storage:
Use
according to the following:
I.
ii.
3.
Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps.
Maintajn end caps through shipping, storage. and
handling to prevent pipe-end damoge and to prevent
entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
4.
Protect stored piping from moisture and din. Elevate
above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor
when storing inside.
5.
Protect flanges. fittings. and specialties from
moisture and dirt.
6.
Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight.
Support to pravent sagging and banding.
7.
Manufacturer's recommendations on handling.
repairing, laying, jointing, anchoring, cutting and other
works for pipes and fittings are to be strictly followed.
16.2.1.6
16-12
3
The Contractor shall be responsible for the
correctness and safety of all electrical and mechanical
connections for the irrigation system. before the system is
brought into service, including checking the proximity of
different metals to ensure no chemical reaction or
corrosion will occur.
16.2.1.7
Spares
Sultan11te cof Oml'n. Standard Specifioltiom for Ro.d & Bridg C<lnl!rLICtlon20tO
11.
iii.
iv.
v.
H.
iW.
16.2.2
Material
w.
16.2.2.1
i.
ii.
iii .
iv.
v.
b.
c.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
V.
15-13
~~
DGRlT
c.
vi.
vii.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
dale of manufacturer:
pressure rating,
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
1614
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
xii.
xiii.
xiv.
xv.
xvl.
SuiIanete of Oman. Standard Specific.~iom for Road & BNdg ComlrW<tl<lrl 2010
16.2.2.2
ii.
iii.
lt
Iii.
iv.
v.
vi .
viL
i.
ii.
Check Valves
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
11.
111.
iv.
v.
vi.
iv.
Float Valves
i.
ii.
iii.
Globe Va lves
i.
1615
Comm.,n!e41tlono. DGfiLT
v.
vi,
i.
ii.
iii.
iv,
v.
Air Valves
i.
U.
iii.
1616
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
Sultn11t11 a f Otmm. Standrd Sl)lleiHcwon for Ra.d 1!. Bndge Consttl.ldion 2010
vi.
vii.
10
i1.
IIi.
lv.
e.
c.
d.
Ystrainers.
e.
Interconnecting stainless steel tub'ng and
unions.
v.
tv.
v.
12 Electric
Regulation
Remote
Control
Valves with
Pressure
i.
ii.
16.2.2.3
Irrigation Equipment
l i.
iii.
ill.
v.
be
i~.
i.
shall
range
ii.
,,
11H7
~~
OGRLT
iii.
v.
ii.
iv.
H.
iii.
iv.
v.
1!1.
Bubblers
i.
ii.
vii.
iii.
viii.
Emitters
i.
ii.
iii.
Performance: The emitter shall have a selfflushing action to minimize clogging, and shall
operate at a constant flow discharge over a
pressure range specified on the Drawings.
Backflow Preventers
i.
1&15
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
shall
be
General
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
"
vi.
vL
r.
ii.
iii
Programme Controllers
i.
II.
iv.
v.
ii.
iii.
llalve Accessories
i.
16-19
~
./'.._/
Mlnlatry ol
Tronpo~ &
Communl=tlon . OGRLT
fi.
Ill.
lv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii,
a.
b.
c.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
16.2.2.5
Jointing Material
Generally
16ZO
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
Flexible Couplings
i.
ii.
Sultanat "' Otnan. Stndrd Speafic11tono fat Ro.d & Bnd; ConstrLIC1ior12010
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
Dismantling Couplings
i.
ii.
Iii.
iv.
ii.
iii.
16.2.2.6
Pumping Plant
16.2.3
Construction Requirements
16.2.3.1
16-21
'-...,/~
Ministry of TranspOrt
a. Communication. DGRLT
4
Differing pipe and fitting m eterial: The Contractor
shall joint with adaptors as recommended by pipe
manufacturer.
16.2.3.4
2
Deflection of joint: The Contractor shall not deflect
flexible joints beyond maximum permissible angles given
by manufacturer and/or relevant Standards.
3
Patent detachable and flexible joi nts: The Contractor
shall strictly comply with special instructions Issued by
Floatation
i.
ii.
iii.
Jointing
16-22
16.2.3.7
3
Fittings and joints: The Contractor shall permanently
anchor fittings before testing and leave all joints exposed
for chacki ng.
4
Test sections: The Contractor shall limit test sections
to not more than 500 m.
5
Test sections: The Contractor shall test pressure lines
between valve chambers whenever possible.
6
Test sections: No testing shall be carried out against
or through the pressure reducing valves. The setting of the
pressure reducing valves shall not be changed for testing
purposes.
16.2.3.9
7
Test plug: The Contractor shall secure end of main
and test pi ug by struts.
5
The Contractor shall check pipe barrel for visible
cracks.
B
Closed valve: The Contractor shall not test against a
closed valve unless there is no acceptable alternative.
9
The Contractor shall apply pressure by manually
operated test pump or, in the case of large diameter mains,
by power driven test pump, if approved.
18.2.3.8
2
Stage 1: at completion of primary backfill (deflection
at this stage should be below 0.5%).
3
Stage 2: at final
deflection 2.5%).
4
Stage 3: six months after final backfill (maximum
allowable deflection 4.0%].
5
Pipes not passing the deflection tests at Stage 2 or
Stage 3 will be removed and replaced.
16.2.3.11
Flushing
2
The Contractor shall provide equipment, gauges,
temporary connections needed for flushing.
The
Contractor shall arrange with the Employer to draw water
from existing sources.
2
Entrapped air shall be bled and pressurizing shall
then proceed until the specified test pressure is reached in
the lowest part of the pipeline section under test. Further
quantities of entrapped air shall be bled while the pressure
is being raised.
3
The Contractor shall flush mains in sections as
directed by the Engineer.
3
Unless otherwise specified, the test pressure shall be
equal to 1.5 limes the maximum working pressure of the
pipeline as shown on the Drawings or as determined by
the Engineer on Site, but shall in no case exceed 75% of
the factory hydrostatic test pressure.
4
The test pressure shall be maintained for one hour by
pumping using a separate test pump. Pumping shall then
be stopped for 2 hours, at the end of which time the line
sha II be re-pressurized to the original test pressure and the
volume of water pumped into the line recorded.
5
The pipeline shall be deemed to have failed the test if
visible leaks are detected (regardless of leakage being
within the allowable specified limit) or if the volume of
water pumped to restore original test pressure after the
period when pumping was stopped exceeds 0.1 liter/day
per km of pipe per mm of pipe diameter for each 3 kg/cm 2
of applied pressure for other pipe material.
4
The Contractor shall use washout valves and fire
hydrants to drain flushing water.
5
The Contractor shall flush main until effluent is clean
and then clean as directed. 1 to 2 times volume of pipe is
usually required for such flushing.
16-23 .
~~
2
The controllers shall be interlocked with the pumping
system to ensure that the pumps operate after the
irrigation valves are open.
3
The irrigation control electric cables. connecting the
irrigation program controDer to the solenoic:l valves shall
be copper PVC insulated and PVC sheathed. The sizes of
cables shall be commensurate with the distances between
the controller and valves, operatJng pressure and
manufacturer's recommendations. The cables shall be
approved for ground feeders directly buried and rated for
600/l,OOOV. They shall be clipped to the main water
pipework. Multi-runs of cables shall be bunched and tied
together at one m intervals using PVC tape and clipped to
the underside of the water pipework at 2 m intervals using
plastic straps.
To allow full flexibility of the system, each valve shall
4
have a separate control cable such that a ny valve
sequence control may be re-adjusted.
5
Where required, cable junction boxes shall be fitted.
These she~ be purpose made boxes fitted with fixed
connectors and suitably labeled. The boxes shall be fined
with glands and gasketed lid to ensure a fully dust tight
and weatherproof enclosure to 1Pti5.
6
Each solenoid valve shall be fitted with fixed
terminals inside an IP65 box and suitable for wiring from
the valve to be connected.
7
All cable cores shall be fitted with marker ferrules at
each end for ease of identification, and all valves shall be
fitted with identification labels.
16.2.3.14 Contract Requirements
The Contractor shall prepare working drawings of the
irrigation electrical system including all necessary
calculations and these shall be submitted in triplicate for
approval prior to commencing the Works on Site.
2
The Contractor shall submit, In triplicate, full details
of all equipment to be supplied for approval before firm
orders for the equipment Jre placed.
3
The Contractor shall submit As-Built" drawings of
the insta llation on completion.
4
The Contractor shall maintain the installation
throughout the Period of Mainte nance a nd sha ll keep a
detailed record of all malntena"ce and repair action taken.
16.2.3.15 Documentation
On completion of the Works, the Contractor shall
supply record, operation and mainte nance data. A single
llne diagram of the electrical installation shall be framed
and mounted in each pumping st1tion.
2
All equipment and circuits shall be properly labeled
a nd reference shall be included on the single line diagram,
1&-2
2
During the Period of Maintenance, the Contractor
shall maintain in proper operating condition all irrigation
equipment, pipes, valves, pumping stations, and
appurtenances. A record shall be kept of a n maintenance
and repair activities throughout the Period of Maintenance,
including the date, localion and type of work performed.
all repairs and replacement, activities and equipment
relevant to the Maintenance works. This record shall be
complete end acceptable to the Engineer.
16.2.4
Method of Measurement
Sultanote o I Oma" Stnd&~d Spe<:ific~o!ll lor Rood & Sridgo Co0$tr"<tlon 2010
7
Irrigation program controllers shell be measured by
the number of each type or specification reference
installed. The rates stated In the Bill of Quantities shall be
deemed to include for all items and work required for a
fully operational system, including transport, electrical
installations and civil work.
8
Where spares are ordered by the Engineer, they will
be measured by number and paid for at the rates stated In
the Bill of Quantities for each type, size and class of spare
part authorized by the Engineer, purchased by the
Contractor, handed over. and accepted.
16.2.5
Basis of Payment
16.2.6
lin.m.
ii
nr.
iii
nr.
iv
nr.
vi
lin.m.
nr.
HiUi
Ref.
Title
17.1
Scope
17.1.1
Deactlptlon
17-1
17.2
Materials
17-1
17.2.1
17.2.2
17.2.3
17.2.4
17.2.6
1'7.2.5.1
17.2.5.2
17.2.5.3
17.2.5.4
17.2.6
17.2.6.1
17.2.6.2
17.2.6.3
17.2.6.4
17.2.6.5
17.2.7
17.2.8
17.2.9
Mlltlllwork Generally
BcKts, Inserts and Culhlona
Coven and Framee
Painting Metalwork
Piping and Appurtenance
General Requirements
Pipes and Fittings
Pipe Ac:ctlssories
Jointing Material
Valvu and Accu&oriea
Gate Valves
Butterfly Valves
Check Valves
Control Valves
Sundries
Method of Menui'Bment
S.ala of Payment
Items In the Bill of Ouanthlee
17.3
Equipment
Page No.
17.3.:1
General Requlrementl
Pumpe
17.3.2
17.3.2.1
Submersible Drainage Pump
17.3 2.2
Horizontal Pumps
17.3.2.3
High Pressure Booster Pumping Set
Employing Membrane Tank
17.3.2.4
H gh Pressure Booster Pumping Set
Employing Var~ ble Speed Pumps
17.3.2.5
Duplex Sump Pumps
17.3.3
Surge Tanka
17.3.4
Ovemead Mllterial H.ndllng
Equipment
17.3.4.1
Monorail Syostem
17-1
17-1
171
17-1
17-1
17-1
171
171
172
17-2
17-3
17-3
17-3
173
17-4
17-5
17-6
17-5
17-5
17-6
17-6
17-6
176
17-7
17-7
17~
179
17-10
17-10
17-10
Ref.
Title
17.3.5
17.3.5.1
17.3.6
17.3.6.1
17.3.6.2
17.3.6.3
17.3.7
17.3.8
17.3.9
Fertlllz.tlon Equipment
f;BI'tilizer Injection Equipment
Instrumentation and Controla
General
Level Controller Type IIC-1
Pressure Gau~s
Method of Meuuremant
Baals of Payment
hems In the Bill of Quantities
17.4
Construction Requirements
17.4.1
17.4.2
17.4.3
17.4.4
Page No.
17w11
11-1 1
17 11
17-1 1
17-11
17-11
17 11
17-12
17-12
17-12
17-12
17-12
11 13
17-13
Pumping Stations)
17.1
Scope
17.2.5
17.1.1
Description
17.2.5.1
General Requirements
2
The descriptions of materials, equipment and
construction requirements given in this Section are
generic. Particular requirements for each pumping station
shall be as stated in the Special Specification and on the
Drawings.
Nominal diameter.
Class designation.
lniti als and number of relevant Standard
17.2
Materials
17.2.1
Metalwork Generally
Date of manufacture.
17.2.2
3
Whenever required by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall arrange to collect samples of the materials selected
by the Engineer, and transport them to, and have them
tested by an independent Laboratory.
17.2.5.2
ii.
iii.
2
U-bolts shall be welded to pipes at points of contact
and bolted to structural angle frame securely fixed to
structure.
3
Embedded
concreting.
inserts
shall
be
installed
during
17.2.4
Painting Metalwork
4
Spring cushions shall be used where a horizontal
pipe is subject to considerable vertical movement or
vibration.
17.2.3
i.
ii.
4
uPVC pressure pipe: pipe shall conform to BS 3506
Class C with outside diameters to BS ISO 119221.
I.
17 1
'V
~
DGflLT
~
~<(_Pumping Stations
17.2.5.3
Pipe Accessories
ii.
iii.
2
Ferrous flanged adaptors: material shall be cast iron
body conforming to BS EN 1561 grade 14 or mild steel
plate to BS 10025 and malleable cast iron flange to BS EN
1562 grade 20/tO or rolled steel to BS 970EN3A and
rubber rings to BS EN 681 .
i.
ii.
3
Flexib' e pipe connections: flexible connections shall
be seamless bronze tubing w ith annular corrugations
covered wit h high t ensile bronze braid suitable for the
system working pressure.
Connect1ons shall have screwed ends for pipes
50 mm diameter and under and flanged ends for
plpes over 50 mm diameter.
5
Dismantling couplings shall have an extensible
connection between pipe sections. and be mounted next
to valves to enable easy dismantling from pipe work or to
permit pipe joining when butterfly valve is removed for
maintenance.
i.
ii.
172 .
ii.
iii.
17.2.5.4
Pumping Stations)
2
Rings shall be elastomeric conforming to BS EN 681.
Dimensions to manufacturer's recommendations to suit
type of joint required.
3
Bolts and nuts shall be ISO metric black hexagon
conforming to BS 4190, minimum tensile strength 433
MN/m2, maximum elongation 17%. After fixing, bolt
projection shall be maximum 6 mm, minimum 3 mm.
4
5
Dielectric Joints shall have insulating neoprene or
phenol gasket between flanges and phenol or
polyethylene sleeves and washers between bolts, nuts
and flanges. Joints shall be suitable for the operating
pressure of the system.
17.2.6
17.2.6.1
Gate Valves
Butterfly Valves
2
Cast iron check valves: type shall conform to BS EN
12334, swing straight panarn, for vertical use and with
pressure rating suitable for the system working pressure.
Material of component parts shall be from basic
materials listed in BS EN 12334 Tabla 5, under
'copper alloy faced'.
ii. Seating or facing rings shall be renewable. An
arrow showing direction of flow shall be visible
from outside and cast integral with the valva
housing.
iii. End connections shall be as shown on the
Drawings. Flanged end connections shall be to
BS EN 1092.
iv. Casting surfaces shall be given at factory an
initial coat of protective paint immediately after
that blasting and a second coat on assembly.
Protective coating shall be hot applied coal tar or
cold applied bitumen to BS 4164 or BS 3416
respectively. Thickness of coat shall be 1 mm.
i.
Check Valves
ii.
Cushioned check valves: type shall be cushioned
type, counter-weighted metal seated check with attached
cushion chamber to permit valva to close without slam or
bang. Valve shall have a pressure rating suite ble for the
system working pressure.
iii.
C(Jtnmunlcot,ans
OGRLT
.../"'.~yumping Stations
iv.
17.2.6.4
17-4 .
2
Surge control valves: type shall be straight pattern,
specifically designed to prevent excessive surge pressures
In event of power faiture. Valve shall have pilots to cause
valve to open on either low pressure or high pressure
wave. Under normal operation, valve acts as relief valve
which can be set to open at any pressure above normal
operating pressure. At the same time, valve shell open at
any set pressure below its normal operating pressure.
Function shall be such that on power failure,
valve opens on initial down-surge in pressure (if
this surge is not already controlled by surge
chamber) and remains open until high pressure
wave returns end passes thro\Igh valve without
generating a large up-surge in pressure. After
high pressure wave has passed, valve closes
slowly in 2 minutes to prevent further pressure
surges. Valve also opens on high pressure
unless surge has been attenuated by surge
chambers.
ii. Operation shall be on differential piston principle
such that area on underside of piston is no tess
then pipe area, end area on upper surface of
piston is of greater area. Valve shaD operate in
1ny position without assistance of springs.
iii. Valve size shall be IS shown on the drawings and
pressure rating shall be suitable for system
operating and ant!cipated maximum surge
pressure. Valve shall be of extra heavy
construction throughout with body of cast steel
to ASTM A216 WCB and flanges conforming to
ANSI st1111derds. Internal trim shall be bronze to
ASTM B 62. Piston shall be guided on its outside
diameter by long-stroke stationary V-ports
downstream of seating surface to minimize
Piston shall be
consequence of thronling.
bronze and pilots stainless steel. Valve shall
contain rubber removable seat tnsert.
iv . Repairs shall be possible without removing valve
from line. Valve shall have no external packing
glands or stuffing boxes.
v. Pilots and accessories shall include the following:
i.
recommended
by
Pumping Stations)
vi
17.2.6.5
(iii)
(iv)
Sundri es
17.2.7
(v}
(vi)
Method of Measurement
(vil)
2
Pipes shall be measured by linear meter of each typa
and size of pipe. Measurement shall be of the center line
of pipes (overall), couplings, fittings and branches. Rates
for pipes shall be deemed to include all related pipe work,
including but not necessarily limited to:
Flexible
pipe
couplings
adaptors
and
connections.
Header pipes and dismantling coup ings,
Purpose made pipes and purpose made fittings.
Everything necessary for jointing.
Bends. tees, joints, unions, flanges, and pipe
fittings including cutting and jointing pipe to
fittings, valves end equipment
Pipe supports and support assemblies, hangers,
clips, anchors and guides.
Wrapping and waterproofing of underground
and or exposed pipes.
Pipe sleeves and packing.
Pipe cleaning priming and painting.
All other pipe and pipe work ancillaries'
necessary required or reasonably inferred.
3
Valves shall be measured by the number of each
type installed. Rates shall be deemed to include for factory
and on-site test, tests at Independent laboratories, all
fixing and jointing accessories.
17.2.8
Basis of Payment
(viii]
(ix]
(x)
uPVC pressure
(state size)
Gate
size)
Valves
pipe
(lin.m.)
(state
(nr.)
(nr.)
Check
size)
(nr.)
Valves
(state
(nr.)
(nr.)
(nr.)
(nr.)
17.3
Equipment
17.3.1
General Requirements
2
Pumps shall have factory plugged connections for
casing vent, drain and suction and discharge pressure
gauges.
3
Impellers and rotating assemblies shall be statically
and dynamically balanced at factory.
4
Packing rings shall be installed in alternata layers
staggered 90 degrees. Packing shall be tightened for seal
while permitting prescribed amount of leakage for
lubrication.
5
Pumps shall have shaft packing or mechanical seals
compatible with pump design and nature of liquid
pumped
in
accordance
with
manufacturer's
recommendations or as specified.
6
Pump operating point of specified flow and head
shall fall near the point of maximum efficiency as obtained
from manufacturer's published data.
7
Horsepower rating of pump drive motor shall ensure
non-overloading of motor throughout capacity range of
pump for Impeller diameter selected.
17.2.9
Lump Sum
(lin.m.)
175
~
~
~~yumping Stations
9
Shop drawlngs; The Contractor submit shop
drawings for each pump for approval, prior to shipment
from factory, as follows:
Certified performance curves showing job
number, customer and customer order number,
pump designation number shown on the
drawings, date of manufacture, model number,
pump size, Impeller diameter. Impeller type,
maximum impeller diameter pump can
accommodate, rpm, noise data, flow.head
characteristic curve, consumed horsepower
curve and pump efficiency curve.
Pump cross-sectional drawings showlnQ major
components with parts numbers t nd parts list
Pump outline dimensional drawing showing
overall dimens:ons, location of foundation bolt
holes and sizes, location and rating of suction
and discharge nozzles.
Recommended list of spare parts, where not
specified elsewhere.
Installation,
operation
instruction manuaL
and
maintenance
report
shall
include
the following
17-6
17.3.2
Pumps
17.3.2.1
submersib!e
vertical
electric
i.
8
Pump shall be supplied from factory with required
number of level regulators of the pear-shaped type, with
internal coated type switch and weighted to be vertical in
air and horizontal in water without floating. Regulator
shall have three contacts to make it suitable for either
starting or stopping motors. Regulators shall have
necessery lengths of three-core electric cable and both
reguletor case end cable insulation shall be non-f;orrosive
material resists nt to and for application in liquid served.
Level reguletors shall be supplied from factory with
special cable hoi der bracket designed to guide and
support power and level regulator cable, Level regulators
shall start and stop pumps at pre-set levels through the
control panel. Levels shell be shown on the Drawings. In
the event of a feu It In one pump, control panel shall switch
off defective pump give an alarm signal and start stand by
pump. Starting sequence of pumps shall be automatically
alternated through the control panel.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
9
Pump motor control panel shall be weatherproof and
suitable for outdoor Installation, minimum IP 55 enclosure
protection, with lockable cover and completely assembled,
wired and tested at factory ready for installation with
simple external electrical connections. Panel shall contain,
but is not necessary limited to, the following:
vii.
vii i.
Motor starters.
Over-riding starter buttons.
Indicating lamps for pump in operation.
6
Motor: Secured to mounting frame, with adjustable
elignment. Motors: IP 55, squirrel cage induction type, and
fan cooled. Cooling fans shell be bi-directional so that
cooling is Independent of direction of rotetion and shall be
fabricated from non-rusting and non-sparking material.
remote
7
Motors shall have high efficiency and high power
factor at full load. All motors shall meet or exceed the
minimum efficiencies stated in the highest level in the EU
agreement of the LV motors (EFF11EFF2). All motors shall
bear the IEC reference and CE marking on the motor
nameplate.
8
All motors shell be suitable for continuous heavyduty applicetion with a minimum service factor of 1.25;
alternatively, the next larger IEC motor size shall be
selected.
for
17.3.2.2
Horizontal Pumps
Construction Features
17-7
~~
../'""
~vumping Stations
2
Pumps shaO be close-coupled. centrifugal, single or
multi pie stage type, horizontally or vertically mounted and
driven by electric motor at specified rpm. Pumps shall
have self -adjusting mecharrical seats with carbon rotating
face running against stationary ceramic seat. Pumps shall
have closegrain cast iron or stainless steel casing and
mechanical seal housing, gunmetal. cast bronze, or
stainless steel impeller and stainless steel shaft.
Enclosure; IP 55.
Motor Controller: Full-voltage,
combination
magnetic type with under.voltage release feature,
motorcircuitprotectortype, and short-circuit
protective device.
Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay In
each phase.
Starting Devices: Handoffautomatic selectot
switch in cover of control panel, plus pilot device
for automatic control,
3
When the duty pumps are running together, they
shall supply the maximum demand specified. with the
remaining pump acting as standby. Under tow demand
conditions one pump shall supply sufficient water, with
remaining duty pumps acting as back up. Controls shall
automatically start second duty pump when one pump is
unable to supply demand and shall cut in standbv pump
on failure of any of the duty pumps.
4
Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled, drip proof,
squi rrel cage type, weatherproofed construction for
operation in specified ambient temperatures.
Motor
horsepower shall ensure non-ovenoading of motor
throughout capacity range of pump.
5
Membrane tank shall be welded mild steel plate,
suitable for system operating pressure constructed in
accordance with BS EN 2861, Part 1, with cylindrical shell
and convex dished ends. Membrane tank shall contain
removable rubber bag and shall be pressurized with air at
factory to correct system operating pressure to provide
sealed air cushion eliminating uso of air compressor.
Tank shall have air valve of type permitting recharging on
site by small hand compressor or simple car type pump.
Rubber bag shall be guaranteed suitable for intended use
without daterloratlon and without bursting.
6
Membrane t ank shall be complete with factory
fabricated steel legs welded to tank before testing, air
charges connection, pressure relief valve and pressure
gauges.
7
Pumping set shall be automatically controlled by
pressure switches to start pumps on fall of pressure in
tr i and stop pumps on rise of pressure.
8
Interconnecting pipe work shall be galvanized steel
pipe and fittlngs to ASTM A53 schedule 40. Valves shall be
threaded, with bronze body and trim and have a pressure
rating suitable for system working pressure. Each pump
shall have swing type, nonreturn valve at discharge,
adiustable pilot-operated pressure regulating value at
discharge, adjustable individual suction and discharge
shut off valves, Discharge manifold shall have pressure
switches, pressure gauge and vent cock.
9
Control panel shall be heavy gauge mild steel sheet
finished w ith stove hammer paint internally and externally,
with minimum IP 55 enclosure rating. Control panel sllall
be automatic, with load control and protection function
and sh.-J contain, but shall not be necessarily limited to,
the following:
17-EI
alarm when
SUitnnt Clf Ornan Standrd SpoC<fitO:oe>n for Road 1'.1 Bndgo Con.truc:icm 2010
Pumping Stations)
4
Motors:
Variable speed,
with
pre-greased,
permanently shielded, ball-type bearings. Select motors
that will not overload through full range of pump
performance cu rva.
5
Membrane tank shall be welded mild steel plate,
suitable for system operating pressure constructed in
accordance with BS EN 286-1, Part 1, with cylindrical shell
and convex dished ends. Membrane tank shall contain
removable rubber bag and shall be pressurized with air at
factory to correct system operating pressure to provide
sealed air cushion eliminating use of air compressor.
Tank shall have air valve of type permitting recharging on
site by small hand compressor or simple car type pump.
Rubber bag shall be guaranteed suitable for intended use
without deterioration and without bursting.
6
Membrane tank shall be complete with factory
fabricated steel legs welded to tank before testing, aircharges connection, pressure relief valve and pressure
gauges.
7
Pumping set shall be automatically controlled by
pressure switches to start pumps on fall of pressure in
tank and stop pumps on rise of pressure.
8
Interconnecting pipe work shall be galvanized steel
pipe and fittings to ASTM A53 schedule 40. Valves shall be
threaded, with bronze body and trim and having a
pressure rating suitable for system working pressure.
Each pump shall have swing type, non-return valve at
discharge, adjustable pilot-operated pressure regulating
value at discharge, adjustable, individual suction and
discharge shut off valves, Discharge manifold shall have
pressure switches, pressure gauge and vent cock.
9
Control Panel: Factory installed and connected as an
integral part of boaster pump; automatic for multiplepump, variable-speed operation, with load control and
protection functions.
i.
ii.
Control
Logic:
Solid-state system
with
transducers, programmable microprocessor,
VFC, and other devices in controller. Install VFC
for pump motors larger than 25 Hp in separate
panel; same type as motor control panel
enclosure.
Motor
Controller:
NEMA ICS 2,
variablefrequency, solid-state type. Some manufacturers
may offer low-voltage controls. Revise "Control
Voltage" Subparagraph below if required.
a.
iii.
iv.
v.
Pressure-
a. Time
Delay:
Controls
pump an-off
operation; adjustable from 1 to 300 seconds.
vii. VFC: Voltage-source, pulse-width, modulatingfrequency converter for each pump.
viii. Manual Bypass: Magnetic contactor arranged to
transfer to constant-speed operation upon VFC
failure.
ix. Instrumentation: Suction and discharge pressure
gages.
x.
xi.
High-suction-pressure cutout.
ii.
Low-discharge-pressu re cutout.
iii.
High-discharge-pressure cutout
17.3.2.5
17-9 .
~~
OGRLT
~~yumping Stations
Pilot tights.
4
Casing and cover shall be c!ose grained cast iron
volute of unlform quality, free from blow-holes, porosity
shrinkage defects, cracks and other defects.
5
Impeller shall be cast iron volute to ASTM A 48 Class
358 or BS EN 1561 grade 260, heavy open non.clog type
10
12
13
17 10
for
remote
14
17.3.3
Surge Tanks
Access manholes.
ii.
Hoisting hooks.
v.
17.3.4
17.3.4.1
Monorail System
Ccmst~ion
2010
Pumping Stations)
2
Suspension system shall comprise hanger rod
assemblies with ball-and-socket or T-type joints, flexibly
constructed so that carrier wheels always contact rail on
each side. Rail sha II be sufficiently thick to carry load and
provide for wear with safety factor of 5.
3
Hoist and trolley shall be of low head room
construction to permit maximum lifting and shall
comprise standard assemblies with interchanges ble parts.
Hoist ropes shall be retained in position in drum grooves
by encircling spring-loaded steel rope bands and high
grade gunmetal rope guards. Rotating shafts shall be
splined to receive gears and mounted on ball journals.
Gears shall be protected by readily removable sheet steel
covers.
4
System shall be medium duty with 5 tonnes lifting
capacity, 10 meters standard lift and lifting speed B meters
per minute with 10% creep speed.
Trolley hoist shall be electrically operated, self
5
aligning, low headroom type comprising hoist and trolley
in compact unit designed to run on lower flange of 1-beam
with travelling speed of trolley 20 meters per minute.
6
Lifting mechanism shall comprise shock resistant
steel frame, with suspension members and covers, gear
drive system, positive action load brake, lifetime
lubricated and sealed bearings and drop forged alloy
swivelling and rocking load safety hook.
7
Trolley shall be electrically driven, with size to fit I
beam girder end with alloy cast iron wheels, heat treated
end machined to uniform diameter, mounted on sealed
heavy duty precision-machined anti-friction roller or ball
bearings lubricated for life. Trolley brakes shall have 50%
torque.
8
Hoist motion brakes shell stop motion under all
service and weather conditions, with lining material
producing constant coefficient of friction, not wearing
rapidly end not scoring. Brakes shall have 150% torque of
nameplate rating of hoist motor.
9
Controls shall be selective push-bunon control for
floor operation with emergency stop button, and designed
to NEMA Standards.
10 Electric motors shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled,
squirrel cage type, weatherproof and tropics lized (IP56
Class F insulation! for operation in ambient temperatures
up to 50 deg. C.
11 Steel surfaces shall be factory painted with one coat
etch primer and one coat gloss finish paint.
12 Safe working load shall be clearly marked in large
print on unit in English and Arabic.
17.3.5
Fertilization Equipment
17.3.6
17.3.6.1 General
The Contractor shall submit complete control and
wiring diagrams for control systems for approval showing
control instruments, auxiliaries and accessories.
2
The Contractor shall provide accessories and
appurtenances as necessary and appropriate to
accomplish intended control functions, irrespective of
whether or not shown or specified, including switches,
relays, transformers etc.
3
The Contractor shall provide control wiring and
conduits as necessary and appropriate for complete
control systems, to the requirements of this Section as
directed by the Engineer.
4
Indicating instruments including pressure gauges
and level indicators shall each have a range such that
normal readings are indicated in middle of instrument
range.
5
17.3.7
Method of Measurement
1
Equipment and ancillaries are given separately and
measured by the number of each type installed. Rates for
equipment and ancillaries ere deemed to include, but not
limited to:
Factory assembled components and controls.
17-11
"J~
~~yumping S t ations
17.4
Construction Requirements
17.4.1
instruction
and
2
Monorail system shall be measured as a Lump Sum.
complete, Installed, tested, and accepted.
Fertilizer injection system shall be measured ts a
3
Lump Sum, complete. installed, tested. and accepted.
4
Electrical work in connection with pumping stations
Is given separately and measured a.s a Lump Sum,
furnished, installed, tested and accepted and is deemed to
include aU electrical work shown or the Drawings,
described in the Specification or reasonably to be implied
as necessary for the proper execution of the work.
17.3.8
Basis of Payment
17.4.2
17.3.9
Valve Installation
Iii)
Horizontal Pumps
{nr.)
(iii)
{nr.)
(nr.)
3
Valves must be operated through one complete
opening and closing cycle in the position in wh"ch they
shan be installed to ensure proper functlontf'g.
(v)
(nr.J
(vi)
Monorail System
Lump Sum
(viii
Lump Sum
(viii)
Electrical Works
Lump Sum
(fx)
Lump Sum
(it
(iv)
{nr.)
4
Joint between valve and pipe must be set In the
manner specified for laying and jointing pipe and to
manufacturer's instructions.
5
Valves shall be provided with concrete peds a.s
shown on the Drawings so that pipes do not support
weight of valve.
6
Valves without concrete pads shall be placed on firm
footings to prevent settling and excessive strain on
connectlon to pipe.
7
Valves shall not be used to bring misaligned pipe
Into alignment during installation.
11 12
Sultanate of Oman, Stonc!rd S!>oolic~ono lot flo,o~ t< l11idge Conot~o.; 2010
Pumping Stations)
8
All pressure-containing bolting ~bonnet, seal plate
and end connections! must be inspected for adequate
tightness after installation bur prior to field testing.
17.4.3
Pump Installation
3
Drains tor packing glands and base shall be piped to
nearest floor drain or sump.
4
Before operation, the Contractor shall ensure pump
is properly lubricated, rotating element rotates freely by
hand, casing is vented and full of water, direction of
rotation is correct, strainer is clean and suction and
discharge valves are open.
17.4.4
17-l3
Ref.
18.1
Title
Page No.
18.1.1
18.1.1 .1
18.1.2
18.1.3
18.1.4
18.1.5
18.1.6
Description I General
Submttals
Materials
Construction Requlrament.
Method of Measurement
Basil of Payment
ltema In the BID of Ouantltle~
18.2
1S.1
18-1
18-,
18-1
18-1
18-1
18o1
1~2
18-2
18.2.1
18.21 .1
18.2.2
18.2.3
18.2.4
18.2.6
18.2.8
General
Submittals
Mateflals
Construction Requlrarnenta
Method of Me..urement
Balla of Payment
Items in the Bill of Quantities
18l2
18-2
18-2
18-2
18-3
18-3
18-3
18.3
18-3
18.3.1
18.3.2
18.3.3
18.3.4
18.3.5
18.3.8
Deacrlptlon I General
Materials
Conatruc:tlon Requirement.
Method of Measurement
Balls of Payment
hems In the Bill of Quanthle8
18-3
18-3
18'3
18-3
18'3
18-4
Utilities)
18.1
18.1.1
1
This Sub-section describes requirements for locating
and protecting existing underground services and plant
that are affected by execution of the Works but to remain
in their position, such as utility lines and underground
water streams (Falajsl etc. The full scope of the protection
work required will be determined after investigation by the
Contractor, and he shall prepare working drawings for
such work as directed by the Engineer.
2
Existing utility services and plant, and Falajs will not
be considered as obstructions as defined in Section 1. The
Contractor shall liaise with the utility owners and other
concerned authorities regarding such utility services, plant
and Falajs in all aspects of the work. The cost of locating
and recording their positions and of working around or in
proximity to tham is deemed to be included in the
Contractor's allowance for his obligations under Section 1.
18.1.1.1 Submittals
1
Submit coordination drawings showing pipes and
major system components. Indicate interface and spatial
relationship between pipes, system components, adjacent
utilities, and proximate structures.
Submit shop drawings of existing underground
services and plant to be protected Including plan layout
and locations, types and sizes.
2
18.1.2
Materials
4
Whenever, in the course of the work, water pipes,
irrigation pipes, drainage pipes, sewers, oil, gas pipes,
electrical or telephone cables, or other unforeseen items
are encountered, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer,
who shall issue the appropriate instruction for each
individual case.
5
The precise location of existing utilities and Falajs
shall be investigated and established by the Contractor in
consultation with the relevant Utility Operator. Service
supply lines damaged in the course of the search shall be
replaced with equivalent approved materials at the
Contractor's expense.
18.1.4
Method of Measurement
1
Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Sub
section 5.1 and shalt be of the class instructed by the
Engineer. Reinforcing steel shalt comply with Sub-sect' on
5.2. Reinforced concrete shall comply with the appropriate
requirements of Sub-section 5.3.
Metalwork should
comply with Section 6.
3
Concrete surround to pipes and ducts and concrete
for inverted bo)( culverts and for blinding shall be
measured as described in Sub-section 5. 1, Clause 5. 1.5.
The volume occupied by the pipe including pipe wall shall
be deducted from the gross volume of the concrete
surround and only the net volume of the concrete
surround so calculated shall be paid for.
18.1.3
4
Reinforcing steel shall be measured as described in
Sub-section 5 2, Clause 5.2.4.
Construction Requirements
1
All excavation and backfill shall conform to the
requirements of Sub-Sections 2.3 - 'Roadway Excavat;on'
and 2.8 - 'Earthwork for pipe trenches'.
2
The protection of existing underground plant and
Fal ajs shall be carried out in strict compliance with the
requirements of the Concerned Authorities and utility
owners. The protection shall normally be in the form of
encasing the services or plant with a split 100 or 300 mm
diameter uPVC pipe wrapped with polyethylene sheets
and surrounded by concrete Class 15/20 or enclosing such
plant of large diameter such as oil or water pipes or Falajs
with an inverted concrete bo)( culvert or slab or in any
18.1.5
Basis of Payment
1
The quantity of completed and accepted work for
split pipes measured as provided for above will be paid for
at the unit rate in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rate per
linear meter shall Include labor, materials, markers and
warning tape, equipment, transportation to and hauling
about the Site, loading, unloading and cutti ng, machining,
etc. of standard length pipes.
2
Excavation and backfilling shall be paid for as
indicated in Clause 2.8.5.
~~
MJnlstry of
..../"'..~<:Utilities
Trt~npgrt &
Con1munlcatklns. OGRLT
4
Reinforcing steel shall be paid for as ind:cated in
Clause 5.2.5.
3
Gravity pipes and pressure pipes shall conform to the
requirements of Sub-section 8.2, Clause 8.2.2.
18.1.6
til
18.2
18.2.1
lin.m
18.2.2
Materials
182
4
Electricity poles, ducts, handholes/manholes and
overhead and underground electricity cab!es, shall
conform to the requ!raments of Section 15 and of the
Concerned Authority.
5
Telecommunicatlon ducts, handholes/manholes and
cables related to telephone works, shall conform to the
telecommunication authority specifications and details,
6
Sand and sieved backfill material free from stones or
other debris shall be provided for reinstating the !ranches
after the laying of ducts.
18.2.3
Construction Requirements
Suit""" to of Om11n, 51r>efmf Spodfial\iono for Ro:ld Itt Bridge CGNtN<1ion 2111 D
Utilities)
7
During excavation, warning tiles or tape shall be
retrieved carefully and may be reused. The damaged
warning tiles or tape shall be replaced by the Contractor at
his own cost. Concreting and backfilling operations shall
be carefully executed to ensure that there shall be no
damage to the utilities.
2
The Contractor shall be responsible for preparation
of shop/\Norking drawings, procurement of material and
for following-upfco-ordination with the concerned
authorities in all maners relating to this work.
18.2.4
Method of Measurement
3
Provision and installation of new utility services shall
be measured in linear meters of the length of new service
installed. Rates shall include for all work except excavation
as stated in Item (4) below.
4
Excavation and backfilling whether by hand or
machinery for removal, relocation/diversion of existing
utilities shall be measured as indicated in Sub-section 2.8,
Clause 2.8.4.
5. No work will be measured and no payment made for
work carried out by the Concerned Authorities nor for any
work in connection therewith by the Contractor unless
prior approval for payment is given by the Engineer
18.2.5
Basis of Payment
18.2.6
(if
(il)
(iii)
18.3
18.3.1
18.3.2
Materials
2
Sleevesfducts shall be uPVC for small pipes less than
400 mm in diameter and concrete for larger pipes. Pipes
shall conform to the requirements of Sub-section 8.2,
Clause 8.2.2.
3
Locations and sizes of pipe sleeves are as shown on
the Drawings.
18.3.3
Construction Requirements
3
Markers should be placed on both ends of the
sleeves/ducts. In addition a ropa should be installed inside
the pipe and tied at both ends to the markers underground
concrete support block or to an adjacent landmark.
4
All elCcavation and backfill shall conform to the
requirements of Sub-sections 2.3 - 'Roadway Excavation'
and 2.7- 'Excavation and Backfilling for Structures'.
18.3.4
Method of Measurement
18.3.5
Basis of Payment
18-3
~~
DGRLT
~~"'Utilities
18.3.6
18-4 .
lin.m.
Ref.
Trtle
19.1
General
19.1.1
Description
19.2
Compaction Plant
19.2.1
19.2.2
19.2.3
19.2.4
19.2.6
19.2.8
Genel'lll
Pneumatic-Tired Rolle111
Hellll'( Pneumatic-Tired Rollei'IJ
SelfProponed Pneumatic-Tired Rollen
Tamping Rollera
1iitle
19-1
19.10
Heating Equipment
19-1
19.11
19-1
19.12
19-7
19-1
19-1
19-1
19-1
19-1
19.13
19-7
19.14
19-7
19.14.1
19.14.2
19.2.7
19.2.8
Ref.
!?age No.
Vibrating Rollei'IJ
Trench Rollera
19-1
19-2
19-2
19.3
Miscellaneous Equipment
19.3.1
19.3.2
19.3.3
19.3,4
19.3.5
19.3.6
Dltc Harrows
19-2
19-2
19-2
19-2
19-2
19-2
19.4
Hauling Equipment
19-2
19.5
Weigh Bridges
19-2
19.6
19-3
19.7
19-3
19.7.1
19.7.2
General
19.7.3
Additional Requirements
Mechanical Sweepera
Mechanical Rammen
Motai'Gradera
Rotary Speed Mixera
19-3
Additional Requirements
for Batc:h-Type Plants
for Continuous Mixing Plants
19.8
19-2
19-4
19-6
19-5
19.8.1
19.8.2
Asphalt Pavera
19-6
Aggregate Spreedera
19-5
19.9
Pressure Distributors
19-6
19.15
19.161
19.15.2
19.15.3
Genel'lll
19-7
19-8
19-9
19-9
19-10
19-10
19.16
19-6
19.16.4
Page No.
Method of Measurement
and Basis of Payment
19-11
19-11
SultDnat Df Omnn. Srondord Spedfiartlans for Road & a dge CQnsltuaion 2010
19.1
General
19.1.1
Description
19.2
Compaction Plant
19.2.1
General
19.2.2
Pneumatic-Tired Rollers
19.2.3
19.2.4
Self-Propelled Pneumatic-Tired
Rollers
19.2.5
Tamping Rollers
19.2.6
19-1
~~
Commurdc~tion
OGRLT
19.2.7
Trench RoUers
19.3
Miscellaneous Equipment
19.3.1
Disc Harrows
19.3.2
Mechanical Sweepers
19.3.3
Mechanical Rammers
192
Motor Graders
19.3.5
Vibrating Rollers
19.2.8
19.3.4
19.3.6
19.4
Hauling Equipment
19.5
Weigh Bridges
and certified by an
the Engineer deems
show the date of the
Company making the
3
If no suitable company ex!sts, or if instructed by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall check and adjust the scale
in the presence of the Engineer, using the method
recommended bv the manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of ten
25kg standard test weights for each scale on Site for
checking purposes.
4
The Contractor shall, when Instructed bv the
Engineer, make mass comparisons with other
permanently located scales that meet the approva l of the
Engineer. The comparisons shall be for the purpose of
providing information on the performance of the
Contractor's scle and will not be used as a basis for
adjusting the scale.
5
Access to the scale platform shall be maintained by
the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and a
suitable weathertight building shall be provided to enclose
the indicating mechanism Adequate lighting for the scale
operator's use shall be installed.
19.6
19.7
19.7.1
General
1 ~3
~~
OGRLT
19.7.2
19-4 .
2
If aggregates are measured by volume in calibrated
compartments these shall form the weigh hopper and
shall be arranged so that the volume measurement of
each compartment and each batch may be checked by
mass. Means of checking the volume measurement shall
meet the approval of the Engineer.
3
The weigh scale shall be a spring less dial type with a
capacity of not more than twice the mass of the capacity
of the mhcer.
4
The mineral filler shall be weighed in the aggregate
hopper or measured by volume in a calibrated
compartment and shall be conveyed by means of a dust
elevator and screw conveyor system. The system shall be
so arranged that the accuracy of the feed will not be
affected by the head of material in the mineral filler bin.
The screw conveyor shall operate at such a speed that
small fractions of material to be weighed may be added
accurately. The chute used to introduce mineral filler into
the weigh hopper shall be so constructed that no material
1s retained in it after the required amount has been
deposited in the weigh hopper.
5
Equipment for weighing and measuring bitumen
shall consist either of a weigh bucket or a metering device.
If a weigh bucket is used it shall be a nontilting type and
shall be completely suspended from a springless dial scale
accurate to :t0.4%. The weigh bucket, discharge valve or
valves and spray bar shalt be heated and shall have a
capacity of at least 15% in excess of the mass of material
required in the batch. Heated, quickacting, nondrip
valves shall be used in charging the bucket.
6
Metering devices shall have a capacity at least 15% in
excess of the quantity of bitumen used in a batch. Controls
shall be constructed so that they may be locked at any dial
sening and wiB automatically reset to that reading after
the addition of bituminous material. The amou nt of
material which the Contractor will be permitted to mhc per
batch shall be determined by the Eng'neer. The m ixer
shall be a twln-shaft type. Drip pans shall be used under
the mixer where necessary to prevent moisture from
dripping onto truck loads of freshly prepared asphalt. Pipe
finings shall be tight. The mixer platform shall be
sufficiently rig id and of ample s!ze to provide safe and
convenient access to the mixer and other equipment.
7
The mixer shall be equipped with an accurate time
lock to control the operations of a complete mixing cycle.
It shall lock the weigh bo x gate after the charging of the
mhcer until the closing of the mixer gate on completion of
the cycle. It shall lock the bitumen bucket throughout the
dry mhcing period and shall lock the mixer gate
throughout both dry and wet mixing periods. The dry
mixing period Is defined as the interval of time between
the opening of the weigh box gate and the start of the
introduction of bitumen. The wet mixing period Is the
Interval of time between the start of the introduction of
bitumen and the opening ofthe mixer gate. Control of the
timing shall be flexible and capable of being set at
intervals of 5 seconds or less throughout a total cycle.
Sening of t ime Intervals shall be performed in the
a~
t. Bridj,eCo ,.,
----------P--Ia_n_t__
a_n_d_E
__
q_u-ip
__
rn_e_n_t~~
19.7.3
8
The pugmill shall be equipped with a discharge
hopper having a minimum capacity of 900kg.
19.8
19.8.1
Asphalt Pavers
19.8.2
Aggregate Spreaders
195
~
~
19.9
Pressure Distributors
19--6
19.10
Heating Equipment
19.11
SultanBt1t Dl Oman. Slndrd Specifiatians for Rood & BndQe ConslructJon 2010
19.12
1
Portable concrete mixers for incidental construction
shall be of the batch type. Mixers involving placing 25m3
or more in a single pour shall have a rated capacity of not
less than 0. 25m3 per batch. Other portable mixers shall
have a rated capacity of not less than 0.17m3 per batch.
The mixer shall be equipped with a batch meter, timing
device and water measuring device as specified in Clause
19.1 1.
2
Pick-up and threw-over blades in the drum of the
mixer which are worn down more than 20mm shall be
replaced with new blades.
19.13
19.14
19.14.1 General
The plant shall be approved by the Engineer before
production begins. Bins, weighing hoppers and scales
shalt be arranged to the satisfaction of the Engineer so
that the weigh beam, dial or dial scale is in full view of the
operator controlling the gates. valves or belts that feed
material into the weighing hopper. The plant shalt be
equipped with a room as specified in Sub-section 19.7
2
Storage bins shalt have sufficient capacity for
adequate supply of material to weighing hoppers. They
shall be supported by a rigid framework on a solid
foundation. Bins shalt have adequate separate
compartments for each size of aggregate and for bulk
cement when used. The top of the fine aggregate
compartment shall be equipped with a tilted screen
having a maximum mesh size of 2.5mm through which all
fine aggregate must pass. Each compartment shalt be
designed to discharge material efficiently and freely into
the weighing hopper. Means of control shalt be provided
so that when the quantity to be obtained is being
approached the flow of material can be gradually retarded
and completely shut off, without leakage, at the moment
the desired amount has been discharged.
19 7
~~
3
Weighi ng hoppers shall be completely suspended
from scale and shall hang free and except as further
provided, shall have sufficient capacity to contain
materials to be weighed for one batch of concrete without
shoveling and without jiggling the hopper to keep bin
gates and chute openings free of material. Cement shaD
be weighed in a hopper and independent of the hoppers
used for weighing aggregate.
4
Batching equipment insufficient in capacity to weigh
materials required for a full batch will be permitted
provided the capacity of the hoppers is sufficient to weigh
3
all materials for at least 1m of concrete for any mixer of
rated capacity of 1m3 or larger. Disproportion between
botching equipment and the mixer shall not be so great
that more than 3 weighings of each material will be
required for charging the mixer.
5
Aggregate hoppers shall have a port or other
opening for removal of overload unless sufficient
clearance exists between the bottom of the bin gate and
the top of the hopper. The top of the cement hopper shall
be closed to prevel'lt escape of cement while It is being
weighed. Hoppers shall be designed to eliminate
accumulation of unused material and leakage through
discharge gates during weighing. They shall be capable of
discharging materi al efficiently and completely into batch
trucks or the mixer without the necessity of beating or
jiggling. If a hopper In the opinion of the Engineer does
not discharge material satisfactorily, it shall be provided
with a vibrator of sufficient frequency and power to
provide comp!ete discharge Weighing hoppers shall be
enclosed or otherwise protected against wind. When bins
are not available, mat erials shall be weighed in cont ainers.
End loaders shall not be used for loading the weighing
hopper.
Scales may be of either the horizontal beam or
6
springless dial type designed as an integral unit of the
batchlng plant and shall be of rugged construction. Beam
type scares used for weighing one size or kind of
aggregate shaH have one full capacity weigh beam.
Multipl e beam scales used in weighing more than one size
or kind of aggregate shall have as many beams as the
number of sizes or ki nds of aggregate to be weighed.
Individual beams shall have such capacities as will permit
the required mass of each size or kind of material to be set
off on a single beam. The scale shall be provided with
suitable lockouts so that weigh beams may be engaged to
weigh in the desired order.
7
Each weigh beam shall have some means placed in a
position from which it can be viewed without parallax by
the operator while charging the hopper, to indicate when
the beam Is In the proper balance position. Poises shall be
constructed so that they wiD be held firmly in position.
Beam scales shall have a provision such as a tell-tale d'al
for indicating to the operator that the required load in the
hopper is being approached. Such a device shall indicate
at least the last 1OOkg of load in the case of scales used for
weighing aggtegate and at least the last 50kg of load in
the case of scales used for weighing cement
1!).8
8
Springless dial scales shall be provided with suitable
markers inside the glass cover and in front of the dial
which may be set to show the position of the dial ind1c:ator
for the required load or various cumulative loads when
more than one size or kind of aggregate Is weighed in the
same hopper. Markers shall be in distinctive colors for the
various materials to be weighed.
9
The value of the minimum graduation interval of any
scale shall be not more than 0.2% of the batch mass and
not more than 0.1% of the capacity of the scale. The value
of the minimum graduation interval of any scale used for
weighing water shall be not less than 1kg. Scales shall be
designed and built so that accuracy within the maximum
tolerance of :1: 0.4% of the net load in the hopper will be
maintai ned.
10 When a beam scale is used for weighing cement 11
tare shall be provided end the weigh beams shall be
capable of being lifted out of the weighing position so that
the tare weight of the hopper can be checked after each
weighing operation to determine if ell the cement he's
been discharged into the batch.
11 Scales sha P be housed or otherwise protected
against the effect of wind in a manner meeting the
approval of the Engineer.
12 Ten standard 10kg we!ghts shall be available on Site
for use in calibrating and testing weighing equipment.
Weights will not be required when scales are calibrated by
t rained scale personnel with adequate scale testing
equipment and the calibration is observed by the Engineer.
13 Means of access for inspection purposes shall be
safe and shd meet the approval of the Engineer. In the
case of permanently located batching plants, means of
access shall be an inclined stairway with a handrail
located so that its upward flight will end on t he scale
operator's platform. It shall be firmly attached to the
supporting members of the bin. The weigh platform shall
have a floor of metal grid or 50mm thick timber planks.
Sultan"t" of Omn. Stndard Spedfotlt!Ofll for Ro.d & Hndg Conctn.ctlon 2010
4
The arrangement shall be such that the scales of the
system can be conveniently checked for accuracy. Scales
shell be designed end built so that when dreg due to the
weighing control device is included, accuracy within 0.4%
of the net load in the hopper will be maintained.
5
When mixing water is measured volumetrically
provision shall be made for by-passing measured water
into a container for checking the accuracy of delivery. If
water is measured during the course of its flow into the
batch, means shall be provided to show at any time
during the flow, the amount that has entered. Devices for
volumetric measurement of mtxtng water shall
automatically reset at the initial position immediately after
delivery of the measured amount and be ready for the
next batch cycle.
6
The dispenser for an admixture shall provide a visual
indication that the admixture is actually entering the batch.
The tube through which it is conducted into the stream of
the mixing water shall be transparent, or shall have a
translucent section.
7
The plant shall be provided with gates, valves or
other suitable devices, which, when activated by a single
starting mechanism, shall set in motion the charging of
weigh hoppers or other containers and which, in weighing
or measuring any given material. shall end the charging
when the desired amount has been attained. It shell be
capable of having quantities preset on a central control
panel that will result in the correct measurement of the
material for each batch. Control adjustments shell be
capable of being performed on the same panel.
8
An over and under indicating device shall be
provided to show whether the amount of material
weighed is within the allowable tolerance. An interlock
shall be provided, firstly so that the charging device can
open or start only when the scale indicates zero load end
when the weigh hopper or container discharging gate or
valve is closed, and secondly so that the discharge gate or
valve can open only when the desired mass within the
allowable tolerance is in the weigh hopper or container
and when the charging device is closed or stopped. If
different kinds or cia sses of aggregates are weighed
cumulatively into the same hopper, control and interlock
shall be provided with respect to each increment of mass,
as required for material weighed into an individual hopper.
Mixing water end admixture may be measured
volumetrically.
9
Automatic batching equipment for weighing or
measuring batch quantities in increments shell be
provided with an automatic repeater having a counter that
can be set for the number of increments required and
allowing the required number of increments to be
accurately delivered and discharged into each batch.
10 The belching system shall be activated by a single
starting mechanism and be completely interlocked so that
the discharge gates or valves can open only when the
mixer is in the proper position for receiving material.
11 The Interlocking system shall allow the batch to enter
the mixer so that some water is In advance of the
19.15
19.15.1 General
Flexible or curved forms of proper radius, made of
either metal or wood, shall be supplied for use on curves
of 30m radius or less. Straight side forms shall be of metal.
They shall be of adequate cross section and supplied in
sections not less than 3m in length. They shall have a
height not less than the edge thickness of the pavement to
be constructed, a base width equal to or greater than the
height and not less than 6mm in thickness, except that a
minimum thickness of 5mm will be permitted if the form is
of trapezoidal cross section. They shall have flange braces
extending outward on the base not less than 213 the
height of the form and spaced not more than 1.5m apart.
Sections shall have a steel pin at each end and at least one
intermediate pin; provision shall be made to lock pins to a
true grade. Locked joints sha II be provided between form
~~
5
Mechanical form graders, if used, shall be so
designed that they may be adjusted and controlled to cut
to a given profile and produce a subgrade for the
pavement forms or for slip-form paver track as shown on
the drawings.
3
Heavy subgrade templates shall be made of steel and
designed so that they can be moved backwards and
forwards In a vertical position. They shall be mounted on
rollers, wheels or tracks, adjustable vertically, end have a
total mass not less than 225kg for widths of 5m or more.
Test points shall be spaced not more than 150mm centre
to centre and be adjustable so t hat they may be set to
conform to the cross section of the subgrade.
4
Water supply equipment shall be of such capacity
and design as to provide an ample supply and adequate
pressure si multaneously for ell the requirements of
machinery, mixing, curing. wetting subgrede and other
features of the work.
19-10
7
Longitudinal float machines shall be so constructed
that travel of the floating mechanism can be adjusted to
conform to the pavement cross section shown on the
Drawings or formed by the finishing machine.
8
Formless pavers shall be self-propelled and fitted
with suitable devices for distr"buting, finishing and
spreading concrete to the full-width and thickness as
shown on the Drawings. The tracks shall be of sufficient
length and width to properly support the machine and its
load without causing depressions. They shall be equipped
with a strike-off screed and internal vibrators of sufficient
quantity to provide complete compaction regardless of the
depth of concrete placed.
19.16
19-11
Ref.
Tftle
20.1
P.reamble
PagaNo.
20..1
20.1.1
20.1.2
20.1.3
Materials
2G-1
Quantities
20.1
2G-1
20.1.4
Symbols, Abbreviations
20.1.5
Deacriptlona
and Oeflnhlons
20.2
20.3
- --
20.1
Preamble
20.1.1
Materials
al
b)
c)
dl
20.1.2
Quantities
a)
b)
c)
dl
el
20.1.3
a)
Descriptions
Headings to groups of items in the Bill of
Quantities are to be read as part of the
descriptions of the items to which the headings
cl
dl
in
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
xii.
~~
OORLT
xviil
xix.
xx.
xxi.
xxii.
xxUl
ii. insurances,
ill.
iv.
vii.
temporary
telephones,
faxes
and
photocopying equipment for the u se of
the Contractor and the Engineer, and the
cost of local calls,
viii.
temporary
roads,
crossings and the like,
hardstandings,
a)
Symbols,
Definitions
Abbreviations
and
1ine1r meter
sq.m :
square meter
cu.m "
cubic meter
em '"'
centimeter
mm
millimeter
nr
kg
number
"'
kilogramme
'"
percentage
,.
%
tonne (metric)
LS.
lump sum
dn
nominal diametar
xvl.
Qty "'
quantity
xvii.
Drg :
drawing.
M J]I c
Mega Pascal
PS "
Provisional Sum
xv.
20-2 .
20.1 .4
bl
20.1.5
a)
ii.
iii.
iv.
80
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
20-3